2018 Skoda Superb 40
2018 Skoda Superb 40
2018 Skoda Superb 40
I confirm that I have taken delivery of the specified vehicle in good condi-
tion, have received information on how to operate it correctly, and have
had the terms of the warranty explained to me.
Years: or km/mile-
age:
or
Miles:
a)
Due to the requirements of generally binding country-specific regulations, the
date of first registration can be specified instead of the date the vehicle hand-
over.
3V0012720AG
b)
Depending on which comes first.
1st vehicle owner 2nd vehicle owner
This vehicle with the official registration This vehicle with the official registration
number number
(filled in by the vendor) belongs to:
belongs to:
Title, Name/Company:
Title, Name/Company:
Address:
Address:
Telephone:
Telephone:
ŠKODA partner
ŠKODA partner
Service consultant:
Service consultant:
Telephone:
Telephone:
3V0012720AG
Useful links Adaptive cruise control » page 232
Lane Assist » page 243
Before starting off Parking
Adjusting the seat » page 80 Electric parking brake » page 204
Adjusting the steering wheel » page 21 Parking the vehicle » page 206
Exterior mirrors » page 79 Parking aid » page 215
Headlights/lights » page 68 Reversing camera » page 222
Windscreen wipers and washers » page 77
Care and maintenance
Heating and ventilation » page 114
Service intervals » page 52
Heated windscreen » page 75
Tyre pressure » page 272
Instrument cluster Washing the vehicle » page 257
Warning lights » page 37 Folding the windscreen wiper arms securely » page 289
Display operation » page 49
Inspecting and replenishing
Set the time » page 47
Refuelling » page 261
Unlocking and opening AdBlue® » page 263
Keyless unlocking (KESSY) » page 56 Engine oil » page 266
Luggage compartment lid » page 60 Windscreen washer fluid » page 266
Power windows » page 63
Emergencies
Bonnet » page 265
Emergency call » page 15
Connectivity Vehicle tool kit » page 277
Online Services – ŠKODA Connect » page 13 Lamp replacement » page 295
SmartLink+ » page 172 Replacing fuses » page 291
Connecting Infotainment to the Internet » page 169 Changing a wheel » page 278
Hotspot (WLAN) » page 170 Jump-starting » page 283
Making telephone calls » page 158 Towing the vehicle » page 284
Configuration wizard » page 129
Interesting tips
Driving Electronic version of the Owner's Manual » page 10
Automatic gearbox » page 208 Tutorial videos » page 11
Braking and stabilizing systems » page 213
START-STOP system » page 202
Seat belts 22 Lights and visibility 68
Table of Contents
Using seat belts 22 Light 68
Liability for defects and ŠKODA Warranty for Inertia reel and belt tensioners 24 Headlight Assist (Light Assist / Dynamic Light
new cars 6 Assist) 72
Airbag system 25
Interior lighting 73
Accident data recorder (Event Data Description of the airbag system 25
Recorder) 8 Visibility 75
Airbag deactivation 27
Windscreen wipers and washers 76
Radio equipment - Information on Directive Transporting children safely 29 Rear view mirror 78
2014/53/EU 9 Child seat 29
Seats and head restraints 80
Fastening systems 32
About the Owner's Manual Front seats 80
Introductory information 10 Using the system Rear seats 84
General 10 Headrests 85
Cockpit 35 Seat heating and ventilation 86
Printed Owner's Manual 10 Overview 34
Electronic version of the Owner's Manual 10 Heated steering wheel 87
Tutorial videos 11 Instruments and warning lights 36 Practical features 88
Application MyŠKODA App 11 Instrument cluster 36 Passenger compartment features 88
Notes 12 Warning lights 37 Electrical sockets 97
Information system 47 Ashtray and cigarette lighter 99
Online Services Driver information system 47 Tablet holder 100
ŠKODA Connect 13 Operation of the information system 49 Transport of cargo 102
Service packageŠKODA Connect 13 Driving data (Multifunction display) 49 Luggage compartment 102
ŠKODA Connect website 13 Menus in the display of the instrument Variable loading floor in the luggage
User and vehicle registration, activation of cluster 51 compartment (Estate) 111
online services 13 Service intervals 52 Net partition 112
Managing online services 15 Personalization 53 Transportation on the roof rack 113
Emergency call 15 Unlocking and opening 55
Care Connect Services 16 Heating and ventilation 114
Unlocking and locking 55 Heating, manual air conditioning system,
Infotainment Online services 17 Anti-theft alarm system 59 Climatronic 114
Manually operated tailgate 60 Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and
Safety
Electric boot lid 61 ventilation) 119
Passive Safety 19 Window operation 63
General information 19 Panoramic tilting / sliding sunroof 65 Infotainment
Correct and safe seating position 19
Introductory information 122
Important information 122
Infotainment Overview 122
Table of Contents 3
Infotainment operation 125 Telephone 158 Driving
Infotainment operation 125 Introductory information 158
Voice control 130 Pairing and connecting 160 Starting-off and Driving 200
Updating the Infotainment software 132 Use the SIM card in the external module 163 Starting and stopping the engine 200
Telephone functions 164 START-STOPsystem 202
Infotainment settings - Columbus, Amundsen,
Text messages (SMS) 167 Brakes and Parking 204
Bolero 133
Manual gear changing and pedals 207
Infotainment system settings 133 Data connection 169
Automatic transmission 207
Menu Settings Radio 136 Internet connection 169
Running in the engine and economical
Media menu settings 137 Connecting via the CarStick device 169 driving 210
Image menu settings 137 Establishing a connection using a SIM card in Avoiding damage to your vehicle 211
Video DVD menu settings 137 the external module 170
Settings 137 Establishing a connection using the Bluetooth Assist systems 212
SmartLink+ menu settings 138 ® rSAP profile 170 General information 212
Navigation menu settings 139 Connecting via WLAN 170 Braking and stabilisation systems 213
Parking aid (ParkPilot) 215
Infotainment settings - Swing 141 SmartLink 172
Rear traffic alert and wizard for “Blind
Infotainment system settings 141 Introductory information 172
spot”Monitoring 219
Radio menu settings 142 Android Auto 173
Rear View Camera 222
Media menu settings 143 Apple CarPlay 174
Park Assist 225
Import contactsTelephone menu settings 143 MirrorLink® 175
Cruise Control System 230
SmartLink+ menu settings 143 ApplicationŠKODA OneApp 175
Speed limiter 231
Radio 144 Navigation 177 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 232
service 144 Introductory information 177 Front Assist 238
Search for destination and enter 180 Select the driving mode (Driving Mode
Media 147
Saved destinations 183 Selection) 240
service 147
Import your own goals 185 Proactive occupant protection (Crew Protect
Audio sources 149 Assist) 242
Map 187
Images 153 Route guidance 189 Spurhalteassistent (Lane Assist) 243
Image viewer 153 Route 192 Traffic jam assistant 245
Waypoint mode 194 Assistant for emergencies 245
Video DVD 155
Traffic reports 197 Traffic sign recognition 246
video player 155
Fatigue detection system 248
Media Command 156 vehicle systems 199
Tyre pressure monitoring 248
Operation 156 CAR - Vehicle settings 199
Towing device and trailer 250
Hitch 250
Using hitch 251
4 Table of Contents
General Maintenance Technical data
Care and maintenance 255 Technical data 299
Service work, adjustments and technical Basic vehicle data 299
alterations 255 Vehicle-specific details per engine type 305
Cleaning and care 256
Index
Inspecting and replenishing 261
Fuel 261
AdBlue® and its refilling 263
Engine compartment 264
Engine oil 266
Coolant 267
Brake fluid 269
Vehicle battery 269
Wheels 272
Wheels and tyres 272
Operating in winter conditions 274
Do-it-yourself
Emergency equipment and self-help 276
Emergency equipment 276
Changing a wheel 278
Puncture repair kit 281
Jump-starting 283
Towing the vehicle 284
Remote control and removable light -
changing the battery 286
Emergency unlocking / unlocking of doors 288
Replacing windscreen wiper blades 289
Fuses and light bulbs 291
Fuses 291
Bulbs 295
Table of Contents 5
One of the conditions for service from the ŠKODA warranty is that all service
Liability for defects and ŠKODA Warranty for new cars work has been carried out in a timely and adequate manner and in accordance
with ŠKODA AUTO provisions. It must be proven that service work has been
Materials defect liability carried out properly and in accordance with the ŠKODA AUTO provisions
Your ŠKODA Partner, as a vendor, is liable to you for material damage to your when raising a claim from the ŠKODA warranty. In the event of a missed serv-
new ŠKODA car, ŠKODA Genuine Parts or ŠKODA Genuine Accessories in ac- ice or failure to carry out a service according to the ŠKODA AUTO provisions,
cordance with statutory regulations and the purchase agreement. you may still be entitled to warranty claims as long as you can prove that the
ŠKODA warranty for new cars missed service or the failure to carry out a service according to the ŠKODA
As well as the materials defect liability, ŠKODA AUTO a.s. grants you the AUTO provisions was not the cause of the defect.
ŠKODA warranty for new cars (hereinafter referred to as “ŠKODA warranty),” Natural wear and tear to your vehicle is not covered by the ŠKODA warranty.
according to the conditions described below. The ŠKODA warranty also does not cover faults to bodywork, installations or
As part of the ŠKODA warranty, ŠKODA AUTO will ensure the following serv- conversions provided by third-parties, or vehicle faults caused as a result. The
ices. same applies to accessories that are not factory installed and/or delivered.
▶ Free repair of faulty components or vehicle defects that occur within two In addition, this warranty does not apply if the defect was caused by one of the
years from the start of the ŠKODA warranty. following:
▶ Free repair of paintwork defects on your vehicle that occur within three ▶ Unauthorized use, improper handling (e.g. use in racing competitions or over-
years from the start of the ŠKODA warranty. loading), improper care and maintenance or unapproved modification to your
▶ Free repair of rust perforation to the bodywork of your vehicle that occurs vehicle.
within twelve years from the start of the warranty. Only rust perforation of ▶ Non-compliance with provisions in the Owner's Manual or other factory-sup-
body panels from the inside to the outside is included in the definition of rust plied instructions.
perforation on bodywork and covered by the ŠKODA warranty. ▶ External causes or influences (e.g. accidents, hail, flooding etc.).
▶ Parts fitted or connected on or in the vehicle whose use has not been ap-
The start of warranty is the date on which the first buyer purchases the new
cars from the ŠKODA Partner1). This date must be noted accordingly by the proved by ŠKODA AUTO, or modification of the vehicle in a manner not ap-
ŠKODA Partner in the Owner´s Manual for your vehicle » Documentation of proved by ŠKODA AUTO (e.g. tuning).
▶ Damage caused by you that was not immediately seen to by a specialist ga-
vehicle handover.
rage or was not rectified properly.
Vehicle repairs may be carried out either by replacing the faulty part or by re-
pairing it. Replaced parts become the property of the ŠKODA Service Partner. It is the customer's responsibility to prove that it was not the cause.
There shall be no further claims arising from the ŠKODA warranty. In particu- This ŠKODA warranty does not affect the purchaser's statutory rights from
lar, there shall be no claims for replacement, cancellation, provision of a cour- materials defect liability from the vehicle vendor and other potential claims
tesy vehicle for the duration of repairs or compensation for damages. from product liability laws.
The ŠKODA warranty is valid at any ŠKODA service partner. Mobility warranty
The mobility warranty provides a sense of security when travelling in your ve-
hicle.
1)
Due to the requirements of generally binding country-specific regulations,
the date of first registration can be specified instead of the date the vehicle
handover.
Note
The ŠKODA extended warranty is only available in some countries.
EDR data is only recorded if an accident causes the restraint systems to be ac-
tivated. Under normal driving conditions there is no data recording and there is
no audio or video recording of the vehicle interior or the vehicle environment.
Personal data such as name, gender, age or place where the accident occurred
is also not stored in the EDR. However, third parties such as law enforcement
authorities may use certain resources to connect EDR content to other data
sources, and therefore deduce the identification of some of the people in-
volved in the accident when investigating the causes of the accident.
Fig. 1
ŠKODA websites
The operation of some vehicle functions can be displayed in the form of video Installing the MyŠKODA App application
instructions. › Scan the QR code » Fig. 4 .
Show menu with video instructions
› Scan the QR code » Fig. 3 or enter the following address in your web brows-
er.
http://go.skoda.eu/owners-manuals-videos
Note
The video instructions are only available in some language versions.
Fig. 4 The MyŠKODA App application is available for devices with the
Android (Google) or iOS (Apple) operating system.
Introductory information 11
Notes
Terms used
“Specialist” - Workshop - a workshop that carries out specialist service tasks
for ŠKODA vehicles. A specialist can be a ŠKODA Partner, a ŠKODA
Service Partner, or an independent workshop.
“ŠKODA Service Partner” - A workshop that has been contractually author-
ised by ŠKODA AUTO or its distribution partner to perform service work
on ŠKODA vehicles and to sell ŠKODA Genuine Parts.
“ŠKODA Partner” - A company that has been authorised by ŠKODA AUTO or
its distribution partner to sell new ŠKODA vehicles and, when applicable,
to service them using ŠKODA Genuine Parts and sell ŠKODA Genuine
Parts.
Text notes
“Press” - Short press (e.g. a button) within 1 s
“Hold” - Long press (e.g. a button) for more than 1 s
Direction indications
All direction indications such as “left”, “right”, “front”, “rear” relate to the for-
ward direction of travel of the vehicle.
Explanation of symbols
→ Marker to the next operation step
WARNING
Texts with this symbol draw attention to threats of a serious accident, in-
jury or loss of life.
CAUTION
Texts with this symbol draw attention to the risk of vehicle damage or possible
inoperability of some systems.
Note
Texts with this symbol contain additional information.
ŠKODA Connect
Service packageŠKODA Connect
The ŠKODA Connect online services extend the vehicle and Infotainment func-
tions with the CareConnect and Infotainment Online service packages.
Care Connect Fig. 5 Starting ŠKODA Connect
The CareConnect services include the following features.
The ŠKODA Connect website contains information about the online services
▶ Emergency, information and breakdown call.
and their functions, access to the ŠKODA Connect Portal website, as well as
▶ Proactive service offering to connect with your ŠKODA service partner.
the option to download the ŠKODA Connect application.
▶ Remote access to the vehicle using the ŠKODA Connect application.
The ŠKODA Connect website can be opened by scanning the QR code » Fig. 5
In order for the Care Connect services to work, a mobile network must be
or by entering the following address in your web browser.
available.
http://go.skoda.eu/connectivity
infotainment online
The Infotainment Online services extend the Infotainment functions, e.g. with
the following functions. User and vehicle registration, activation of online services
▶ Weather forecast. Website ŠKODA Connect Portal
▶ Filling
station search with information on fuel prices.
▶ Online traffic information.
▶ Online destination search.
ŠKODA Connect 13
Information on registering for and activating online services Note
For help with registration, activation as well as the Internet connection, please
contact a ŠKODA service partner.
Activation in Infotainment
› Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
› Tap the sensor field and then the function surface → ŠKODA Connect
(Online Services) → Registration.
Fig. 7 Instructional video on registration and activation of services › Enter and confirm the registration PIN code received during user and vehicle
registration on the ŠKODA Connect Portal website.
› Wait until the message Registration complete. is displayed (can take several mi-
nutes)
› Confirm the message.
Note
■ Availability of a GPS signal and a mobile network is required for activation.
■ In vehicles that only have Infotainment Online Services, a GPS signal must be
Fig. 8 Electronic version of the instructions for registration and activa- available and the Infotainment must be connected with the Internet for activa-
tion of services tion.
■ The list of services can be displayed » page 15, Display of service manage-
Instructional video on registration and activation of services ment.
Registration and activation are carried out in accordance with the instruction
video. Deleting/switching the vehicle user
The instruction video can be opened by scanning the QR code » Fig. 7 or enter- Deleting the user
ing the following address into the web browser. › Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
http://go.skoda.eu/connect-video › Tap the sensor field and then the function surface → ŠKODA Connect
(Online Services) → Registration.
Electronic version of the instructions for registration and activation of › Tap the function surface Delete owner → Delete and confirm the delete process.
services
Current information on registration and activation of Online Services can be Changing the user
found in the electronic version of the instructions for the Online Services on › Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
the ŠKODA Connect website. › Tap the sensor field and then the function surface → ŠKODA Connect
(Online Services) → Registration.
The electronic version of the instructions can be opened by scanning the QR › Tap the function surface New owner → Transfer ownership.
code » Fig. 8 or by entering the following address in the web browser. › Enter and confirm the registration PIN code received during registration of
http://go.skoda.eu/connect-manual the new user and during vehicle registration on the ŠKODA Connect Portal
website.
› If necessary, confirm the change of user by tapping the function surface
Change main users.
14 Online Services
Note Note
By deleting the registered vehicle in the user account on the ŠKODA Connect The emergency call remains fully functional after activation of the Private mode
Portal website, the user is also deleted in the infotainment system. function or after deactivation of Care Connect. The functions of the informa-
tion and breakdown call are limited.
Managing online services
Activated localisation services
Display of service management
Fig. 9
In Services Management, it is possible to display information about the online
Symbols of activated localisa-
services, the validity of their license, or to switch the services on/off.
tion services
› Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
› Tap the sensor field and then the function surface → ŠKODA Connect (on-
line services) → Services Management.
› To display the designations and the status of the services, select the de-
sired service.
› For detailed information about the service tap the function surface .
› To switch the services on/off, tap the function surface with “Checkbox”. For the complete functionality of some online services, activated localisation
services are required.
Switching online services on/off in the Infotainment system
Localisation services include, for example, information on the last parking posi-
Switching Private mode function on/off tion, area notification or speed notification.
By switching the Private mode function on, the services relating to sending vehi- When localisation services are active, one of the following symbols will be dis-
cle information and personal data, which are essential for the provision of serv- played in the status line in the Infotainment screen » Fig. 9,
ices, are deactivated.
› Tap the sensor field and then the function surface → ŠKODA Connect (on- Emergency call
line services) → Services Management → Private mode.
Switching Care Connect services on/off
By switching the Care Connect services off, the services relating to sending
vehicle information and personal data, which are essential for the provision of
services, are deactivated.
› Tap the sensor field and then the function surface → ŠKODA Connect (on-
line services) → Services Management → Care Connect.
Switching Infotainment Online services on/off
› Tap the sensor field and then the function surface → ŠKODA Connect (on-
line services) → Services Management → Infotainment Online. Fig. 10 Emergency call button
ŠKODA Connect 15
Serious accident Care Connect Services
In the event of an accident with an air bag or belt tensioner release, a call to
the emergency call centre is automatically started. The emergency call centre Proactive service
simultaneously receives information on the accident, e.g. the location and se-
verity of the accident, the number of occupants with fastened seatbelts and
the vehicle identification number (VIN).
Minor accident
The option for establishing a connection to the emergency call centre or to the
breakdown service appears in the Infotainment screen.
Manual start of a call with the emergency call centre
› Press and hold the B » Fig. 10 button.
› In the Infotainment screen or on the instrument cluster display, confirm the
connection setup.
Fig. 11 Buttons and warning lights of the Care Connect services
The call can be started manually, for example, if you are reporting an accident
in which you were not directly involved. The proactive service provides an overview of the technical status of your ve-
hicle and on any due service events. It is also possible to establish a connection
The system status is displayed after the ignition is switched on, by the illumi- to the information or breakdown call centre.
nation of warning lamp A » Fig. 10.
▶ Green - the system is functional.
Buttons and warning lights of the Care Connect services » Fig. 11
▶ Red - there is a fault in the system. A Warning light for system status.
B Press this button to establish a call to the information number in the
Note event of problems with the online services or for information regarding
The emergency service is functional even without user registration and activa- the products and services of the ŠKODA brand.
tion of services. C Press this button to establish a call to the breakdown number in the event
of a breakdown.
The system status is displayed after the ignition is switched on, by the illumi-
nation of warning lamp A » Fig. 11.
▶ Green - the system is functional.
▶ Red - there is a fault in the system.
Note
The availability of the services listed always refers to the period of validity of
the contract. During this interim period of validity, content changes of these
services are possible. Current information can be found on the ŠKODA
Connect website» page 13.
16 Online Services
Remote access to the vehicle Infotainment Online services
Fig. 13
Main menu
With the remote access to the vehicle service, you can access some vehicle
functions via the ŠKODA Connect Portal website or the ŠKODA Connect ap-
plication installed on your mobile device.
Installing the ŠKODA Connect mobile application
› Scan the QR code » Fig. 12 . These services extend the functionality of the Internet-connected Infotain-
ment.
Remote access to the vehicle includes, for example, the following services.
▶ Driving data. To display the main menu » Fig. 13, tap the sensor field and then tap the
▶ Vehicle condition. function surface .
▶ Last parking position. News from the RSS channels set in the user profile on the ŠKODA
Connect Portal website
Note
Online search for filling stations with information on fuel prices » page 182
The availability of the services listed always refers to the period of validity of
the contract. During this interim period of validity, content changes of these Online search for car parks with information on free parking spaces
services are possible. Current information can be found on the ŠKODA » page 182
Connect website» page 13. Weather forecast near the vehicle position, the destination of the route or
in the vicinity of the selected location
Online POI search » page 180
Import of the destinations created in the user profile on the ŠKODA
Connect Portal website » page 186
Import of the routes created in the user profile on the ŠKODA Connect
Portal website » page 194
Online updating of the navigation data (valid for the infotainment Colum-
bus) and import of POI Categories » page 178
Conditions for the use of online services
Settings of Online Services » page 135
For more information on the available services, see the ŠKODA Connect web-
site» page 13.
ŠKODA Connect 17
Note
The availability of the services listed always refers to the period of validity of
the contract. During this interim period of validity, content changes of these
services are possible. Current information can be found on the ŠKODA
Connect website» page 13.
18 Online Services
Safety Driving safety
Passive Safety In the interests of traffic safety, the following information must be observed.
▶ Do not become distracted from concentrating on the traffic situation, (e.g.
General information by your passengers or mobile telephone calls).
▶ Never drive when your driving ability is impaired, (e.g. due to medication, al-
Introduction cohol or drugs).
▶ Keep to the traffic regulations and the permissible speed limit.
This section of the manual includes important information on the subject of ▶ Always adjust the driving speed to the road, traffic and weather conditions.
passive safety. We have combined everything here which you should be famili- ▶ Take regular breaks on long journeys (at least every two hours).
ar with, for example, regarding seat belts, airbags, safety of children and any-
thing similar. Correct and safe seating position
Other important safety information can also be found in the following chap-
ters of this Owner´s Manual. The Owner´s Manual should therefore always be Introduction
in the vehicle.
Always assume the correct seated position before setting off and do not
Before setting off change this position while driving. Also advise your passengers to adopt the
correct seated position and not to change this position while the car is moving.
For your own safety and the safety of the people travelling with you, please The following list contains instructions for the Passenger which, if not ob-
pay attention to the following points before setting off. served, may cause serious injuries or death.
▶ Check the function of the lighting and turn signal systems. ▶ Do not lean against the dash panel.
▶ Check the function of the wipers and check the wiper blades for wear. ▶ Do not put your feet on the dash panel.
Check the windscreen washer fluid level.
▶ Ensure that all of the windows offer good visibility to the outside.
The following list contains instructions for all Passengers which, if not ob-
▶ Adjust the rear-view mirror so that vision to the rear is guaranteed. Ensure
served, may cause serious injuries or death.
▶ Do not sit only on the front part of the seat.
that the mirrors are not covered. ▶ Do not sit facing to the side.
▶ Check the tyre inflation pressure.
▶ Do not lean out of the window.
▶ Check the engine oil, brake fluid and coolant level.
▶ Do not put your limbs out of the window.
▶ Secure all items of luggage.
▶ Do not put your feet on the seat cushion.
▶ Do not exceed the permissible axle loads and permissible gross weight of the
vehicle.
▶ Close all doors as well as the bonnet and boot lid.
▶ Ensure that no parts and components are visibly loose in the vehicle.
▶ Ensure that no objects can obstruct the pedals.
▶ Protect children by using a suitable child seat » page 29, Transporting chil-
dren safely.
▶ Adopt the correct seated position. Instruct your passengers to assume the
correct seated position » page 19, Correct and safe seating position.
Passive Safety 19
WARNING Adjust the seat backrest so that the highest point of the steering wheel
■ The adjustable seats and all head restraints must be adjusted to match can be reached with your arms at a slight angle.
the body size at all times and the seat belt must always be fastened proper- Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance between the steering wheel
ly to provide the most effective levels of protection to the passengers. and your chest is at least 25 cm » Fig. 14 - A .
■ Each occupant must correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to the seat. Adjust the headrest so that the top edge of the headrest is at the same
Children must be fastened » page 29, Transporting children safely with a level as the upper part of your head (not for seats with integrated headr-
suitable restraint system. ests) » Fig. 14 - C .
■ The seat backrests must not be tilted too far back when driving, as this Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 22, Using seat belts.
will impair the function of the seat belts and of the airbag system – risk of
injury! WARNING
■ Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel, and a dis-
WARNING tance of at least 6 cm between the legs and the dash panel at the height of
By sitting incorrectly, the occupant is risking life-threatening injuries. the knee airbag. Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the
airbag system will not be able to properly protect you - hazard!
■ When driving, hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the out-
Driver’s correct seating position er edge in the “9 o'clock” and “3 o'clock” position » Fig. 14. Never hold the
steering wheel in the “12 o'clock” position or in any other way (e.g. in the
middle, inner edge of the steering wheel or similar). Otherwise, in the event
of airbag deployment, you could suffer serious injury to the arms, hands
and head.
■ Ensure that no objects are located in the driver's footwell, as they could
lodge in the pedal system whilst driving. You would then no longer be able
to operate the clutch, brake or acceleration pedals.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident,
the following instructions must be observed.
Adjust the driver’s seat in the forward/back direction so that the pedals
can be fully depressed with slightly bent legs.
For vehicles equipped with driver knee airbags, adjust the driver's seat in a
forward/back direction so that there is a gap of at least 6 cm between the
legs and the dashboard in the vicinity of the knee airbag » Fig. 14 - B .
20 Safety
Adjusting the steering wheel position Correct seating position of the passenger
Read and observe on page 20 first.
For passenger safety and to reduce the risk of injury in an accident, the follow-
ing instructions must be observed.
Position the front passenger seat back as far as possible. The front pas-
senger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel so
that the airbag offers the greatest possible safety if it is deployed.
Adjust the headrests so that the top edge of the headrest is at the same
level as the upper part of your head » Fig. 14 on page 20 - C (not for seats
with integrated headrests).
Fig. 15 Adjusting the steering wheel position
Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 22, Using seat belts.
Read and observe on page 20 first. WARNING
The height and forward/back position of the steering wheel can be adjusted. ■ Ensure a distance of at least 25 cm to the dashboard, otherwise the air-
bag system will not be able to protect you properly - risk of death!
› Swing the safety lever under the steering wheel in the direction of arrow 1 ■ Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven – nev-
» Fig. 15. er place your feet on the instrument panel, out of the window or on the
› Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. The steering wheel can be surface of the seats! You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it be-
adjusted in direction of arrow 2 . comes necessary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident. If an air-
› Pull the holder in arrow direction 3 until the stop. bag is deployed, you could suffer fatal injuries by adopting an incorrect
WARNING seated position!
■ Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving only when
the vehicle is stationary! Correct seating position for the passengers in the rear seats
■ The safety lever must always be locked after adjusting so that the steer-
ing wheel cannot accidentally change position – risk of accident! Read and observe on page 20 first.
For passenger safety on the rear seats and to reduce the risk of injury in the
event of an accident, the following information must be observed.
Adjust the headrests so that the top edge of the headrest is at the same
level as the upper part of the head » Fig. 14 on page 20 - C .
Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 22, Using seat belts.
Passive Safety 21
WARNING (Continued)
Seat belts
■ Many layers of clothing and loose clothing (e. g. a winter coat over a jack-
Using seat belts et) do not allow you to be correctly seated and impairs proper operation of
the seat belts.
Introduction ■ Do not attach clamps or similar objects to the belt - the function of the
belt retractor could be restricted.
Seat belts that are fastened correctly offer good protection in the event of an ■ The seat belts for the rear seats can only fulfil their function reliably when
accident. They reduce the risk of an injury and increase the chance of survival the seat backrests are correctly locked into position » page 84.
in the event of a major accident.
WARNING
The seat belts reduce the kinetic energy considerably. They also prevent un-
controlled movements which, in turn, may well result in severe injuries. Information on the care and maintenance of safety belts
■ The belt webbing must always be kept clean. Soiled belt webbing may im-
When transporting children, observe the following information» page 29, pair the proper operation of the inertia reel » page 260.
Transporting children safely. ■ The seat belts must not be removed or changed in any way. Do not at-
tempt to repair the seat belts yourself.
WARNING
■ Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis. If parts of the
■ Put the seat belt on before starting any journey! This also applies to other belt system become damaged (e.g. the belt webbing, the belt connections,
passengers - there is a danger of injury! the inertia reel, the locking part etc.), the respective seat belt must be re-
■ Maximum seat belt protection is only achieved if you are correctly seated
placed by a specialist garage immediately.
» page 19, Correct and safe seating position. ■ Seat belts which have been subjected to stress in an accident must be re-
■ The seat backrests of the front seats must not be tilted too far to the rear
placed by a specialist garage. Also check the seat belt anchors.
otherwise the seatbelts can lose their effectiveness.
WARNING
Information on the proper use of safety belts
■ Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of the
belt is roughly positioned across the middle of your shoulder - on no ac-
count across your neck.
■ No two persons (also not children) should ever use a single seat belt to- Fig. 16 Routing of belt webbing over the shoulders and the lap
gether. belt/Routing of belt webbing for an expectant mother
■ The lock tongue should only be inserted into the lock which is the correct
one for your seat. Wrong use of the safety belt will reduce its capacity to
protect and the risk of injury increases.
22 Safety
WARNING
■ Always ensure that the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed. Seat
belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in
minor accidents.
■ A seat belt which is hanging too loose can result in injuries as your body is
moved forward by the kinetic energy produced in an accident and is then
suddenly held firm by the belt.
■ The belt webbing must not run across solid or fragile objects (e.g. specta-
cles, ball-point pens, keys, etc.). Such objects can cause injury.
Fig. 17 Seat belt height adjusters for front seats
Fastening and unfastening seat belts
Read and observe on page 22 first.
It is important that the belt is properly routed to ensure seat belts offer the
maximum protection.
The shoulder part of the belt must run approximately over the middle of your
shoulder (never across your neck) and fit well against your upper body » Fig. 16
- .
The lap part of the belt must run lap part of the belt must run in front of the
pelvis (must never run across your stomach) and must always fit snugly
» Fig. 16 - .
Fig. 18 Fastening/unfastening the seat belt
In the case of pregnant women, the lap part of the belt must be positioned as
low as possible on the pelvis to avoid exerting any pressure on the lower abdo- Read and observe on page 22 first.
men » Fig. 16 - .
Before fastening
Seat belt height adjusters for front seats
› Push the seat belt guide loop upwards in the direction of arrow» Fig. 17 - . › Adjust the headrest properly (does not apply to seats with integrated headr-
ests).
› Or: push together the mechanism in the direction of arrows 1 and push the › Adjusting the seat (applies to the front seats).
return pulley downwards in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 17 - .
› Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height adjuster has › Adjust the belt height (applies to the front seats).
correctly locked in place and that the belt is blocked reliably » page 24, Iner- Fasten
tia reels. › Slowly pull the belt over the chest and pelvis.
› Insert the lock tongue into the belt buckle for the seat » Fig. 18 - until it
audibly clicks into place.
› Pull on the belt to check that it has engaged correctly in the lock.
Release
› Hold the lock tongue and press the red button in the belt buckle » Fig. 18 - .
The lock tongue pops out.
Seat belts 23
› Feed the belt back manually so that the seat belt is not twisted and the belt Note
webbing rolls up completely. ■ The belt tensioners can also be deployed if the seat belts are not fastened.
WARNING
■ Smoke is generated when the belt tensioners are deployed. This is not an in-
dication of a fire in the vehicle.
The slot of the belt tongue must not be blocked, otherwise the belt tongue
will not lock in place properly.
Reversible belt tensioners
As part of the proactive passenger protection system, reversible seat belts in-
Inertia reel and belt tensioners crease the safety of the belted up driver and front passenger.
Inertia reels In critical driving situations the seat belt is tensioned tightly over the body and
then released again by the reversible belt tensioner.
Each seat belt is equipped with an inertia reel.
Further information » page 242, Proactive occupant protection (Crew Protect
When pulling slowly on the seat belt, the belt can move freely. When pulling Assist).
sharply on the seat belt, the movement is locked by the inertia reel. The belts
also lock when full braking, when the car accelerates, when driving downhill
and when cornering.
WARNING
If the seat belt does not lock when pulling sharply on it, have the inertia reel
inspected immediately by a specialist garage.
Belt tensioners
The safety for the driver, front passenger and passengers on the outer rear
seats who are wearing their seat belts, is enhanced by the belt tensioners fit-
ted to the inertia reels on the front and rear external seat belts.
If there is a collision with a certain severity the seat belts are tightened by the
belt tensioner so that unwanted body motion is prevented.
Belt tensioners are not activated in the event of a roll-over, minor collisions or
in accidents in which no major forces are produced.
WARNING
■ Any work on the belt tensioner system, including the removal and installa-
tion of system components because of other repair work, must only be car-
ried out by a specialist garage.
■ If the belt tensioners have been deployed, it is then necessary to replace
the entire system.
24 Safety
The forward movement of the body is cushioned when it makes contact with
Airbag system the fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury to the remaining body parts is
thus reduced.
Description of the airbag system ▶ Front airbags - head and upper body. The airbags can be identified by the
Introduction lettering featured on the steering wheel and on the dash panel on the
passenger side.
▶ Driver's knee airbag - Legs. The airbag features the lettering on the
As a supplement to the seat belts, the airbag system provides additional pas-
dashboard on the driver's side.
senger protection in the event of severe frontal and side collisions. ▶ Side airbags - for the entire upper body (chest, stomach, pelvis) on the side
The best possible protective effect of the airbag can only be achieved if the next to the door. The side air bags can be identified by a label with the letter-
seat belts are applied properly. The airbag is not a substitute for the seat ing marked on the front seat backrests. The rear side airbags are provi-
belts. ded with the lettering in between the entrance area and the rear seat
The functional status of the airbag system is indicated by the warning light backrest.
▶ Head airbags - head and neck. The airbags are provided with the lettering
in the instrument cluster » page 41.
marked on the B-pillar cladding.
System description Depending on the vehicle equipment, the airbag system consists of the
following parts.
▶ Individual airbags.
▶ Warning light in the instrument cluster» page 41.
▶ Key switch for the front passenger airbag » page 28.
▶ Warning light for the front passenger airbag in the middle of the dash panel
» page 28.
Airbag deployment
Airbag system 25
The airbag system is only functional when the ignition is switched on. Safety instructions
When triggered, the airbag is filled with gas and unfolds. The inflation of the
airbag is carried out in a fraction of a second. Fig. 21
Upon inflation of the airbag, smoke is released. This is not an indication of a Safe distance from the steering
fire in the vehicle. wheel and the dashboard
Triggering conditions
It is not possible to generally determine which deployment conditions apply to
the airbag system in every situation. Important here is the hardness of the ob-
ject on which the vehicle impacts, the impact angle, the vehicle speed, etc.
Deceleration during impact plays an important role in the deployment of the
airbags. If the vehicle deceleration which occurs and is measured remains be- WARNING
low the prescribed reference values specified in the control unit, the airbags General information
are not deployed although the vehicle may well suffer severe damage to the ■ The seat belts and the airbag system can only offer proper protection
bodywork as a consequence of the accident. if the driver and passengers are seated properly » page 19.
■ The airbag develops considerable forces when triggered, which can lead
The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe frontal
collision. to serious injuries or even death if the correct seating position or seated
▶ Driver’s front airbag. position is not observed. This applies in particular to children who are trans-
▶ Front passenger airbag. ported without using a suitable child safety seat » page 30.
■ If there is a fault, have the airbag system checked immediately by a spe-
▶ Driver’s knee airbag.
cialist garage. Otherwise, there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in
The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe side the event of an accident.
collision. ■ The airbag system must be replaced if it has been deployed.
▶ Front side airbag. ■ In the area of the front airbag and the knee airbag, the surface of the
▶ Rear side airbag. steering wheel and the dashboard should be cleaned using only a dry cloth
▶ Head airbag. or one that has been dampened with water.
When an airbag is deployed, the following events occur.
▶ The hazard warning lights are switched on. WARNING
▶ All doors are unlocked. Information about front airbags
▶ The fuel supply to the engine is interrupted. ■ For the driver and passenger, it is important to maintain a distance of at
▶ The interior light comes on (if the automatic operation of the interior light is least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dashboard » Fig. 21 - A . If this dis-
switched on - switch ). tance is not maintained, the airbag system cannot protect you - hazard! The
front seats and the head restraints must always be correctly adjusted to
When there is no air bag deployment? match the body size of the occupant.
With minor frontal and side collisions, rear collision, overturning of the vehicle ■ The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear-facing
or vehicle roll-over there is no airbag deployment. child seat on the front passenger seat » page 27, Airbag deactivation. If
this is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal in-
juries if the front passenger airbag is deployed.
26 Safety
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
■ No other persons, animals or objects may be positioned in front of the oc- ■ No excessive forces, such as knocks, kicks etc., should be exerted on the
cupants on the front seats in the deployment area of the front air bags. seat backrests - there is a risk of damage to the side air bags. The side air-
■ The steering wheel and the surface of the dashboard on the front passen- bags would not be deployed in such a case!
ger side must not have stickers attached, covered or modified in any other ■ Any seat or protective covers which you fit to the driver or front passen-
way. No parts (e.g. cup holders, mobile telephone mounts etc.( should be ger seats must only be of the type expressly authorized by ŠKODA. In view
mounted in the vicinity of the airbag installation locations and in the airbag of the fact that the airbag inflates out of the backrest of the seat, use of
deployment area. non-approved seat or protective covers would considerably impair the pro-
■ Never place objects on the surface of the dashboard on the front passen- tective function of the side airbag.
ger side. ■ Have any damage to the original seat covers or stitching at the installa-
tion point of the side airbags repaired immediately by a specialist garage.
WARNING
Information about knee airbags WARNING
■ Adjust the driver's seat in a forward/back direction so that there is a gap Information on the use of the airbag system
of at least 6 cm between the legs and the dashboard in the vicinity of the ■ Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of
knee airbag » Fig. 21 - B . If it is not possible to meet this requirement due system components due to other repair work (e.g. removal of the seat)
to your body size, visit a specialist garage. must only be carried out by a specialist garage. Further information
■ The surface of the airbag module in the lower part of the dash panel be- » page 256.
low the steering column not have stickers attached, be covered or modi- ■ No modifications should be made to parts of the airbag system, to the
fied in any other way. Nothing may be attached to the cover of the airbag front bumper or to the body.
module or located within the immediate vicinity. ■ Do not manipulate individual parts of the airbag system, as this might re-
■ Do not attach any bulky and heavy objects (bunch of keys etc.) to the ig- sult in the airbag being deployed.
nition key. These can be ejected by the knee airbag when it is deployed and
can cause injuries.
Airbag deactivation
WARNING
Deactivating airbags
Information about for side and head airbags
■ No objects (e.g. sun visors turned towards the windows) should be loca- The front passenger airbag can be switched off with the key-operated switch
ted in the deployment area of the side and head airbags. No accessories » Fig. 22 on page 28 - .
(e.g. cup holders etc.) should be fitted to the doors - risk of injury! We recommend that you ask a ŠKODA service partner to deactivate any other
■ Hang only light clothing on clothes hooks in the vehicle. Do not leave any
airbags.
heavy or sharp objects in the pockets of the clothing. Do not use clothes
hangers to hang the clothing. The airbag deactivation is displayed by the warning light » page 41.
■ The airbag system operates using pressure sensors located in the front
doors. For this reason, no adjustments may be carried out to the doors or
door panels (e.g. installation of additional loudspeakers). Further informa-
tion » page 256.
Airbag system 27
Deactivating an airbag should be considered in cases such as the ones › Fold out the key bit completely» . With a KESSY key, remove the emer-
below. gency key.
▶ A child seat is mounted on the front passenger seat, in which the child is › Carefully insert the key into the slot in the key switch as far as the stop.
transported with its back to the direction of travel » page 29. › Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch carefully into the position .
▶ Despite correct adjustment of the driver's seat, the distance of at least › Pull the key out of the slot in the key switch » .
25 cm between the middle of the steering wheel and chest cannot be main- › Close the storage compartment on the front passenger side.
tained. › Check that the warning light illuminates after the ignition is switched
▶ Additional controls for drivers with a physical disability are installed in the ve- on.
hicle.
▶ Special seats (e.g. orthopaedic seats without side airbags) are installed in the Switching on
vehicle. › Switch off the ignition.
› Open the storage compartment on the front passenger side.
WARNING › Fold out the key bit completely» . With a KESSY key, remove the emer-
If an airbag is deactivated upon the sale of the vehicle, the buyer must be gency key.
informed of this! › Carefully insert the key into the slot in the key switch as far as the stop.
› Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch carefully into the position .
› Pull the key out of the slot in the key switch » .
Deactivating the front passenger airbag › Close the storage compartment on the front passenger side.
› Check that the warning light illuminates after the ignition is switched
on.
WARNING
■ The key cannot be inserted into the key switch while driving. Shocks can
cause the key to turn in the slot and trigger the airbag! The airbag can be
triggered unexpectedly in an accident - it may result in injury or death!
■ The driver is responsible for whether the airbag is switched on or switch-
ed off.
■ Only switch off the airbag when the ignition is switched off! Otherwise a
fault can occur in the system for deactivating the airbag.
Fig. 22 Key-operated switch for the front passenger airbag / warning
■ If the warning lights flash, the front passenger airbag will not
light for front passenger airbag
be deployed in the event of an accident! Have the airbag system checked
Positions of the key switch » Fig. 22 - by a specialist garage immediately.
The front passenger airbag is deactivated - after the ignition is switched
on, the indicator light » Fig. 22 illuminates CAUTION
The front passenger airbag is activated - after the ignition is switched on, An insufficiently folded out key bit can damage the key switch!
the indicator light illuminates for 65 seconds
Switch off
› Switch off the ignition.
› Open the storage box on the front passenger's side.
28 Safety
WARNING (Continued)
Transporting children safely
■ Safety belts must be checked to ensure that they are running properly.
Child seat One should also ensure that the belt is not damaged by sharp-edged fit-
tings.
Introduction ■ When installing the child seat on the back seat, the corresponding front
seat must be adjusted so that there is no contact between the front seat
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident, children must be trans-
and the child seat or the child being transported in a child seat.
ported in child seats! ■ Before installing a forward-facing child seat with backrest, remove the
headrest » page 85. After removing the child seat, refit the head re-
The information in this Owner´s Manual as well as the instructions of the child straints.
seat manufacturer must be observed when installing and using the child seat.
For safety reasons, we recommend that you always transport child seats on Note
the rear seats. Children should be transported on the front passenger seat only We recommend that you use child seats from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
in exceptional circumstances. These child seats were developed and also tested for use in ŠKODA vehicles.
Child seats complying with the ECE-R 44 Economic Commission for Europe They meet the ECE-R 44 standard.
standard must be used.
Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat (variant 1)
Child seats that comply with the ECE-R 44 standard are identified with a test
mark that cannot be removed: large E in a circle with the test number under- Does not apply to Taiwan
neath
WARNING
■ One should never carry children, and also not babies! - on one's lap.
■ When leaving the vehicle, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Children might not be capable of leaving the vehicle or helping themselves
independently in the event of an emergency. Very high or low temperatures
can be fatal!
■ The child must be secured in the vehicle during the entire journey! Other-
wise, the child would be thrown through the vehicle in the event of an acci-
dent, causing fatal injuries to both the child and other occupants.
■ Children are exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an acci-
dent if they lean forward or adopt an incorrect seated position when the
vehicle is moving. This particularly applies to children who are transported
Fig. 23 Warning labels
on the front passenger seat as they can suffer severe, or even fatal injuries
if the airbag system is deployed! Read and observe on page 29 first.
■ Pay particular attention to the information provided by the manufacturer
of the child safety seat regarding the correct routing of the belt. Seat belts Never use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat which is pro-
which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in mi- tected by an active airbag. This could cause serious injury to the child, or
nor accidents. even death.
The child must not be positioned in the deployment area of the side airbag
» Fig. 25 - .
There must be sufficient room between the child and the area into which the
side airbag will deploy to allow the airbag to provide as much protection as
possible » Fig. 25 - .
30 Safety
Classification of child seats Group Weight of the child
1 9-18 kg
Read and observe on page 29 first.
2 15-25 kg
Classification of child seats according to the ECE-R 44 standard. 3 22-36 kg
Group Weight of the child
0 up to 10 kg
0+ up to 13 kg
Use of child safety seats which are secured using a seat belt
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated. This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of
the front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child severe, or even fatal injuries, in the event of it being deployed.
Read and observe on page 29 first.
Overview of the usability of child seats secured with a seat belt on seats in accordance with the ECE-R 16 standard.
Passenger seat with activated Passenger seat with deactivated Rear seats Rear seat
Group
front airbag front airbag Outside Centre
0
X Ua) U U
up to 10 kg
0+
X Ua) U U
up to 13 kg
1
UF U U U
9-18 kg
2
UF U U U
15-25 kg
3
UF U U U
22-36 kg
a) Set the height-adjustable front passenger seat as high up as possible.
U The seat is suitable for the use of approved child seats in this weight group category “Universal”.
UF The seat is suitable for the use of approved forward-facing child seats in the “Universal” weight group category.
X The seat is not suitable for children in this weight group.
Note
■ A child seat fitted with the system can only be mounted in a vehicle fit-
ted with a system if the child seat has been approved for this type of ve-
is a system for securing child seats quickly and safely. hicle. Further information is available from a ŠKODA Partner.
■ Child seats with the system can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Ac-
Two locking eyes are located between the seat backrest and the seat cushion cessories.
of the outer rear seats and front passenger seat for fixing the system
child seat in place.
Overview of the usability of child seats fastened with the system on each of the seats in accordance with the ECE-R 16 standard.
Size class of
Group Front passenger seatb) Rear seats outside Rear seat middle
the child seata)
0
E X IL X
up to 10 kg
E
0+
D X IL X
up to 13 kg
C
D
C
1 IL
B X X
9-18 kg IUF
B1
A
32 Safety
Size class of
Group Front passenger seatb) Rear seats outside Rear seat middle
the child seata)
2
- X IL X
15-25 kg
3
- X IL X
22-36 kg
a) The size category is shown on the label attached to the child seat.
b) If the front passenger seat is fitted with system attachment points, it is suitable for the installation of an child seat with “Semi-Universal” approval.
IL The seat is suitable for installation of a child seat with the “Semi-Universal” approval. The “Semi-Universal” category means that the child seat with
the system is approved for your vehicle. Observe the list of vehicles that comes with the child seat.
IUF The seat is suitable for the use of approved forward-facing child seats in the “Universal” weight group category.
X The seat is not fitted with system attachment points.
Using child seats with the system Some country-specific models can also be fitted with an attachment point
B » Fig. 27.
Front passenger seat Rear seats outside Rear seat middle
WARNING
X i-U X ■ Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat
i-U The seat is suitable for forward and backward facing child seats of when installing and removing a child seat with the system.
the category “Universal”. ■ Only use child seats with the system on the seats equipped with
X The seat is not suitable for the child seat of the category “Universal”. attachment points with the logo .
■ Only ever attach one belt from the child seat to a locking eye.
Fig. 27
Attachment points of the
-system
is an attachment system that restricts the movement of the upper
part of the child seat.
The locking eyes A for attaching the belt of a child seat with the
system are located on the rear side of the rear seat backrests » Fig. 27.
Cockpit 35
The brightness of the instrument lighting can be adjusted in Infotainment in
Instruments and warning lights the menu / → → Light.
Instrument cluster
Engine revolutions counter
Introduction The tachometer 1 » Fig. 29 on page 36 shows the actual engine speed per
minute.
The beginning of the tachometer red scale range indicates the maximum per-
mitted speed for an engine that has been driven-in and has reached operating
temperature.
You should shift into the next highest gear before the red scale of the revolu-
tion counter is reached, or select mode D/S on the automatic gearbox.
The gear recommendation is important to note in order to maintain the opti-
mum engine speed » page 47.
CAUTION
The pointer of the engine revolutions counter must reach the red area for only
a short time - there is a risk of engine damage!
Fig. 29 Instrument cluster
Coolant temperature gauge
1 Engine revolutions counter » page 36
▶ with warning lights » page 37
Fig. 30
2 Display » page 47
Coolant temperature gauge
3 Speedometer
▶ with warning lights » page 37
4 Coolant temperature display » page 36
5 Bar with warning lights » page 37
6 Operation button
▶ Set the time » page 47
▶ Reset counter for distance travelled (trip) » page 47
▶ Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval The display only works if the ignition is switched on.
» page 53 A Cold area, The engine has not yet reached its operating temperature.
7 Fuel gauge » page 37 Avoid high speeds and high engine loads.
The brightness of the instrument illumination is set automatically depending B The operating range
on the ambient lighting throughout. If the visibility is poor and the lights are C High temperature range, the warning light illuminates in the instrument
not on, the brightness of the instrument lighting reduces to alert the driver to cluster » page 43.
switch on the lights in due time.
Fig. 31
Fuel gauge
The display only works if the ignition is switched on. Fig. 32 Display in rear centre console
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 66 litres.
The following information is shown in the display depending on the equipment
If the fuel level reaches the reserve level A , the » Fig. 31 indicator light in the installed on the vehicle.
instrument cluster illuminates » page 42. ▶ Time
▶ Exterior temperature information
WARNING ▶ Information on the Climatronic set temperature for occupants in the rear
For the vehicle systems to function correctly, and thus for safe driving, seats
there must be sufficient fuel in the tank. Never drain the fuel tank com-
pletely – risk of accident!
Warning lights
CAUTION Introduction
Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty! The irregular supply of fuel
can cause misfiring, which can result in damage to parts of the engine and the Parking brake » page 39
exhaust system.
Brake system » page 39
Note Front seat belt warning light » page 39
The arrow next to the symbol within the fuel gauge displays the installa- Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) » page 39
tion location of the fuel filler on the right side of the vehicle.
Power steering
» page 39
Steering lock (KESSY system)
Stabilisation control (ESC)
» page 40
Traction control (ASR)
Traction control (ASR) deactivated » page 40
Antilock brake system (ABS) » page 40
Rear fog light » page 40
Exhaust control system » page 40
illuminates - the parking brake is switched on. Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
Parking brake error
Read and observe on page 38 first.
Illuminates
Message: Fault: electronic parking brake illuminates – the ACC delay is not sufficient.
▶ Seek ▶ Apply the brake.
help from a specialist garage.
Parking on a slope that is too steep For more information about the ACC system » page 232.
Illuminates
Power steering/steering lock (KESSY system)
Message: parking brake: Gradient too steep. Log book!
▶ Find a parking space on a flat surface or on a slope that is not so steep.
Read and observe on page 38 first.
The warning light should go out after driving a short distance. The warning lights indicates the state of the Lane Assist system.
If, after a short drive, the indicator light does not go out, there is a system er- More information about the Lane Assist System » page 243.
ror.
▶ You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe- Turn signal system
cialist garage immediately. Read and observe on page 38 first.
Other incidents
flashes – the left turn signal is turned on.
The illumination of the warning light can have the following reasons.
▶ The vehicle is loaded on one side. Distribute the load evenly. flashes – the right turn signal is turned on.
▶ The wheels of one axle are loaded more heavily (e.g. when towing a trailer or
If there is a fault in the turn signal system, the warning light flashes at twice its
when driving uphill or downhill). normal rate (does not apply when towing).
▶ Snow chains are mounted.
▶ A wheel has been changed. When the hazard warning light system is switched on, this will cause all of the
turn signal lights as well as both warning lights to flash.
CAUTION
Under certain circumstances (e.g. sporty style of driving, wintry or unpaved Trailer turn signal lights
roads) the warning light can be delayed or does not light up at all.
Read and observe on page 38 first.
Brake linings flashes – the trailer turn signal lights are switched on.
Read and observe on page 38 first. If a trailer is hitched and the warning light is not flashing, one of the trailer
turn signal lights has failed.
illuminates - the brake pads are worn.
▶ Check the trailer bulbs.
▶ Itis possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately. Fog lights
Fuel reserve Read and observe on page 38 first.
Read and observe on page 38 first. lights up – the fog lights are switched on.
Illuminates – the fuel level in the fuel tank is at the reserve level (approxi-
mately 6 litres).
Read and observe on page 38 first. Read and observe on page 38 first.
illuminates - the Auto Hold function is activated. lights up – a rear seat belt is not fastened.
For more information about the Auto-Hold Function » page 205. lights up – a rear seat belt is fastened.
When the seat belt is fastened/unfastened, the particular light lights up briefly
Main beam and indicates the current belt status!
Read and observe on page 38 first.
Generator
lights up – the main beam or the headlight flasher is switched on. Read and observe on page 38 first.
Automatic gearbox lights up – the battery is not being charged whilst the engine is running.
Read and observe on page 38 first. CAUTION
If in addition to the light the light lights up while driving, stop driving -
Gearbox overheated
There is a risk of engine damage! Switch off the engine and seek assistance
Illuminates from a specialist garage.
Message: gearbox overheated. You can drive on.
Transmission overheated. You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Coolant
lights up – the filter is clogged with soot. Read and observe on page 38 first.
To clean the filter, and where traffic conditions permit » , drive as follows for lights up – the windscreen washer fluid level is too low.
at least 15 minutes or until the indicator light goes out. ▶ Top up the windscreen washer fluid » page 266.
4th or 5th gear engaged (automatic transmission: position D / S).
Vehicle speed at least 70 km/h. Headlight assistant
Engine speed between 1800 - 2500 rpm.
Read and observe on page 38 first.
If the filter is properly cleaned, the warning light extinguishes.
If the filter is not properly cleaned, the warning light does not go out and Illuminates – the headlight assistant is activated » page 72, Headlight As-
the warning light begins to flash. sist (Light Assist / Dynamic Light Assist).
▶ You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe- START-STOPsystem
cialist garage immediately.
Read and observe on page 38 first.
WARNING
■ Always adjust the speed and driving style to the actual weather, road, ter- The warning lights indicates the state of the START STOP system
rain and traffic conditions. » page 202.
■ The diesel particulate filter reaches very high temperatures - there is a
fire hazard and serious injury could be caused. Therefore, never stop the Display of a low temperature
vehicle at places where the underside of your vehicle can come into con-
tact with flammable materials, such as dry grass, undergrowth, leaves, spil-
Read and observe on page 38 first.
led fuel or the like. lights up – the outside temperature is below +4 °C.
▶ You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe- lights up – there is a fault in the emergency call system.
cialist garage immediately. ▶ Seek help from a specialist garage.
Service
Read and observe on page 38 first.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the information system uses the dis-
play in the instrument cluster to provide the following information » Fig. 33. › Switch on the ignition.
1 Time / symbols of the Infotainment voice control › Press and hold the button A » Fig. 34until thetime is shown in the display.
2 Engaged gear / gear recommendation › Release the button A and the system switches to the hour setting function.
Selector lever positions for the automatic gearbox › Press the button A again and set the hours.
Warning lights of the START-STOP system › Wait 4 seconds, the system switches to the minutes setting.
Compass display › Press the button A again and set the minutes.
Detected traffic signs › Wait 4 seconds, the system switches to the initial setting.
3 Driving data (multifunction display)
Warning lights Gear recommendation
Information messages
Door alarm Fig. 35
Eco tips Information on the selected
Service interval display gear / Gear recommendation
4 Outside temperature
5 Cruise control / speed limiter
Total distance travelled
6 Distance travelled by resetting the memory (trip)
Door, luggage compartment and bonnet alarm
When the door or luggage compartment / bonnet is open, a graphic warning A suitable engaged gear or, where appropriate, a recommended gear is dis-
appears in the display. played, with the aim of conserving the life of the engine and increasing driving
efficiency.
Information system 47
Display » Fig. 35 Function surfaces and screen display » Fig. 36
Optimal gear engaged A Vehicle representation (the zones of the vehicle are shown in different
Gear recommendation (e.g. means that it is advantageous to switch colours, corresponding to any warning messages that occur. The warn-
from 3rd to 4th gear) ing messages are displayed once you touch the “vehicle”)
For vehicles with automatic transmission the recommended gear will be No message/warning messages relating to vehicle status and the num-
shown provided the mode for manual switching (Tiptronic) is selected. ber (if there is only one message, one warning message text is dis-
played)
WARNING Display information about the status of the START-STOP system
The driver is always responsible for selecting the correct gear in different Activation / deactivation of notes relating to START-STOP-Sys-
driving situations, such as overtaking. tem messages in another screen display
Fig. 36 Fig. 37
Vehicle condition Infotainment display
Certain functions and conditions of individual vehicle systems are checked The display of data on sporty driving is used to evaluate current motor values.
continuously when the ignition is switched on. If there is a fault in the system,
the following message will appear in the display of the instrument cluster.
› To display in the Infotainment menu / tap on function surface →
Sports.
While the operational faults remain unrectified, the messages are always indi-
A swipe of the finger vertically across the screen allows three of the following
cated again. After the message is displayed for the first time, the warning
displays A to be shown » Fig. 37.
lights (danger) or (warning) continue to be displayed.
▶ Boost pressure display
The vehicle condition can be displayed in Infotainment in the menu /→ ▶ Acceleration display
→ Vehicle status. ▶ Power display
In the screen, information regarding vehicle condition or function of the tyre ▶ Coolant temperature display
pressure monitor is displayed. ▶ Oil temperature display
› Using the function surfaces select the menu item Vehicle status.
Information Overview
Overview of driving data (depending on the vehicle equipment).
Range - drive distance in km which can be covered with the existing tank ca-
Fig. 39 Buttons/dials: on the multifunction steering wheel pacity and with the same driving style. If you drive more efficiently this value
can increase.
Buttons/dials on the multifunction steering wheel
AdBlue® range - drive distance in km which can be covered with the existing
Switch on/off voice control AdBlue®tank capacity and with the same driving style. If you drive more effi-
A Turn - sets the volume ciently this value can increase.
Press - sound on / off
Information system 49
Average fuel consumption - is calculated continuously since the last time the Screen display » Fig. 40
memory was deleted. After erasing the memory, no data will appear for the A Distance travelled
first 100 m driven. B Driving time
Current fuel consumption - when the vehicle is stationary or slowly moving, C Average speed
the fuel consumption is displayed in l/h (--,- km/l appears on models for some D Average fuel consumption
countries). E Transit point rating (DriveGreenFunction)
Oil temperature - if the temperature is lower than 50 °C or if there is a fault in F Graphic fuel level display (if the estimated range is less than 300 km, the
the system for checking the oil temperature, the symbols are displayed. vehicle starts to approach the symbol )
Warning when the preset speed is exceeded - allows the setting of a speed G Approximate range
limit where, if exceeded, an acoustic warning signal and a warning message ap- Use the function surfaces to select one of the following presets.
pears on the display of the instrument cluster. ▶ Since start - Driving data for the individual
trip
Dynamic Road Sign Display - traffic signs display » page 246, Traffic sign rec- ▶ Long-term - Long-term driving data
ognition. ▶ Since refuel - Data since refuelling
Fig. 41 Note
Memory display Disconnecting the vehicle battery will delete all memory data.
Introduction
› For the Storage choice, repeatedly confirm the selected indication and se- The following information is displayed in the Navigation menu item.
lect the desired memory. ▶ Driving recommendations
› For Deleting the memory for the selected information, hold down the but- ▶ Compass
ton confirming the specification. ▶ Last destinations
Information system 51
Radio Assist systems menu item
▶ Currently playing station (name/frequency).
▶ The selected frequency range (e.g. FM) optionally with the number of the The following systems are activated/deactivated in the Assist systems menu
station button (e.g. FM3), if the station is stored in the memory list. item.
▶ List of available stations (if more than 5 stations can be received).
▶ Lane Assist
▶ TP traffic announcements.
▶ Assist system for blind spot monitoring
Media ▶ Rear Traffic Alert
▶ Name of the track being played, if necessary, further information regarding ▶ Front Assist
title (e.g. artist, album name), if this information is stored as a so called ID3
tag on the audio source. Service intervals
Introduction
Thanks to the personalisation, more drivers have the opportunity to use a vehi-
cle with individually set system functions by means of a user account which is
assigned to the respective vehicle key.
WARNING
› Switch on the ignition. Make all adjustments when the vehicle is stationary - otherwise there is the
› Press and hold the button A » Fig. 42 until theService menu item is shown in
risk of accident!
the display.
› Release the button A .
In the display, the symbol appears for 4 seconds along with the following Operating principle
message for the kilometres or days to the next service appointment.
Fig. 43
The details regarding the remaining kilometres or days until the next scheduled
Switching to a different user account
service can also be displayed in Infotainment in the menu / → → Service.
Service messages
Before the next service date has been reached, the symbol as well as a
message about the mileage or days until the next service event appears in the
display after the ignition is switched on.
Once the service interval is reached, the symbol appears in the display after Read and observe on page 53 first.
the ignition is switched on, together with the message:
After unlocking the vehicle and opening the driver's door, all the personalised
Resetting the service interval display functions are adjusted according to the user account that is assigned to the
key which was used to unlock the vehicle.
Have the display reset by a specialist garage.
Any change to the set personalised functions is automatically stored in the ac-
We recommend that you do not reset the service interval display yourself. In-
tive user account.
correctly setting the service interval display can cause problems to the vehicle.
As part of the personalisation, three default user accounts as well as a
Variable service interval Guestaccount are provided.
For vehicles with variable service intervals, after resetting the oil change serv-
ice display in a specialist garage, the values of the new service interval are dis- Switch to a different user account
played, which are based on the previous operating conditions of the vehicle. You can switch to a different user account in the instrument cluster display
» Fig. 43 within 10 seconds after turning on the ignition.
Information system 53
An account can be changed at a later time in Infotainment in the menu / ▶ Voice control - acoustic signals.
→ → Vehicle status → (if the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System is displayed first of ▶ Navigation - home address, alternative routes, recommended route, reminder
all, then use the arrow or switch to Vehicle status). of the lack of fuel.
If an account is selected in which not all of the points required by the system Note
are set, a configuration wizard can be automatically displayed on the Infotain-
The scope of the personalisation functions is dependent on the type of Info-
ment screen » page 129.
tainment package.
Electrically adjustable driver's seat (referred to only as seat in the
following) Setting the personalization
The seated position adjustment is carried out in the following cases.
▶ After unlocking the vehicle and opening the driver's door (valid in this case: Read and observe on page 53 first.
before vehicle locking, an account with a particular seat setting was selected.
After vehicle unlocking, an account is activated to which a different seat set-
› In Infotainment in the menu / Tap on function surface → Personalisa-
tion.
ting is assigned).
▶ After switching to a different user account and at a speed less than 5 km/h. The following menu items are displayed.
The seat adjustment can be terminated as follows. Personalisation
▶ By tapping on the function surface Cancel on the Infotainment screen. Active - activate/deactivate the personalisation
▶ By pressing any key on the seat » page 82.
Select a user account
Note A list of user accounts with the option to manage user accounts and to switch
to another account.
Vehicles with the personalisation function are provided with three vehicle
keys. ■ - Account management with the following options:
■ Rename user account - rename the user account (not applicable to the Guest
Overview of some personalized functions account)
■ Copy settings to another account - copy the settings of an active user account
Read and observe on page 53 first. to another user account
■ Reset user account - reset the selected user account to factory settings
▶ Driving mode - the last selected mode, mode setting Individual
▶ Setting the electrically adjustable driver's seat. Adjusting
▶ Exterior mirror adjustment. ■ Key assignment: Options for assigning the vehicle key to the user account:
▶ Assistance systems - Lane Assist, parking aid (Park Pilot). ■ Manual - detected vehicle key must be assigned to the active user account
▶ Light - ambient lighting, convenience turn signal, COMING HOME / LEAVING manually
HOME. ■ Automatic - detected vehicle key automatically assigned to a different ac-
▶ Climatronic - temperature in each individual area, fan speed, recirculation count of the active user account
mode. ■ Assign vehicle key to current user account - manual assignment of the detected ve-
▶ Infotainment settings - brightness level of the screen, keyboard arrange- hicle key to the active user account - follow the instructions on the Infotain-
ment. ment screen
▶ Radio - sound settings, station sorting. ■ Reset all - reset the personalisation and the user accounts to factory settings
▶ Media - shuffle / repeat title, selected video format.
Introduction
The vehicle is equipped with a central locking system which makes it possible
to unlock / lock all the doors, the fuel filler flap and boot lid simultaneously.
The door unlocking can be adjusted individually » page 57.
The unlocking of the vehicle is displayed by the turn signal lights flashing
twice. Fig. 44 Key with fold/out key bit/KESSY key
If you unlock the vehicle and do not open a door or the boot lid within the next
45 seconds, the vehicle will lock again automatically. Read and observe and on page 55 first.
The locking of the vehicle is displayed by the turn signal lights flashing once. Description of the key » Fig. 44
If the driver's door has been opened, the vehicle cannot be locked. Unlock button
If the doors or the boot lid remain open after the vehicle has been locked, the Lock button
turn signal lights do not flash until they have been closed. Depending on equipment fitted:
▶ Unlock/unlatch the boot lid (vehicles fitted with manual folding opera-
WARNING tion)
■ Never leave the key in the vehicle when you exit the vehicle. Unauthorized ▶ Open/close/ the boot lid Stop movement of the boot lid (vehicles with
persons (e.g. children) could lock the car, turn on the ignition or start the electric folding operation)
engine - there is a danger of injury and accidents! A Locking button for folding the key bit in/out
■ When leaving the vehicle, never leave people who are not completely in- B Warning light for the battery charge - if the warning light does not flash
dependent, such as children, unattended in the vehicle. These individuals when a button on the key is pressed, the battery is discharged.
might not be able to leave the vehicle on their own or to help themselves.
Can be fatal at very high or very low temperatures! Unlock/unlatch the boot lid (vehicles fitted with manual folding operation)
By pressing the button , the lid is unlocked.
CAUTION By holding the button , the lid is unlocked and unlatched (partially open).
■ Each key contains electronic components; therefore it must be protected If the lid is unlocked or unlatched using the button, then the lid is automati-
against moisture and severe shocks. cally locked after closing. The period after which the lid is locked can be set
■ Keep the keyway clean. Impurities (textile fibres, dust etc.) have a negative
» page 61.
effect on the functionality of the locking cylinder and ignition lock.
CAUTION
Some types of gloves can affect the unlocking or locking device via the sen-
sors in the door handle.
Deactivating KESSY
Read and observe and on page 55 first.
› Tolock, press the button » Fig. 47 button. The safelock switches on the next time the vehicle is locked.
WARNING
Individual settings
Doors locked from the inside make it difficult for rescuers to get into the
vehicle in an emergency – risk to life! Read and observe and on page 55 first.
Note
The individual adjustment of the central locking system is stored (depending
on the Infotainment type) in the active user account personalisation » page 53.
The child safety lock prevents the rear door from being opened from the in- Low voltage of the key battery
side. The door can only be opened from the outside. If the voltage of the key battery is too low, a message appears in the display of
the instrument cluster referring to the need to replace the battery. Replace the
Manually controlled parental settings battery » page 286.
› To switch on, turn the parental control with the vehicle key in position
» Fig. 49.
› To switch off, turn the parental control with the vehicle key in position . Anti-theft alarm system
Introduction
The boot lid (hereinafter as lid) can be operated electrically and manual in the
event of an emergency » page 63.
WARNING
■ Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the lid. Otherwise,
the lid might open while the vehicle is moving - risk of accident.
■ Never drive with the lid open or unlatched, as otherwise exhaust gases
may get into the interior of the vehicle – risk of poisoning!
■ Only open and close the lid when no one is located in the opening/closing
range – risk of injury!
■ Make sure that no limbs are caught or crushed when closing the lid - risk
of injury!
Audible signals
When opening the door using the button C and opening / closing of the flap
using the button D audible signals are emitted.
Note
■ Button A » Fig. 52 is deactivated when starting or at a speed of more than 5
km/h. The button is activated again after the vehicle has stopped and a door is
opened.
■ If you rapidly enter the vehicle during the opening or closing process of the
lid, the whole vehicle may jerk and, as a result, the movement of the lid can be
interrupted.
Fig. 52 Lid operation The top position of the lid can be adjusted (e.g. in a limited space to open the
lid due to the garage height or for a more comfortable operation, depending
Read and observe and on page 61 first. on the height of the person).
Ways to open the lid Adjusting the top position of the lid
▶ By pressing the handle A » Fig. 52. › Stop the lid in the desired position.
▶ By holding the button C . › Press and hold button B » Fig. 52 on page 62 until you hear an acoustic sig-
▶ By holding the button D on the key. nal.
If the lid hits an obstacle when closing, it stops and an audible signal sounds. Adjusting the top starting position of the lid
Ways to close the lid › Carefully raise the flap manually to the limit.
▶ By pressing the button B » Fig. 52. › Press and hold button B » Fig. 52 on page 62 until you hear an acoustic sig-
▶ By holding the button D on the key (applies to vehicles with KESSY). The nal.
key must be located at a maximum distance of 2 m from the lid. Note
▶ By pressing the handle A .
The top position which is reached when the lid opens automatically, is always
▶ By briefly pressing the lid downwards.
lower than the maximum top position which can be reached when the lid is
If the flap meets an obstacle when it is closed, it stops, an acoustic signal opened manually.
sounds and the flap moves back a few centimetres.
Introduction
WARNING
■ Always close the window carefully and controlled. Doing so may may
cause yourself or fellow passengers considerable crushing injuries.
■ The system is fitted with a force limiter » page 65. If there is an obstacle
Read and observe and on page 61 first. (e.g. In the event of a body part becoming trapped) the closing process is
stopped and the window goes down by several centimetres. However, the
Depending on equipment the boot lid can be operated without contact. windows should be closed carefully – risk of injury.
The ignition must be switched off and you have to have the vehicle key on
your person.
If there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the window goes The movement of the window is stopped immediately when the respective
down by several centimetres. button is released.
If the obstacle prevents the window from being closed during the next 10 sec- Note
onds, the closing process is interrupted once again and the window goes down The settings for the window convenience operation are stored (depending on
by several centimetres. the Infotainment type) in the active user account personalisation » page 53.
If you attempt to close the window again within 10 seconds of the window be-
ing moved down for the second time, even though the obstacle was not yet Malfunctions
been removed, the closing process is only stopped. During this time it is not
possible to automatically close the window. The force limiter is still switched
Read and observe and on page 63 first.
on. Repeatedly opening and closing the window can cause the window mechanism
The force limiter is only not operational if you attempt to close the window to overheat and become temporarily blocked. You will be able to operate the
again within the next 10 seconds – the window will now close with full force! window again as soon as the operating mechanisms has cooled down.
If you wait longer than 10 seconds, the force limiter is switched on again. After disconnecting the vehicle battery, automatic opening / closing the win-
dow can be deactivated. In this case the system must be activated as follows.
Window convenience operation Activate window operation
Read and observe and on page 63 first. › Switch-on the ignition.
› Pull the top edge of the button and close the window.
The convenience operation for the window offers the option to open/close all › Release the button.
the windows at once (or only the window in the driver's door). The conven- › Pull up the respective button and hold for 1 second.
ience operation function can be adjusted individually in Infotainment in the
menu / → → Opening and closing. Panoramic tilting / sliding sunroof
Opening
› Press and hold the button on the key. Introduction
› or: Switch off the ignition, open the driver's door and hold the key A until it The panorama sliding/tilting roof (hereinafter referred to as sliding/tilting roof)
stops in the open position » Fig. 54 on page 64.
can only be operated when the ignition is turned on and when the outdoor
Closing temperature is no lower than -20 °C.
› Press and hold the button on the key. The sliding/tilting roof can still be operated for approx. 10 minutes after
› or: Switch off the ignition, open the driver's door and hold the key
A until it
switching the ignition off. After opening the driver or front passenger door, it
stops in the closed position » Fig. 54 on page 64.
is no longer possible to operate the sliding/tilting roof.
› In the KESSY system, hold your finger on the sensor on the outside of the
door handle of the front door » Fig. 46 on page 56.
Fig. 57 Fig. 59
Operation of the sliding/tilting Buttons for operating the sun-
roof shade
Read and observe and on page 66 first. Read and observe and on page 66 first.
If the operation of the sliding/tilting roof is deactivated (e.g. after disconnect- Operation of the sunshade » Fig. 59
ing and connecting the battery), then operation will have to be activated. Open - by pressing (press again - sunshade stops moving)
› Switch on the ignition, pull the switch on the recess all the way down in the Close - by pressing (press again - sunshade stops moving)
direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 57 and hold. The sunshade can also be operated by pressing and holding the appropriate
The sliding/tilting roof opens/closes again after around 10 seconds. button (starts movement of the sunshade) and releasing it when the sunshade
reaches the desired position.
› Release the lever.
Activating operation of the sunshade
Manually operated sunshade
Read and observe and on page 66 first.
Fig. 58
Operation of the sunshade If the operation of sunshade is deactivated (e.g. after disconnecting and con-
necting the battery), then the operation will have to be activated.
› Switch on the ignition, press and hold the » Fig. 59 on page 67 button.
The sunshade opens and closes again after around 10 seconds.
› Release the button.
Fig. 60 Note
Light switch ■ If, with a dipped beam, the ignition is turned off, then the dipped beam will
automatically switch off and the parking lights will come on. Does not apply to
the position , as long as the conditions are met for the COMING HOME
function . The parking lights are switched off when the ignition key is removed
(for vehicles with the KESSY system, after opening the driver's door).
■ If there is a fault in the light switch, the low beam comes on automatically.
Fig. 62
Light switch: position
CAUTION
Poorer visibility is evaluated by a sensor mounted below the windscreen in the
holder of the rear-view mirror. Do not cover the sensor - the system can be
affected.
Note Switching on the fog lights/rear fog lights is possible under the following
The setting (activate/deactivate) of the automatic driving light control during conditions.
rain is stored (depending on the Infotainment type) in the active user account The lights switch is in position , or » Fig. 63.
personalisation » page 53.
› To switch on the fog lights, turn the light switch to position 1 ; the warning
Xenon headlight light illuminates in the instrument cluster.
› To switch on the rear fog lights, pull the light switch to position 2 ; the
The Xenon headlights (hereinafter referred to as just system) use the driving warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster.
data to automatically ensure the for the best possible light cone in front of the
If the vehicle is not equipped with fog lights, the rear fog lights can be switch-
vehicle.
ed on by pulling the light switch to the only possible setting.
The system operates automatically in the following modes: urban, extra-urban,
Switch off the fog lights/rear fog lights in reverse order.
highway, rain, fog, adjusting the lighting direction of the headlights for the
road illumination in curves. Note
The system works as long as the light switch is in position . If an accessory is connected to the trailer socket, the rear fog lamp does not
light up on the vehicle.
WARNING
If there is a system malfunction the headlights are automatically lowered to Fog lights with CORNER function
the emergency position, which prevents a possible dazzling of oncoming
traffic. This reduces the cone of light in front of the vehicle. Seek help from The CORNER function automatically switches on the fog lights on the respec-
a specialist garage. tive side of the vehicle (e.g. when cornering or steering), if the following condi-
tions are fulfilled.
The turn signal is turned on or the front wheels are severely locked (in the
event of conflict between the two versions, has turn signal has the higher
priority).
The vehicle speed is below 40 km/h.
The low beam is switched on.
The fog lights are not switched on.
The function switches the light on only if there is poorer visibility and the light When the hazard warning system is on and the turn signal is switched on, the
switch is in the position . hazard warning lights are switched off temporarily and only the turn signal
flashes on the relevant side of the vehicle.
The two functions can be used in Infotainment in the menu / → → Light
(activated/deactivated and adjusted). Parking light
CAUTION The side light is provided for lighting of the parked vehicle.
■ Poorer visibility is evaluated by a sensor mounted below the windscreen in
Switching on the side light on one side
the holder of the rear-view mirror. Do not cover the sensor - the system can
be affected. › Switch off the ignition.
■ If this option is always enabled, then the battery is heavily loaded. › Press the control lever all the way into position or until it stops » Fig. 61
on page 69.
Note The parking lights on the respective side of the vehicle are turned on.
The setting of the two functions is stored (depending on the Infotainment
type) in the active user account personalisation » page 53. Switching on the side light on both sides
› Turn the ignition on and turn the light switch to position » page 68.
Hazard warning light system › Switch off the ignition and lock the car.
After removing the ignition key and opening the driver's door, an audible warn-
Fig. 64 ing sounds. After a few seconds, or after closing the driver's door, the acoustic
Button for hazard warning light warning signal stops.
system CAUTION
■ Turning on the parking light means the battery is heavily loaded.
■ The parking lights may switch off automatically due to a low battery charge.
If the two-sided parking lights are switched on when the ignition is off, the
parking lights will not switch on automatically.
cluster.
The Xenon headlight can be adjusted by switching on Travel mode in Infotain- If there is a fault, the error message will appear in the instrument cluster dis-
ment in the menu / → → Light. In this mode, no automatic beam adjust- play. Seek help from a specialist garage.
ment is made ahead of the vehicle.
WARNING
The system is used only for support, thus the driver is not released from his
Headlight Assist (Light Assist / Dynamic Light Assist) obligation to manually adjust the main or low beam according to the given
ambient conditions (e.g. in unfavourable lighting and weather conditions, as
Introduction when passing poorly lit road users, if necessary, when the area in front of
the sensor is covered by an obstacle).
Fig. 65
Sensor window for the head- CAUTION
light assistant
Do not attach any stickers or similar objects in front of the sensor on the wind-
screen to avoid impairing the function of the system.
Note
The adjustment of the headlight assistant in Infotainment is stored (depending
on the Infotainment type) in the active user account personalisation » page 53.
The headlight assistant (referred to as just system in the following) automati- Operating conditions
cally switches the main beam on/off, if necessary, adjusts the beam of the
front headlights in accordance with the existing traffic situation (other vehi- Read and observe and on page 72 first.
cles) and environmental conditions (e.g. driving through a lit village).
The system works under the following conditions.
The switching on/off of the main beam, if necessary, the adaptation of the
The system is activated in Infotainment in the menu / → → light
headlight, is controlled by a sensor » Fig. 65.
activated.
Depending on the equipment, the following system versions can exist. The light switch is in the position .
Light Assist automatically switches the main beam on/off. The system is activated » page 73, System on/off.
Fig. 66
Operating lever: Headlamp as-
sistant
› Push the lever into the sprung position A » Fig. 66. The following indicator D Reading lamp right
light lights up in the instrument cluster display.
Automatic operation - switch
Switch off the system The system is turned on when any of the following is present.
› If the high beam is switched on automatically, move the lever into the sprung ▶ The vehicle is unlocked.
position B . The warning light goes out. The high beam turns off. ▶ One of the doors is opened.
› If the high beam is is not switched on automatically, move the lever into the ▶ The ignition key is removed.
sprung position A . The warning light goes out. The high beam turns on. The system is turned off when any of the following is present.
The high beam switches off automatically when the speed falls below 30 km/h ▶ The vehicle is locked.
(but the system remains switched on). ▶ The ignition is switched on.
▶ About 30 seconds after all the doors have been closed.
Interior lighting
Introduction
The inner lighting also works if the ignition is switched off. With the ignition
off (or after a door is opened),the lights will automatically switch off after ap-
proximately 10 minutes.
Fig. 68 Fig. 70
Interior lights at the rear: Variant Setting the ambient lighting
1
The ambient lighting illuminates the dashboard and side door trim panels in
colour, and the footwell in white.
The switching on of the lighting takes place automatically after opening the
door, switching off occurs automatically after the locking of the vehicle or 30
seconds after the closing of the door with the ignition switched off.
The ambient lighting can be adjusted in Infotainment in the menu /→
→ Background lighting.
Description of the function surfaces » Fig. 70
A Enable / disable the background lighting
Fig. 69 Interior lights at the rear: Version 2/version 3
B Activating of the brightness setting for all areas at the same time
C Activating of the brightness setting for the dashboard area
The rear lighting (variants 1 and 3) is controlled together with the automatic
operation of the lighting from the front seats. D Activating the brightness controls for the door area
E Activating the brightness setting for the footwell area
Option 1 - switching on/off (by pressing relevant switch) » Fig. 68
F Choice of colour options / brightness adjustment
A Reading lamp left
G Function surfaces for selecting lighting colour / brightness adjustment
B Reading lamp right
To display B . C . D and E tap on the function surface .
Variant 2 - operation (by moving the light lens C ) » Fig. 69
Switching on Note
Switching off The adjustment of the ambient lighting is stored (depending on Infotainment
Automatic operation (the light is switched on/off automatically together type) in the active user account personalisation » page 53.
with the front light)
Option 3 - switching on/off (by pressing relevant switch) » Fig. 69
D Reading lamp left
Reading lamp right
No objects should be attached to the sun visors, which could limit the view cause of the low charge of the battery.
■ If the Climatronic recognises that the windshield could fog up, the windshield
or endanger the vehicle occupants during sudden braking or should the ve-
hicle collide. heating is automatically switched on. This function can be activated/deactiva-
ted on the Climatronic control panel in the menu →
Fig. 71 Buttons for the front and rear window heater: Climatronic / Fig. 72 Fold down flap / flip up flap / make-up mirror and parking per-
manual air conditioning mit holder
Read and observe on page 75 first. Read and observe on page 75 first.
The heating for quick defrosting and ventilation of the front /and rear window. Operation and description of the sun visor » Fig. 72
The heating only works when the engine is running. 1 Swivel the visor towards the windscreen
2 Swivel cover towards the door
Buttons for the heating (depending on vehicle equipment) » Fig. 71
A Make-up mirror with cover (the cover can be pushed in the direction of
Switching the windscreen heater on/off
the arrow)
Switch on/off the rear window heater
B Light (turns on when the cover of the make-up mirror is pushed to one
When the heating is switched on, a light illuminates inside or below the button. side)
The heating automatically switches off after ten minutes. C Parking ticket holder
If the engine is switched off when the heating is on and turned back on again
within 10 minutes, the heating is continued.
› To roll down, pull out the sunshade by the handle A in direction of arrow 1
and suspend in the holder B on top edge of the door in the direction of ar-
row 2 » Fig. 74.
› To roll up, hold the sunshade by the handle A and remove it from the holder
B against the direction of arrow 2 . Hold the sunshade so that this can
slowly roll back in without damaging.
Introduction
Fig. 73 Sun screen
The windscreen wipers and the wash system only operate if the ignition is
Read and observe on page 75 first.
switched on and the bonnet and boot are closed.
The sun screen is located in a housing on the luggage compartment cover.
WARNING
› To roll down, pull the sunshade by the handle A in direction of arrow 1 and Do not use the windscreen washer system at low temperatures, without
suspend in the magnetic holder B in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 73. heating the windscreen beforehand. The window washer fluid could other-
› To roll up, pull the sunshade by the handle A out of the holder B against wise freeze on the windscreen and restrict the view to the front.
the direction of arrow 2 . Hold the sunshade so that this can slowly roll back
in without damaging. CAUTION
Note ■ If the windscreen wipers are in rest position, they cannot be folded out from
It is not necessary to roll up the sunshade before opening the boot lid. the windscreen. The wipers must be set to the service position to raise them
off the windscreen » page 289.
■ In cold temperatures and during the winter, check before switching on the
Sunshade in the rear doors
ignition that the wiper blades are not frozen to the windscreen. If the wind-
screen wipers are switched on when the blades are frozen to the windscreen,
this may damage both the blades and windscreen wiper motor.
■ Carefully release the frozen-on windscreen wiper blades from the wind-
screen and remove snow and ice.
■ Handle the windscreen wipers with care - there is the risk of damaging the
windscreen with the windscreen wiper arms.
■ Do not switch on the ignition when the front windscreen wiper arms are fol-
ded down - there is the danger of damaging the bonnet by the windscreen
wiper arms.
■ If there is an obstacle on the windscreen, the wipers will try to push away the
Fig. 74 Sun blind on the rear door obstacle five times. Thereafter, the wipers will stop to prevent them becoming
damaged. Turn on the wipers again only after the obstacle has been removed.
Introduction
WARNING
Exterior mirrors increase the field of view, however, make objects appear Fig. 78 Rear-view mirrors with automatic dimming: Version 1/version 2
smaller and further away. Therefore, use the rear-view mirror to determine
the distances to the following vehicles. Read and observe on page 78 first.
WARNING
Manual adjustment
Do not touch the exterior mirror surfaces, if the exterior mirror heating is
switched on - hazard of burning.
Fig. 80
Control elements on the seat
CAUTION
■ Never manually fold in/out the electrically folding exterior mirrors - there is a
risk of damage to the mirror!
■ When the mirror is swung by external influences (due to impact during ma-
noeuvring, for example), then first fold-in the mirror by turning the knob and
wait for a loud clapping noise.
Note
Read and observe on page 80 first.
The setting of the mirror functions is stored in Infotainment (depending on the
Infotainment type) in the active user account personalisation » page 53. A Adjusting the seat in the longitudinal direction (after releasing the control
lever must lock audibly)
B Adjusting height of seat
C Adjust the tilt of the backrest (do not lean on the backrest when adjusting)
D Setting the extent of the curvature of the lumbar support
Note
After a certain time, play can develop within the adjustment mechanism of the
backrest angle.
Fig. 82
Button for the massage function
Fig. 81 Control elements on the seat Read and observe on page 80 first.
Read and observe on page 80 first. The massage function is used to massage the lumbar area of the back.
WARNING
The electric front seat adjustment is functional even with the ignition off.
Therefore, when leaving the vehicle, never leave people who are not com-
pletely independent, such as children, unattended in the vehicle - there is a
danger of injury!
Note
■ If the inclination angle of the seat backrest relative to the seat surface is
greater than approx. 110°, then it is not possible for safety reasons to save this
setting in the memory of the electrically adjustable seats or the remote control
key.
■ On vehicles with personalisation, the driver's seat setting is stored in the ac-
tive user account personalisation » page 53.
Every time the vehicle is locked, the driver´s seat and exterior mirror settings
are saved and assigned to the key with which the vehicle was locked.
Read and observe on page 80 first.
After the following unlocking of the vehicle with the same key and opening the
Among the memory buttons B on the driver's seat, a setting for the driver´s driver’s door, the driver´s seat and exterior mirrors that are saved to this key
seat and exterior mirror position can be saved » Fig. 84. will be adopted.
Storing seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forward This function can be used in Infotainment in the menu / → → Seats (ac-
tivated/deactivated).
› Switch on the ignition, adjust the seat and the exterior mirrors, as required.
› Press the A » Fig. 84 button and then, within 10 seconds, press the de- Storing front passenger´s exterior mirror settings for reversing
sired memory button B . Storing is confirmed by an acoustic signal. The function for lowering the front passenger's mirror area during reversing
can be activated in Infotainment in the menu / → → Mirrors and wipers.
key. e.g. if they roll under the pedals, or could protrude into the driver's zone.
■ Objects which could lead to injury to passengers due to a change of di-
Folding front passenger seat rection or braking manoeuvre when accelerating sharply.
The front passenger seat can, (depending on equipment fitted), be folded for- Read and observe on page 80 first.
ward into a horizontal position.
› To fold down, pull the lever in direction of arrow 1 , fold the seat backrest in › To adjust the height, lift the armrest in the direction of the arrow A into one
the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 85. The locking mechanism must audibly snap of the locking positions » Fig. 86.
into place. › To close, lift the armrest in the direction of arrow A past the stop and then
› To fold up, pull the lever in direction of arrow 1 , fold back the seat backrest fold down again.
against the direction of arrow 2 . The locking mechanism must audibly snap
into place.
› Check this by pulling on the seat and on the backrest.
WARNING
■ If the seat backrest is folded down, only the seat behind the driver´s seat
can be used to transport passengers.
■ When transporting objects on the folded seat backrest, the front passen-
ger airbag should be deactivated » page 28.
WARNING
■ The seat backrests in the occupied rear seats must be properly engaged.
■ When transporting objects in the luggage compartment that has been en-
larged by folding the backrest forward, ensure the safety of the passengers
transported on the other rear seats.
Fig. 87 Folding down the seat backrests from the forward from the ■ The seat backrests must be securely latched in position so that no objects
passenger compartment from the luggage compartment can slip into the passenger compartment
under sudden braking – risk of injury.
Fig. 88 CAUTION
Fold the backrest forward from When operating the seat backrests, the seat belts must not be pinched - there
the luggage compartment is a risk of damage to the seat belts.
Fig. 89
Fold down armrest
Before folding the seat backrests forwards, adjust the position of the front
seats in such a way that they are not damaged by the seat backrests. If neces-
sary, remove the rear head restraints » page 85.
Folding forwards from the passenger compartment
› Place the outer seat belt behind the raised edge A » Fig. 87.
› Push the release lever B in the direction of arrow 1 and fold down the seat
backrest in the direction of arrow 2 . The armrest can be folded down in the direction of the arrow» Fig. 89.
Fold forward from the luggage compartment The folded-down armrest can be used as a side table.
On vehicles with a net partition, the left and then the right and middle rear seat
backrest must first be unlocked. The net partition must be rolled up in the
housing.
Introduction
Note
In sports seats, the headrests are integrated into the seat backrests and can-
not be adjusted in height.
Fig. 90
Setting the height of the front Fig. 91 Setting the height of the rear headrest
headrest
› Grasp the headrest and move upwards in the direction of 1 » Fig. 91.
› To move the restraint down, hold the locking button A in the direction of
arrow 2 and push the rest in the direction of arrow 3 .
› To adjust the height, hold the locking button A and move the rest in the de-
sired direction » Fig. 90.
CAUTION
If the tablet holder adapter is secured to the guide rods of the headrests
» page 100, do not push the headrests down to the stop – risk of damaging the
headrests.
› To remove, pull the rest out of the seat backrest up to the stop.
› Hold the locking button A in the direction of arrow 1 , at the same time us-
ing a flat screwdriver with a max. width of 5 mm to press the locking button
in the opening B in the direction of arrow 2 and pull out the rest in the di-
rection of arrow 3 » Fig. 92.
› To insert, push the rest into the seat backrest in the direction of arrow 4
until the locking button clicks into place.
Depending on the equipment, the front seats can be heated or heated and
ventilated. The outer rear seats can only be heated.
Buttons for the seat heating and ventilation » Fig. 93
Left seat heating
Fig. 94 The seat heating is switched on at maximum heat: Front
Right seat heating
seats/rear seats
Seat heating and ventilation left
Seat heating and ventilation right Read and observe and on page 86 first.
The seat heating / ventilation only works when the engine is running.
› To turn on the heating with maximum heat » Fig. 94, press button or .
When the ignition is switched off, the seat heating / ventilation is also switch- With repeated pressing of the button, the level is down-regulated until it
ed off. if the engine is started again within 10 minutes, then the driver's seat switches off . The level of the seat heating is indicated by the number of illu-
heating / ventilation is switched on again automatically according to the set- minated warning lights underneath / in the button.
ting before switching off the ignition.
Increase in heating power of the rear seat heating can be locked/unlocked.
WARNING To do this, press button on the Climatronic → Tap the function surfaces
If you have a limited pain and / or temperature sensitivity, e.g. due to medi- / on the Infotainment screen (applies to vehicles with Climatronic controls
cation, paralysis or because of chronic illness (e.g. diabetes), we recom- in the rear). In the locked heating power increase, the heating power can only
mend that you do not use the seat heating. If the seat heating is used, we be adjusted down to turn off.
recommend to make regular breaks in your journey when driving long dis-
tances, so that the body can recuperate from the stress of the journey.
Please consult your doctor, who can evaluate your specific condition.
› Press the button or on the control panel of the air conditioner, a menu
for operating the front seat heating and ventilation is displayed on the Info-
tainment screen » Fig. 96.
› Press the button on the Climatronic, then tap the function surface → cause an accident!
Steering wheel heating on the Infotainment screen. ■ Do not carry any objects on the front passenger seat except objects de-
› Setting the heating power. signed for this purpose (e.g. child seats) – risk of accident!
■ No objects should be placed in the storage compartments nor in the
The heating power is displayed by the number of segments in the indicator drinks holders; the vehicle occupants could be endangered if there is sud-
light C » Fig. 97. den braking or the vehicle collides with something.
Steering wheel heating together with the driver's seat heating (applies to ■ For safety reasons, lockable storage compartments must be closed while
the Climatronic) driving - there is a risk of injury from the opened cover or from the items in
› To activate / deactivate the heated steering wheel with the driver's seat the compartment.
heating, press the button on the Climatronic, then tap the function sur- ■ Make sure that no objects protrude from the compartments - there is
face → Link seat/steering wheel heating in the Infotainment screen. danger of injury!
› To switch on / off the heated steering wheel, press the button for the driver ■ Do not exceed the permissible load for the storage compartments and
seat heating. pockets - it may cause injury or there is the risk of damaging the compart-
ments and pockets!
If the heated steering wheel is turned on together with the driver's seat heat- ■ Ash, cigarettes, cigars and the like may only be placed in the ashtray - risk
ing, then the function surface is displayed on the Infotainment screen. This of fire!
can be used to switch the heated steering wheel off/on. ■ The storage compartments and the waste containers are not a substitute
for the ashtray and must also not be used for such purposes – risk of fire!
CAUTION
No not place large or sharp objects in the storage compartments and pockets
- there is a risk of damage to the compartments and pockets.
Fig. 98
Parking ticket holder
Read and observe and on page 88 first. Fig. 100 Storage compartments: in the front door/in the rear door
The ticket holder is provided for the attachment of e.g. parking tickets. Read and observe and on page 88 first.
The reflective vest can be stowed in the storage compartments in the door
» page 276.
WARNING
The storage compartment A » Fig. 100n the front door is to be used exclu-
sively for storing objects which do not protrude - there is the danger of
limiting the operating range of the side airbags.
› To open, lift the handle and fold out the compartment » Fig. 99 .
› To close, swing the lid against the direction of the arrow until it audibly clicks
into place.
A card holder is located in the storage compartment » Fig. 99 .
The maximum permissible load of the storage compartment is 0.5 kg.
Practical features 89
Storage compartment in the front centre console While wireless charging is taking place, no objects may be between the pad
and the telephone being charged.
WARNING
■ The telephone may become warm during wireless charging, so this should
be removed carefully from the tray.
■ Metal objects between the pad and the telephone to be charged can get
hot due to the action of the induction field - There is a risk of injury. If there
is a metal object in the storage compartment that has become hot, then
take out the telephone and let the object cook in the storage compart-
ment!
Fig. 103 Front USB input / USB input under the armrest Fig. 105 Open front cup holders/ front cup holders
Fig. 104
Rear USB inputs
Read and observe and on page 88 first. Fig. 106 Open rear cup holders/ rear cup holders
The USB input is located in the storage compartment in the center console Read and observe and on page 88 first.
and also depending on the equipment fitted, in the storage compartment un-
der the front armrest » Fig. 103. Front cup holder
The cup holder B is located in the front centre console » Fig. 105.
The USB inputs are also in the rear centre console depending on the equip-
ment fitted » Fig. 104. › To open, push on the ridge A in the direction of the arrow.
The USB input in the storage compartment in the front centre console and in
› To close, pull on the ridge A against the direction of the arrow.
the storage compartment under the front armrest can be used for charging In the centre area of the holder B , a beverage container can be opened with
and data transfer. The USB inputs in the rear centre console can be used only one hand by pushing the container into the holder and turning the lid.
for charging.
Rear cup holder
Information for use » page 150, USB input. Two cup containers can be placed in the cup holder B » Fig. 106.
› To open, hold the lid on the recess A and fold in the direction of arrow until
the stop.
› To close, push the cover against the direction of the arrow.
Practical features 91
WARNING Insert waste container
■ Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material (e.g. › Position the waste container at the front edge of the slot.
glass, porcelain). This could lead to injuries in the event of an accident. › Push the waste container in the rear area in the direction of the arrow A
■ Never put hot beverage containers in the cup holder. If the vehicle moves, » Fig. 107.
they may spill – risk of scalding! › If required, push the waste container in the direction of arrow B .
Remove the waste container
CAUTION › Remove the waste container in the opposite direction to the arrow A
Do not leave open beverage containers in the cup holder during the journey. » Fig. 107.
There is a risk of spilling e.g. when braking which may cause damage to the
Open/close waste container
electrical components or seat upholstery.
› Lift the cover in the direction C » Fig. 107.
Waste container Closing takes place in reverse order.
Replace bags
› Remove the waste container from the slot.
› Press the two locking lugs on the frame in the direction of arrow
1 » Fig. 108.
› Pull the bag together with the frame downwards in the direction of arrow
2.
› Remove the bag from the frame.
› Pull the new bag through the frame and pull it over the bag frame in the di-
rection of arrow 3 .
› Insert the bag containing the frame in the direction of arrow 4 into the con-
Fig. 107 Waste container: inserting and moving/opening tainer body, so that the two lugs engage audibly with the frame.
Note
We recommend that you use 20 x 30 cm bags.
The waste container can be inserted into the slot in the door.
Fig. 111
Opening the glasses storage box
CAUTION
Read and observe and on page 88 first.
■ Do not put any heat-sensitive objects in the glasses storage box - with high
temperatures there is risk of damage.
The storage compartment is equipped with an interior light (this is illuminated ■ The box must be closed before leaving and locking the vehicle – risk of im-
when the parking lights / low beam are switched on), a stowage compartment pairment to the functions of the anti-theft alarm system.
for the tablet and an air outlet.
Storage compartment
› To open, lift the armrest in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 109until it stops.
› To close, fold the armrest down again against the direction of the arrow 1 .
Storage compartment for the tablet
› To open, pull on the loop A in the direction of arrow » Fig. 110.
› Place the tablet carefully to avoid damage to any connected cables.
Air supply
› To open, turn the rotary switch until it stops in the position » Fig. 109.
› To close, turn the rotary switch until it stops in the position .
Practical features 93
Storage compartment on the front passenger side Storage compartment under the front passenger’s seat
Fig. 113
Opening the storage compart-
ment
Fig. 112 Open storage compartment / close storage compartment and Read and observe and on page 88 first.
open air supply
› To open, pull the handle in direction of arrow 1 pull and open the compart-
Read and observe and on page 88 first. ment in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 113.
› To close, pull the handle in the direction of arrow 1 and hold this against the
The storage compartment is equipped with an interior light (this is illuminated direction of arrow 2 until the storage compartment closes.
when the parking lights / low beam are switched on), a pen holder and an air
outlet. The maximum permissible load of the storage compartment is 1.5 kg.
Read and observe and on page 88 first. Read and observe and on page 88 first.
The clothes hooks are located on the middle door pillars of the vehicle and on The storage pockets are located on the inside of the driver, if necessary, also
the handle of the headliner above each of the rear doors » Fig. 115. the front passenger seat » Fig. 117 and are used to store small and light objects
(e.g. mobile telephones).
The maximum permissible load of each of the hooks is 2 kg.
The maximum permissible load of each of the pockets is 200 g.
WARNING
■ Never leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items
Storage compartment in rear centre console
of clothing hung up.
■ To hang the clothes do not use hangers - there is a risk of limiting the ef-
Fig. 118
fectiveness of head airbags.
■ Ensure that any clothes hanging from the hooks do not impair your vision
Open storage compartment,
open lockable storage compart-
to the outside.
ments
Fig. 116
Map pockets
Read and observe and on page 88 first.
Practical features 95
Storage compartment in the rear armrest › Pull opening lever A » Fig. 120 in the direction of arrow 1 until it stops. The
catches on the cover must engage completely in the lid and click into place.
› Open the cover in the direction of the arrow 2 .
› To open from the luggage compartment, push the securing tab B in the di-
rection of the arrow and fold the cover with the armrest forwards.
› To close, fold the cover and the rear armrest upwards until the stop. This
should audibly click into place.
The cover must be secured after the closing process. Ensure that the red field
above the securing tab B is not visible.
WARNING
Fig. 119 Open storage compartment / interior of the compartment The through-loading channel is only intended for transporting skis in a
properly secured, through-loading bag.
Read and observe and on page 88 first.
The storage compartment provides a cup holder B , a stowage compartment Removable through-loading bag
for attaching the tablet holder C as well as a pen holder D » Fig. 119.
› To open, hold the lid on the recess A and fold in the direction of arrow until
the stop.
› To close, push the cover against the direction of the arrow.
Long cargo channel
Introduction
WARNING
■ Do not place anything on the dashboard. These objects might slide or fall
down when driving and may distract you from concentrating on the traffic Read and observe and on page 97 first.
– risk of accident!
■ Make sure that while driving no objects can enter the driver's footwell - › To use, open the storage compartment, remove the cover of the socket
» Fig. 122 and plug the electrical appliance plug into the socket.
cause an accident!
■ Safely stow all devices during the journey to prevent them from being
thrown around the interior in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or
an accident – risk of death!
■ The devices may warm up during operation – risk of injury or fire!
■ Improper use of the power sockets and the electrical accessories can
cause fires, burns and other serious injuries.
■ The 12-Volt sockets also work if the ignition is switched off. When leaving
the vehicle, never leave persons who are not completely independent, such
as children, unattended in the vehicle.
Practical features 97
12 volt socket in the rear centre console 230-volt socket in the rear centre console
Fig. 123 Open storage compartment / cover of the 12 volt power outlet Fig. 125 Open the cover of the 230 volt outlet / 230 volt outlet
Read and observe and on page 97 first. Read and observe and on page 97 first.
› To use, open the storage compartment, remove the cover of the socket The 230-volt socket has a child safety lock. When inserting the plug, the fuse
» Fig. 123 and plug the electrical appliance plug into the socket. is released, the socket is activated and the warning light above the socket is
illuminates green (if this flashes red, then the socket is deactivated).
12 volt socket in luggage compartment The socket works with the engine running (in STOP mode in vehicles with the
START-STOP system) and for about 10 minutes after the engine is switched
Fig. 124 off, provided an appliance was still connected prior to switching off the engine
Cover of the 12 volt power out- (the warning light flashes green)).
let
› To use, fold up the cover of the socket in the direction of arrow » Fig. 125
and plug the electrical appliance plug into the socket.
An automatic deactivation of the socket can take place, for example, for
the following reasons.
▶ Excessive current.
▶ Low state of charge of the battery.
Read and observe and on page 97 first. ▶ High outlet temperature.
If disabling reasons no longer exist, the automatic activation of the socket can
› To use, open the cover of the socket » Fig. 124 and plug the electrical appli- be done.
ance plug into the socket.
Should no automatic activation of the socket take place, the connected devi-
ces must be disconnected from the power outlet and reconnect after a short
time.
CAUTION
■ The power socket can only be used for connecting approved electrical ac-
cessories with a two-pin 230V plug, with a total power uptake of up to Fig. 126 Remove front ashtray / remove front ashtray insert / remove
150 watt. rear ashtray insert
■ The plug of the electrical appliance must be plugged in up to the stop, other-
wise the child safety lock can be unlocked and the socket may be activated Read and observe on page 99 first.
but the electric appliance is still not receiving power.
■ Do not connect bulbs with neon tubes in the socket - there is a risk of dam- Removable ashtray
aging the lamp. › Hold the ashtray A (not by the lid) remove it in the direction of the arrow
■ For appliances with an independent power source (e.g. such as notebooks), » Fig. 126.
first connect the power source itself and only after that connect the appliance. To insert, proceed in reverse order.
Ashtray with removable insert
Ashtray and cigarette lighter
› To remove the insert, open the ashtray fully, hold the insert in area B and
remove in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 126.
Introduction
To insert, proceed in reverse order.
The ashtray can be used for ash, cigarettes, cigars and the like.
WARNING
Never place hot or flammable objects in the ashtray – risk of fire!
Practical features 99
Cigarette lighter CAUTION
Never exceed the maximum permissible load of the holder - there is a risk of
damage or functional impairment.
Fig. 127 Cigarette lighter: in the front centre console/in the rear centre
console
Tablet holder › Toinsert, attach the opened adapter to the guide rods of the front headrest
and clip in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 128 » .
Introduction › Clip in the holder in the direction of arrow 2 into the adapter.
› To remove, pull on the securing tab A in direction of arrow 3 and take the
holder out of the adapter in the direction of arrow 4 » Fig. 129.
External devices (e.g. tablet, smartphone etc.) measuring min. 122 mm and
max. 195 mm can be secured in the holder. › Press the adapter and remove in the direction of the arrow 5 from the
guide rods of the headrest.
The maximum permissible load of the compartment is 750 g.
The holder may be by 30° in the direction of the arrow 1 tipped and by 360°
in the direction of arrow 2 turned » Fig. 131.
› To adjust the holder size, pull out the securing tab
A in the direction of ar-
Fig. 130 Open storage compartment / stowage compartment for hold- row 3 and push the part B in the direction of arrow 4 to the desired posi-
er / remove holder tion » Fig. 132.
In the event of an accident, even small and light objects gain so much kinetic
energy that they can cause severe injuries.
The magnitude of the kinetic energy is dependent on the speed at which the
vehicle is travelling and the weight of the object.
Luggage compartment light
The light switches on/off when the boot lid is opened or closed.
If the boot lid is open and the ignition switched off, the light will extinguish au- Fig. 133 Fastening elements: Version 1/version 2
tomatically after around 10 minutes.
Fixing nets
Foldable hooks for hanging small items of luggage, such as bags, etc., are pro-
vided on both sides of the luggage compartment.
› To use it, pull down the hook in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 136.
The maximum permissible load of the hook is 7.5 kg.
Fig. 138
Net on the luggage compart-
ment cover
Fig. 137 Fastening the flooring: version 1/version 2 Read and observe and on page 102 first.
Read and observe and on page 102 first. The net at the bottom of the luggage compartment cover » Fig. 138 is provi-
ded for transporting light and soft items.
Fastening options for the flooring » Fig. 137
The maximum permissible load of the net is 1.5 kg.
With the loop on a hook on the luggage compartment cover
With the hook on the frame of the luggage compartment lid Luggage compartment cover
CAUTION
For version 1, the following information applies.
■ The hook on the luggage compartment cover is only provided for the fixing
of the floor covering, do not hang objects on it - there is a risk of damage to
hook.
■ The flooring covering can be fixed to the hook only with the boot open. Be-
fore closing the lid, check that the flooring is not attached to the hook - there
is a risk of damage to the hook.
CAUTION
The floor covering can be fixed with Version 2 only if the variable loading floor Fig. 139 Remove the luggage compartment cover
is folded in the upper position » Fig. 154 on page 111.
During the trip there must be no objects on the cover - risk of injury in the
event of sudden braking or a vehicle collision!
CAUTION
It is possible that the roll-up luggage compartment cover rolls more slowly
Fig. 142 Remove the left side cover / store roll-up cover during winter weather conditions. This is not a defect.
Removing/inserting When opening the boot lid with the function activated, the roll-up cover auto-
› Press on the side of the cross bar in the direction of arrow 4 and remove matic rolls-up of the intermediate position B » Fig. 141 on page 105.
the cover in the arrow direction 5 » Fig. 141. Activation/deactivation can be carried out in Infotainment in the menu →
Insertion takes place in reverse order. → Opening and closing .
Stowage Note
If the vehicle is equipped with the variable loading floor, then the removable The setting (activation/deactivation) of the automatic rolling up is stored (de-
roll-up luggage compartment cover can be stowed in the recesses of the lug- pending on the Infotainment type) in the active user account personalisation
gage compartment side trim. » page 53.
› Fold the variable loading floor into the upper position » page 111.
› Open the side trays on both sides of the luggage compartment and remove
» Fig. 143 on page 107 - .
› Remove the left side cover in the arrow direction 1 » Fig. 142.
› Insert the roll-up cover in the recesses of the side trim in the direction of ar-
row 2 and stow in the direction of arrow 3 .
› Reinsert the left side cover in the opposite direction to the arrow 1 .
Fig. 143 Side shelf removal / open side pocket Fig. 144 Taking out cargo elements: Version 1/version 2
For vehicles that are not equipped with an emergency spare wheel located un-
der the flooring of the luggage compartment B » Fig. 146 or » Fig. 147.
Every storage compartment B is designed for storing small objects of up to
15 kg. in weight in total.
Using the storage compartments - variant 1
› Lift the flooring via loop A in the direction of arrow » Fig. 146 and complete-
ly fold back or fasten using the loop on the hook on the luggage compart-
ment cover.
› Stow the cargo in the storage compartments.
› Fold back the flooring against the direction of the arrow or remove it from
the hook.
CAUTION
The light is not waterproof, so it must be protected from humidity - otherwise
there is risk of damage.
Class N1 vehicles
Read and observe and on page 102 first.
Fig. 151 Removing light/inserting light
In class N1 vehicles that are not fitted with a protective grille, a lashing set that
Read and observe and on page 102 first. complies with the EN 12195 standard (1-4) must be used for fastening the load.
Proper functioning of the electrical installation is essential for safe vehicle op-
The lamp is for the illumination of the luggage compartment or it can be used eration. It is important to ensure that the electrical installation is not damaged
as a portable lamp. during the adjustment process or when the storage area is being loaded and
The lamp is fitted with magnets. As a result, this can, for example, be fitted to unloaded.
the vehicle body.
Description of the light » Fig. 150
A Button to turn the light that has been removed on / off
B Part that lights up when the lamp is in the mount
C Part that lights up when the lamp is not in the mount
Fig. 154 Fold up variable loading floor / folded variable cargo floor in
Fig. 153 Set variable loading floor to the lower position / variable load- the upper position
ing floor in the lower position
› To fold together, hold the variable loading floor by the handle A and lift in
The variable loading floor can be set to the upper or lower position. the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 154.
› Fold up the variable loading floor by moving it in the direction of the arrow
Set to the upper position 2.
› Lift the variable loading floor by the handle A » Fig. 152 by about 20 cm and
Folding out takes place in reverse order.
pull towards you.
› Lift the variable loading floor to the height of the roll-up luggage compart- The variable loading floor is folded together / out in the same way in the upper
ment cover in the direction of arrow 1 until you hear the clicking sound and and lower position.
press forward.
Fig. 155
Dividing the boot with variable
loading floor
CAUTION
If the net partition blocks when pulling it out, push the release lever B in the
direction of the arrow » Fig. 156.
› To remove, fold forwarded the rear seat backrests and open the rear right Roof load
The maximum permitted weight of the load incl. the carrier is 100 kg.
door.
› Push the housing A in the direction of the arrow 1 and remove it from the WARNING
mountings in the direction of the arrow 2 » Fig. 158.
For road safety when transporting cargo on the roof rack, observe the fol-
› To install, insert the recesses on the housing A into the mountings on the lowing instructions.
rear seat backrests and push the housing against the arrow 1 up to the ■ Always distribute the load on the roof rack evenly and secure properly us-
stop.
ing suitable lashing straps or tensioning straps.
› Fold the rear seat backrests to their original position. ■ When transporting heavy objects or objects which take up a large area on
the roof rack system, the handling of the car may change as a result of the
displacement of the centre of gravity. The style of driving and speed must
therefore be adapted to the current circumstances.
■ The permissible roof load, permissible axle loads and permissible total ve-
hicle weight must not be exceeded under any circumstances – risk of acci-
dent!
WARNING
■ The blower should always be on to prevent the windows from misting.
Otherwise there could be an accident.
■ Under certain circumstances, air at a temperature of about 5 °C can flow
out of the vents when the cooling system is switched on.
B Set the blower speed (Level 0: Adjust the fan speed (level 0: fan off; level
6: highest speed)
C Set the direction of the air outlet » page 119
D Depending on equipment fitted:
▶ Auxiliary heating and ventilation on / switch off » page 120
▶ Switching the windscreen heater on/off » page 75
Switch the cooling system on/off
Switch the rear window heating on/off » page 75
Switch recirculation on/off » page 118
Individual functions can be set or switched on by turning the dial or pressing When the function is switched on, an indicator lamp lights up inside or below
the corresponding button » Fig. 161. the button.
A Display the temperature setting for the left side Setting temperature
B Display the temperature setting for the right side The temperature can be set on the Climatronic control unit or in Infotain-
C Set the direction of the air outlet » page 119 ment» page 117. In the range between 16 ° C to 29.5 ° C, an automatic tem-
perature control takes place.
D Adjust fan speed (the setting is indicated by the number of illuminated
control lamps shown in the knob) At a temperature setting below 16 ° C, lights up in the temperature display,
▶ Turn to the left: Reduce speed up to turning off the Climatronic the Climatronic functions with maximum cooling performance.
▶ Turn to the right: Increase speed
At a temperature setting over 29.5 ° C, lights up in the temperature display,
E Adjust the temperature for the left side (or for both sides)1) the Climatronic functions with maximum heating output.
▶ Reduce the temperature/ Increase the temperature
F Adjust the temperature for the right side (or for both sides)2)
Residual heat function
▶ Reduce the temperature/ Increase the temperature After switching off the ignition, the engine residual heat is used for heat reten-
tion in the vehicle interior. The function can only be switched on with the igni-
G Depending on equipment fitted:
tion off within 30 minutes after stopping the engine. The residual heat func-
▶ Auxiliary heating and ventilation on / switch off » page 120
tion turns off after about 30 minutes, or when the battery has a low charge
▶ Residual heat function on / off » page 116
state.
H Interior temperature sensor
I Display of the temperature set in the rear » Fig. 162 CAUTION
J Set the rear temperature- deactivation/activation of the keys can be car- Do not cover the interior temperature sensor H » Fig. 161 - the function of the
ried out by pressing the button on the Climatronic → by tapping the Climatronic could be affected.
Function surfaces and screen display » Fig. 163 Read and observe on page 114 first.
A Displays the current operation mode (or set the operation mode) of The automatic mode is used in order to maintain a constant temperature and
the Climatronic to demist the windows in the interior of the car.
B Set the desired temperature (front - left side)
› To turn on, press » Fig. 161 on page 115 the button.
C Set the desired temperature (front - right side) › To turn off, press any button for the air distribution or change the blower
D Setting the power in operation speed. The temperature regulation is continued.
E Switching on/off and adjusting the fan speed, cooling system, air dis- Holding the button will turn on automatically.
tribution and air recirculationa)
Operating modes
F Set the desired temperature (rear)
Automatic mode works in three modes - moderate, medium, and intensive.
Colour representation of the air flow from the air vents at the front Setting the different modes is carried out via the function surface D » Fig. 163
(Blue colour - temperature reduction / red colour - temperature in- on page 117.
crease)
After the automatic mode is switched on, Climatronic works in the last selec-
Switching on/off the Climatronic
ted mode. The currently selected mode is displayed in the Infotainment dis-
Switch the temperature synchronisation on/off throughout the entire play.
interior of the vehicle according to the temperature setting on the
driver's sidea)
When the pollutant concentration decreases to the normal level, the recircula- When the function is activated, the air in the vehicle is circulated and cleaned
ted air mode is automatically switched off. at the same time. The cleaning process is displayed by the zones displayed in
the Infotainment screen.
Automatic switch-on/switch-off of the air recirculation function can be set in
the Infotainment screen, by pressing the button on the Climatronic and by › To switch on/off, press the button on the Climatronic control panel, and
then pressing the function surface → Automatic air recirculation. then tap on the function surface → Active on the Infotainment
screen» Fig. 164.
A shut-off of the air recirculation function takes place automatically by press-
ing the button, possibly depending on the moisture conditions in the vehi- To ensure correct Air Care functioning, all doors and windows including the
cle interior. panoramic sliding/tilting roof must be closed.
When opening a door or a window, the corresponding message is displayed in
WARNING
the Infotainment screen.
The air recirculation cannot be switched on for a longer period of time be-
cause there is no supply of fresh air from the outside. “Stale air” may result
in fatigue in the driver and occupants, reduce attention levels and also
cause the windows to mist up. As soon as the windows mist up, turn the air
recirculation mode off immediately - there is a risk of accident!
CAUTION
Do not cover the air vents - the air distribution could be compromised.
The auxiliary heating heats the vehicle interior as well as the engine. For heat-
ing, fuel is consumed from the fuel tank.
The auxiliary ventilation enables fresh air to flow into the vehicle interior with
the engine switched off, whereby the interior temperature is effectively de-
creased (e.g. with the vehicle parked in the sun).
The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) (referred to just as auxil-
iary heating in the following) ensures the heating / ventilation depending on
the setting of the air conditioning and the air outlet vents before switching off
the ignition.
Fig. 166 Air vents at the rear
WARNING
■ The auxiliary heating must never be operated in closed rooms (e.g. garag-
Read and observe on page 114 first.
es) – risk of poisoning!
The direction of airflow can be adjusted using the air outlet vents 3, 4 ■ The auxiliary heating must not be allowed to run during refuelling – risk of
» Fig. 165 and 6 » Fig. 166, and the vents can be opened and closed individually. fire.
■ The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating is located on the underside of
The setting of the airflow direction is carried out by moving the adjustment el- the vehicle. If you want to use the auxiliary heating, do not park the car in
ement A » Fig. 165 or » Fig. 166 in the desired direction. places where the exhaust fumes can come into contact with flammable
› To open, turn the controller B » Fig. 165 or» Fig. 166 upwards. materials such as dry grass, undergrowth, leaves, spilled fuel etc. - risk of
› Toclose, turn the controller B » Fig. 165 or» Fig. 166 downwards. fire.
Depending on the setting of the air distribution, the air stream comes out of
the following air vents.
Operation in Infotainment
Fig. 167 Button for switching on / off (Climatronic / manual air condi-
tioning)
Functional requirements of the auxiliary heating. Fig. 168 Auxiliary heater: Main menu/set preset time
The charge state of the vehicle battery is sufficient.
The fuel supply is adequate (the warning light is not illuminated in the Read and observe and on page 119 first.
instrument cluster). Call up the main menu
Manual on / off › On the Climatronic, press the button → Tap on the function surface in
▶ Using the button on the control panel of the air conditioner» Fig. 167. the Infotainment screen.
▶ Using the (switch on) / (switch off) button on the remote control opera-
Or vehicles with manual air conditioning:
tion.
Automatic on / off
› In the Infotainment system, in menu / tap the function surface.
▶ Via an enabled pre-selection time in Infotainment. Function surfaces and screen display » Fig. 168
▶ According to the environmental conditions. A Departure time - Day and time when the vehicle is to be ready for use
B Setting the operating mode (heating / ventilation)
Switch on the auxiliary heating tres (depending on obstructions between the remote control and the vehicle,
weather conditions, the battery condition etc.).
Switch off the auxiliary heating
Fig. 170
QR code with reference to web
pages for checking the compati-
bility of devices
122 Infotainment
Switches Infotainment on/off Description – Infotainment Bolero
1 - Overview of Infotainment menus » page 128
2 - Display of the main screen “HOME” » page 129
Volume up
Volume down
3 Touchscreen » page 124
Left control dial for switching Infotainment on and off; volume adjustment
Control dial for calls and confirmations
1 - Radio menu » page 144
2 - Media menu » page 147
3 - Telephone menu » page 158
Fig. 172 Infotainment Amundsen 4 - Voice control » page 130
5 - Infotainment settings » page 133
Left control dial for switching Infotainment on and off; volume adjustment
6 - SmartLink menu » page 172
Control dial for calls and confirmations
7 - Vehicle system settings » page 199
1 - Radio menu » page 144
8 - Overview of Infotainment menus » page 128
2 - Media menu » page 147
9 Touchscreen » page 124
3 - Telephone menu » page 158
4 - Voice control » page 130
5 - Navigation menu » page 177
6 - SmartLink menu » page 172
7 - Vehicle system settings » page 199
8 - Overview of Infotainment menus » page 128
9 Touchscreen » page 124
Fig. 175
Example of an external module
Depending on the vehicle configuration and Infotainment type, all the follow-
ing elements must not be included in the external module.
Fig. 174 Infotainment Swing
The external module is located in the storage compartment on the front pas-
Left control dial for switching Infotainment on and off; volume adjustment senger side.
Control dial for calls and confirmations 1 SD1 card slot
1 - Radio menu » page 144 2 SD2 card slot
2 - Media menu » page 147 3 - CD / DVD eject button
3 - Telephone menu » page 158 4 CD / DVD slot
4 - Infotainment settings » page 141 5 SIM card slot
5 Depending on equipment fitted:
▶ - Menu SmartLink (Press) / turn on / off the voice control function Touch screen
SmartLink (hold) » page 172
▶ - Sound settings » page 141 The Infotainment can be operated by lightly touching the screen with your
6 - Vehicle system settings » page 199
fingers.
7 Touchscreen » page 124 The brightness level of the screen can be set by » page 133 or » page 141.
8 SD card slot » page 150 To protect the screen, a suitable protective film for touch screens can be used.
The screen can be cleaned with a soft cloth and pure spirit if necessary.
124 Infotainment
D Menu item with “Checkbox”
Infotainment operation ▶ - Function is switched on
▶ - Function is switched off
Infotainment operation
E Opens a sub-menu of the menu item with a “pop-up window”
Screen areas Function surfaces
The screen areas which confirm a function or a menu are called “function sur-
Fig. 176 faces”.
Screen areas ▶ White text - the surface is active and thus selectable
▶ Grey text - the surface is inactive and thus not selectable
▶ Green frame - currently selected surface
Set value
▶ By tapping on the function surface or in the bottom of the screen.
▶ By touching or moving your finger over the scale.
Description of the display » Fig. 177 ▶ Turning the knob (not applicable to Infotainment Columbus).
A Identification of the current menu
Note
B Return to the higher-level menu
Depending on the equipment, the Infotainment can also be operated by means
C Scroll symbol – moving in the menu is possible by moving fingers up or of the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. Further information
down on the scroll symbol » page 49.
The alphanumeric keypad is used to enter for letters, numbers and characters.
126 Infotainment
Gesture control Switching Infotainment on/off
Only valid for Infotainment Columbus. Only valid for Infotainment Columbus.
› To switch on Infotainment, press .
Fig. 180 › To switch off Infotainment, hold .
Example of a menu with
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero, Swing
gesture control
› To power on/off Infotainment, press
.
CAUTION › To display the overview of Infotainment menus, press the sensor field.
■ High volumes can cause sound resonance in the vehicle.
› To set the display mode, press the button sensor field and then tap the
function surface → Screen → Menu:.
■ When changing or connecting an audio source, this may cause sudden
changes in volume. Reduce the volume before changing or connecting an au-
› Select the Grid display » Fig. 181 or Horizont. Select display » Fig. 182.
dio source. Overview of Infotainment menus
Radio menu » page 144
Electronic voice amplification for driver and passenger Media menu » page 147
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero. ŠKODA Connect Online Services » page 13
SmartLink menu » page 172
The voice enhancer allows transmission of the driver's and passenger's voice With a connection established to an external device, the actual connec-
on the speakers in the rear. tion is shown instead of a symbol
› To set the voice amplification volume, tap the sensor field and then tap ▶ - Android Auto » page 173
the function surface → Volume → Voice Enhancer. ▶ - Apple CarPlay » page 174
› Or: while setting the volume, tap the function surface . ▶ - MirrorLink® » page 175
Telephone menu » page 158
128 Infotainment
Vehicle system settings » page 199 Configuration wizard
Navigation menu » page 177 (Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amund-
sen) The Configuration wizard is automatically displayed if there are at least two
List of traffic reports (TMC) (applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amund- non-selected menu items after turning on Infotainment, or if a new user ac-
sen) » page 197 count in personalisation is selected.
Media Command menu (applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen) › For manual display in Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen and Bolero, tap the
» page 156 sensor field and then tap on the function surface → Configuration wizard.
Images menu » page 153 › For manual displayin Infotainment Swing, press the button, then tap the
› To display the information, tap the sensor field. For the complete functionality of the application, data transmission from ex-
ternal devices must be activated and, if necessary, operation of the Infotain-
The “HOME” main screen contains three windows. ment via the application must be approved.
In the left window » Fig. 183 the navigation map is always displayed. By tapping Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero
the screen within this window, the Navigation main menu is displayed.
› Activate data transfer in Infotainment. To do so, tap the sensor field and
The contents of the window to the right can be changed. By holding the func- then the function surface → Mobile device data transfer → Activate data transfer
tion surface A , the list of selectable menus is displayed. for ŠKODA Apps.
By tapping the function surface A or by double-finger tapping on the screen
› Release Infotainment operation using the application. To do so, tap the
sensor field and then the function surface → Mobile device data transfer → Use
within each window, the appropriate main menu is displayed.
apps to operate: → Confirm/Allow.
If there are other pages in the window, then the associated symbols are dis- › Connect Infotainment to an external device via WLAN» page 170.
played in area B . By moving your finger across the screen within each win- › In the external device, launch an application for Infotainment operation (e.g.
dow, it is possible to display these pages. ŠKODA Media Command).
ences on the function of the voice control. sensor field on the Infotainment twice (does not apply to Infotainment Co-
▶ You are recommended to speak louder at higher speeds, so that the sound of lumbus).
your voice is not drowned out by the increased ambient noise. › or: Issue the voice command “End voice control”.
▶ During voice control, limit additional noise in the vehicle, e.g. passengers talk-
ing at the same time.
WARNING
The emergency number should be dialled manually. Your voice commands
may not be recognized in such situations. The telephone connection may
not be established or the connection may take too much time to complete.
130 Infotainment
Operation principle Voice commands
Enter
Fig. 185 The voice command must only be issued when the symbol is displayed in
Example of screen display the Infotainment screen and the input tone has completely faded. The input
tone can be switched on / off. To do so, tap the sensor field and then the
function surface → Voice control.
It is not necessary to wait for the end of message playback when Infotainment
is playing a message. The Infotainment message can be acknowledged by tap-
ping the sensor field (does not apply to Infotainment Columbus) or press-
ing the button on the multifunction steering wheel. Then a voice command
In the voice control main menu » Fig. 184 on page 130 There are basic voice can be issued. The voice control is hereby much faster.
commands for the individual menus. Stop
Other voice commands are displayed by tapping the respective functional area This allows for more time for input of the voice command (e.g. in the list of
or issuing the name of the respective command (e.g. Navigation). The screen visited contacts).
shows the following » Fig. 185. The process for the voice command input can be stopped by moving a finger
Context-dependent: up/down across the screen or by turning the controller (not applicable to In-
A
fotainment Columbus).
▶
The system is waiting for a voice command When stopping, the symbol changes from .
▶
The system recognises a voice command Restore
The procedure for voice command input can be restarted in one of the follow-
▶
The system plays a message ing ways.
▶
Voice command entry was stopped ▶ By tapping on the function surface .
▶ By tapping the sensor field on the Infotainment (does not apply to Info-
B Available list entries
tainment Columbus).
C Possible voice commands ▶ By pressing the key on the multifunction steering wheel.
Display other possible voice commands
Not recognising a voice command
Voice commands that can be issued, are indicated in “quotation marks”.
If a voice command is not detected three times in succession by Infotainment,
Note then the voice control is stopped.
The display of the voice control symbols A » Fig. 185 are dependent of the Correction of a voice command input
equipment fitted also on the display of the instrument cluster. A voice command can be corrected, modified or re-entered by tapping the
sensor field (does not apply to Infotainment Columbus) or pressing the
button on the multifunction steering wheel. However, this is only possible
as long as the symbol appears on the screen.
You do not have to wait until the voice command is recognised by Infotain-
ment.
132 Infotainment
■ Sound focus -Setting the optimum room sound perception
Infotainment settings - Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero ■ All areas - Setting optimised for the whole vehicle interior
■ Driver - Optimised setting for the driver
Infotainment system settings ■ Touchscreen tone - Switch on/off audible tone when touching the screen
■ No navigation sound during call - Switching on / off the nav. announcements dur-
sound settings
ing a telephone conversation (does not apply to Infotainment Bolero)
› Tap the sensor field and then the function surface .
■ Volume - Volume settings Screen settings
Radio announcements - Volume adjustment of traffic announcements (TP)
■
■ Navigation announcements - Volume adjustment of navigation announcements
› Tap the sensor field and then the function surface → Screen.
(does not apply to infotainment Bolero) ■ Menu: - Setting the infotainment menu display
■ Voice control - volume setting for voice output Horizont. Display - Horizontal display » Fig. 182 on page 128
■
■ Maximum switch-on volume- - Setting the maximum volume when switching on Grid display - Grid display » Fig. 181 on page 128
■
■ Switch off screen (in 10 seconds) - Enable/disable the automatic power off func-
Infotainment
■ Speed-dependent Volume adjustment - Increases the volume as speed increases tion
■ Bluetooth audio: - Volume setting of the device connected via Bluetooth ® au- ■ Display clock when screen is off - Time and date display when the screen is
Unit settings
Safe removal of the external device
› Tap the sensor field and then the function surface → Units.
› Tap the sensor field and then the function surface → Remove safely: and
■ Distance: - Distance units select the external device to be removed.
■ Speed: - Speed units
■ Temperature: - Temperature units
Reset to factory settings
■ Volume: - Volume units
■ Fuel consumption: - Consumption units › Tap the sensor field and then the function surface → Factory settings.
■ Pressure: - Pressure units for tyre pressure
In this menu, all or only chosen settings can be restored.
Bluetooth®Settings
› Tap the sensor field and then the function surface → Bluetooth.
134 Infotainment
■ Bluetooth - Switch on/off Bluetooth® function Network settings
■ Visibility: - Switch the visibility of the Bluetooth® device for other Bluetooth®
devices on/off Applies to the infotainment Columbus with seated in the external module SIM
■ Name: - Change the name of the Bluetooth® unit card as well as for the Infotainment Amundsen with the connected Carstick-
■ Paired devices - Display the list of coupled Bluetooth ® devices Device.
■ Find devices - Searches for available Bluetooth® devices
■ Bluetooth audio (A2DP/AVRCP) - Turn on/off the ability to connect a Bluetooth®
› Tap the sensor field and then the function surface → Network.
audio device (e.g. MP3 player, tablet etc...) ■ Network settings - Sets the data connection from the associated telephone
service provider (APN settings)
Wireless settings ■ Access point name: ... - Access point name setting
■ User name: … - User name setting
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen. ■ Passkey: … - Password setting
› Tap the sensor field and then the function surface → WLAN. ■ Authentication: - Setting the verification type
■ Normal - Without verification
■ WLAN - List of available hotspots of external devices ■ Secure - Verification required
WLAN - Turn on / off Infotainment wireless
■ ■ Reset Access Point (APN) - Delete the parameters for the network setting
WPS Quick Connect (WPS button) - Establishing a secure connection to the hot-
■ ■ Store - Storage of the parameters for the network setting
spot of the external device using WPS (applies to Infotainment Amundsen) ■ Network provider: ... - Selection of the network provider (the menu item is visi-
■ Manual settings - Setting the parameters for search and connection to the
ble when the SIM card is inserted in the external module or CarStick device)
hotspot of the external device ■ Data roaming - Enable / disable the use of data roaming connection
■ Network name - Enter the Hotspot name ■ Current connection details - Display of information on data downloaded (by tap-
■ Network key - Setting the access password
ping the function surface Reset the data information is deleted)
■ Security level: - Security setting (WPA2 always set) ■ Data connection: Usage settings for the data connection (Internet connection)
■ Connect - Connection establishment
of the SIM card inserted in the external module or CarStick device
■ Find - Search / Restore the list of available hotspots ■ Off - Use of the data connection is not possible
■ Mobile hotspot - Setting Infotainment hotspot (in the functional surface the ■ Ask - Use of the data connection is only possible after it has been confirmed
symbol is is displayed in the function surface with the number of connec- ■ On - Use of the data connection is possible at any time
ted external devices)
■ Mobile hotspot - Turn on / off Infotainment hotspot
ŠKODA Connect Online Services settings
■ WPS quick connection (WPS button) - Establishing a secure connection to the In-
fotainment hotspot via WPS (applies to Amundsen) › Tap the sensor field and then the function surface → ŠKODA Connect
■ Hotspot (WLAN) settings - Setting the parameters for the connection to Info- (Online Services).
tainment hotspot
■ Security level: - Security setting (WPA2 always set)
■ Services Management - Information on licensing of the respective online serv-
■ Network key - Input of the access password
ices and the option to switch them on / off
■ registration - Enter the registration PIN code for online services (in the user
■ SSID: ... - Name of the infotainment hotspot
■ Do not send network name (SSID) -Turn Infotainment hotspot visibility on/off
profile on the website ŠKODA Connect Portal receive)
■ Store - Storage of Infotainment hotspot parameters
System information
› Tap the sensor field and then the function surface → System information.
136 Infotainment
L-band ■ Enter/change PIN for parental settings - Management of the PIN code for parental
For the DAB radio reception in different countries, different broadcasting control
ranges are used. In some countries the DAB radio reception is only possible in ■ Parental control: - Parental control settings
the so called L-band.
If no L-band DAB radio reception is possible in the country then we recom- Settings
mend turning off the L-band. The channel scan is therefore faster. › In the Telephone main menu, tap on the function surface .
Media menu settings ■ Hands-free - Switch a call to the telephone/back to Infotainment (the menu
item is displayed during a call)
› Tap on the function surface in the Media main . ■ Select mobile phone - Search for available telephones/list of paired tele-
phones/select telephone
■ Sound - sound settings
■ Bluetooth - Bluetooth® settings » page 134
■ Manage Jukebox - Administration (record / delete) supported files (audio / vid-
■ User profile - User profile settings
eo) in Infotainment internal memory (applies to Infotainment Columbus)
■ Manage favourites - Set the function surfaces for your favourite contacts
■ Mix/repeat including subfolders - Switching the title display including subfolders
■ Mailbox number: - Enter the mailbox phone number
■ Bluetooth - Settings for the Bluetooth® function
■ Network selection - Select the telephone service provider of the SIM card in-
■ WLAN - Wi-Fi settings (applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen)
■ Video (DVD) settings - Setting the parameters of the DVD video (applies to Info- serted in the external module (valid for Infotainment Columbus with the
SIM card slot in the external module)
tainment Columbus)
■ Priority assignment: - Select the phone service priority of the SIM card inser-
■ Remove safely: - Safe removal of the external device
■ Traffic programme (TP) - Switches traffic programme on/off ted in the external module (applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM
card slot in the external module)
■ Automatic - Depending on the telephone service provider
Image menu settings ■ Telephone call - telephone calls are preferred
› In the images main menu, tap on the function surface . ■ Data transfer - A data connection is preferred
■ Sort by: - Arrangement of telephone contact list
■ Image view: - Image view settings ■ Surname - Sort by contact name
Full - Display the maximum image size while retaining the aspect ratio
■ ■ 1st name - Sort by contact's first name
Automatic - Full screen display
■ ■ Profile name: - Rename the profile of the SIM card inserted in the external
■ Display time: - Set the display time for the slideshow
module (applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM card slot in the ex-
■ Repeat slideshow - Switching on/off the slideshow repeat
ternal module)
■ Import contacts: - Import telephone contacts
Video DVD menu settings ■ Select device contacts - Open the coupled Telephones menu (applies to Info-
Only valid for Infotainment Columbus. tainment Columbus with the SIM card slot in the external module - if the
SIM card is inserted in the external module)
› In the Video DVD main menu, tap on the function surface . ■ Select ring tone - Select the ring tone (depending on the connected phone)
■ Reminder: Remember your mobile - Turn on/off the warning mode before forget-
Depending on the DVD some of the following menu items are displayed.
ting the phone in the vehicle (if the phone was connected to the device)
■ Format: - Set the screen width/height ratio ■ Show pictures for contacts - Switch on/off the display of the image assigned to
■ Audio channel: - Select the audio channel the contact
■ Subtitles: - Subtitle selection ■ Conference call - Activates/deactivates conference calls
138 Infotainment
■ Activate data transfer for ŠKODA apps- Activate/deactivate data transfer for ■ Google Earth™ settings - Enable / disable display of special destinations in the
ŠKODA applications Google Earth™ map (applies to Columbus Infotainment when displaying the
■ MirrorLink® - Settings of the system MirrorLink® Google Earth™ map)
■ Allow MirrorLink® notification to be shown - Activate/deactivate the display of ■ Information on POIs - Enable / disable the display of information on POIs
Mirror link® application messages on the Infotainment screen ■ Information on businesses - Enable / disable the display of information on busi-
nesses
■ Wikipedia information - Turn on / off the display of the Wikipedia information
Navigation menu settings
■ Show favourites - Switch on/off the display of favourites
Route options ■ Show POIs - Switch on/off the display of POIs
■ Select categories for POIs - Selection of the displayed category for POIs
› In the Navigation main menu, tap the functional surface → Route options. ■ Show brand logos for POIs - Switch on/off the company logos available for the
■ Suggest 3 alternative routes - Switch on/off the menu for alternative routes (eco- POIs shown
■ Traffic flow settings - Setting the display of a traffic obstruction received from
nomical, fast, short)
■ Route: - Setting the preferred route online traffic
■ Display free-moving traffic - Enable / disable the display of routes with free-
■ Freq. Routes - Show/hide the menu of the most frequent routes in the split
screen moving transport
■ Dynamic route - Switch on/off dynamic route recalculation due to TMC traffic ■ Display congestion - Enable / disable the display of routes with heavy traffic
■ Display traffic events (symbols on map) - Activate/deactivate the display of
reports or online traffic reports
■ Avoid motorways - Switch on/off the non-use of motorways in the route cal- routes with a traffic incident
culation
■ Avoid ferries and motorail trains - Switch on/off the non-use of ferries and mo- Manage memory
torail trains in the route calculation
■ Avoid toll roads - Switch on/off use of toll roads for the route calculation
› In the Navigation main menu, tap the functional surface → Manage memory.
■ Avoid tunnels - Switch on/off use of tunnels for route calculation ■ Sort contacts: - Setting the configuration of the phone book
■ Avoid routes requiring toll stickers - Switch use of routes requiring toll stickers By surname - Sorting by the contact surname
■
on/off for route calculation By first name - Sorting by the contact first name
■
■ Show available toll stickers - Selection of countries for which a valid toll sticker is ■ Define home address - Enter the home address
required (routes requiring toll stickers are used for route calculation) ■ Delete My POIs - Deleting own POI categories (Personal POI)
■ Include trailer - Activate/deactivate the setting to include the trailer in route ■ Update "My POIs" (SD/USB) - Import / update your own POI categories (Personal
calculation » page 191 POI)
■ Retrieve "My POIs" (online) - Online import / update of the user profile on the
Map website ŠKODA Connect Portal started own POI categories
■ Import destinations (SD/USB) - Import destinations in vCard format
› In the Navigation main menu, tap the functional surface → Map. ■ Delete user data - Delete user data (by pressing the function surfaceDelete and
■ Show road signs - Switch on/off the display of traffic signs confirm the deletion)
■ Last destinations - Delete the last destinations
■ Lane guidance - Display of lane guidance on/off
■ Dest. memory - Delete the stored destinations
■ Online destinations - Delete the stored online dests
■ Routes - Delete saved routes
■ My points of interest (Personal POI) - Delete the custom POIs
› In the Navigation main menu, tap the functional surface → Speed limits. route and travel time are displayed (this also determines which destination
type is displayed on the map after selecting → )
The speed limits in the current country are displayed. ■ - Route destination
When this function is activated Note: National border crossed » page 140, Ad- ■ - Next stopover
vanced settings, display the country-specific speed limits when crossing inter- ■ Note: National border crossed - Switching the display of information on country-
national borders. specific speed limits when crossing a national border on/off
■ Demo mode - Switch on/off guidance in demo mode
Tank options ■ Define demo mode starting point - Specifying the start point of the route guidance
in the demo mode by entering the address or the current vehicle position
› In the Navigation main menu, tap the functional surface → Fuel options.
140 Infotainment
■ Summer (DST) - Switches summer time on/off
Infotainment settings - Swing ■ Automatic summer time - Switches the automatic switch to summer time on/off
■ Date: - Date settings
Infotainment system settings ■ Date format: - Sets the date format
Sound settings
Setting the Infotainment language
› Press the or button, then tap the function surface Sound.
› Press the button, then tap the function surface Language.
■ Volume - Volume settings
■ Maximum switch-on volume - Setting the maximum volume when switching on
› Select the Infotainment language.
Infotainment Additional keypad language settings
■ Announcements - Adjustment of traffic announcements volume (TP)
■ Speed-dependent volume adjustment - volume increases as speed increases › Press the button, then tap the function surface Additional keypad languages.
■ Entertainment fading (parking) - Lowers the audio volume (e.g. radio volume)
In this menu, a keyboard language set can be added to allow the entering of
with activated parking aid
■ Entertainment fad. (Navigation) - Lowers the audio volume (e.g. radio volume) in
characters other than those in the currently selected language.
the event of a navigation announcement
■ Bluetooth audio: - Volume setting of the device connected via Bluetooth ® au- Unit settings
dio profile
■ Balance - Fader - Sets the balance between left and right, front and rear
› Press the button, then tap the function surface Units.
■ Bass - Mid - Treble - Setting the equalizer ■ Distance: - Distance units
■ Touchscreen tone - Switch on/off audible tone when touching the screen ■ Speed: - Speed units
■ Temperature: - Temperature units
■ Volume: - Volume units
Screen settings
■ Fuel consumption: - Fuel consumption units
› Press the button, then tap the function surface Screen. ■ Pressure: - Pressure units for tyre pressure
■ Switch off screen (in 10 seconds) - Enable/disable the automatic power off func-
tion Setting data transfer
■ Display clock when screen is off - Time and date display when the screen is
Activated data transfer enables data transfer between the Infotainment and an
switched off external device.
■ Brightness: - Adjusts the brightness of the screen
■ Touchscreen tone - Switch on/off audible tone when touching the screen › Press the button and then tap on the function surface Activate data trans-
■ Show clock in standby mode - Time and date displayed on the screen when the fer for ŠKODA apps.
ignition is switched on and Infotainment is switched off
Safe removal of the data source
Time and date settings › Press the button, then tap the function surface Remove safely and select
› Press the button, then tap the function surface Time and date. the external device to be removed.
142 Infotainment
■ Sort channel list: - Sort types of radio stations in the station list Import contactsTelephone menu settings
■ Group - Sort by transmitted program type
■ Alphabetically - Alphabetical sorting according to station name › In the Telephone main menu, tap on the function surface .
■ Hands-free - Switch a call to the telephone/back to Infotainment (the menu
Advanced settings (DAB) item is displayed during a call)
› In the Radio main menu, select the DAB range and tap on the function sur- ■ Select mobile phone - Search for available telephones/list of paired tele-
CAUTION If the displayed station name continuously changes (dynamic text), then it is
■ For vehicles with window antennas do not stick foil or metal coated stickers possible to fix the current text by holding your finger on the device screen in
to the window - Radio signal reception could be affected. the station name area. By holding your finger in the area of the station name
■ Car parks, tunnels, tall buildings or mountains can interfere with the radio again, the station name is displayed in its entirety again.
signal even causing it to fail completely.
Search stations and select frequency
main menu Find stations
› Tap the Radio main menu function surface or .
Fig. 187
Depending on the setting → Arrow buttons:, an available station from the Sta-
Radio: Main Menu (DAB)
tion list or a station stored to the Preset buttons for the currently selected
radio frequency range is set.
Select frequency
› To display the value of the currently chosen frequency, tap the functional
surface in the Radio main menu .
› To Set the desired frequency value in Infotainment Swing, use the slider or
the function surfaces in the bottom area of the screen, if necessary, turn
› To display the main menu, press the sensor field/the button. the controller (not applicable to Infotainment Columbus)
› or tap the sensor field and then the function surface . Scan through the stations one after the other (scan)
Main menu » Fig. 187 The function scans through all the available stations in the current frequency
A The selected radio station (description or frequency) range in succession, for a few seconds each.
B Radio Text (FM) / Description of the group (DAB) › To start automatic scanning of the available stations, go to the main Radio
C Preset station buttons for favourite channels menu and tap on the function surface → Scan.
D Choice of radio range (FM / AM / DAB) › To end autoplay, tap the function .
E Choice of storage group for the preferred station
Changing the station
List of available stations
Manual / semi-automatic station search
144 Infotainment
List of available stations Symbol Meaning
The station reception is not secure (DAB) (applies to Infotain-
ment Amundsen, Bolero, Swing)
Station with image broadcasting (DAB) (does not apply to Info-
tainment Swing)
Refresh list
Depending on Infotainment, updating the station list takes place as follows:
Frequen-
Columbus Amundsen, Bolero Swing
cy
FM automatically automatically automatically
Fig. 188 Example, the list of available FM/DAB stations
AM automatically manually manually
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero DAB automatically manually manually
› To display the list of available stations of the currently selected broadcasting ▶ To
area, tap the function surface in the Radio main menu . manually update, the tap on functional surface » Fig. 188 .
› To play, tap on the function surface of the desired station. CAUTION
› To Sort (FM) the stations in alphabetical order, by group or genre, tap on the To sort the stations according to genre, the RDS and AF functions must be
function surface A » Fig. 188 » .
switched on. These functions can be set in theradio main menu in the FM band
Applies to Infotainment Swing by pressing the function surface → Advanced settings.
› To display the list of available stations of the currently selected broadcasting
area, tap the function surface in the Radio main menu . Preset buttons for your favourite channels
› To play, tap on the function surface of the desired station.
› To filter the stations based on the program type (e.g. Music, Sport etc.) in the In every broadcasting range, there are station buttons available to store pre-
FM station list (with activated RDS function) and the DAB station list (with ferred stations C That are split into groups E » Fig. 187 on page 144 or .
alphabetical sorting of the channel list selected), tap the function surface A › To save a station on the main menu Radio, hold down the desired function
» Fig. 188. surface C until an acoustic signal sounds.
Information symbols › To save a station in the station list, keep the function surface of the desired
station held down, select the memory group, and then tap the desired station
Symbol Meaning
button.
Radio station, which is stored on a preset button
Currently played stations Station logos - Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero
Traffic information station Station logos are stored in the Infotainment memory which are assigned auto-
(e.g.) Type of program being broadcast (FM) matically when storing the stations under preset buttons.
(e.g.) Type the regional broadcast (FM)
Assign station logo automatically
Station reception is not available (DAB) › to Disable / Enable in the radio main menu, tap on the function surface →
Advanced settings → Autostore station logos.
Radio 145
Assign station logo manually Note
› Tap the Radio main menu function → Station logos. ■ Should this station not transmit traffic reports or the signal is not available,
› Tap on an occupied station button and select the data carrier (SD card, USB). then Infotainment automatically searches in the background for another TP
› Search for and select the desired station logo on the respective data carrier. station.
■ During playback in menu Media or a station in the AM radio range, traffic
Remove station logo manually
› Tap the Radio main menu function → Station logos. news is received from the previously selected FM radio range.
› Tap on the station button from which you wish to remove a logo.
Note
■ The following image formats are supported: jpg, gif, png, bmp.
■ We recommend a resolution of up to 500x500 pixels.
146 Infotainment
Media Playback control - Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero
Media 147
Playback control - Swing Folder/track list » Fig. 190
A Selected audio source / audio source folder (movement within the folder
Operation Action is carried out by pressing the function surface for the folder)
Play / Pause Tap B Options folder/track playback
Tap within 3 seconds from the C Display of multimedia database (only available in the source directory) (not
Play the previous title applicable to the Infotainment Swing)
start of the track playback
Tap after 3 s from the start of the Select the audio source
Plays the current track from the start Folder
track playback
Fast-reverse within the title Press and hold Playlist
Fast-forward within the title Press and hold Currently playing title / track playback stopped
Play back the next title Tap The title cannot be played (tapping on the function surface shows the
cause).
Switch on/off the random playback
Tap
from the current album or folder Note
Switch on/off the repeat playback ■ In the list, the first 1000 entries (titles, directories etc.) are displayed with the
Tap
from the current album or folder oldest creation date.
Switch on/off repeat playback of spe- ■ The scanning speed of the folder / track list depends on the connection
Tap speed and volume of data.
cific track
Movement within the track is possible by touching your finger on the timeline Multimedia database
B » Fig. 189 on page 147.
Fig. 191
Folder / track list
Multimedia database
Fig. 190
Folder/Title list
› To display the multimedia database, in the Media main menu, tap on the
function surface (if this display is supported by the currently selected
source).
› To display the folder / track list on the Media main menu, tap on the function The audio files are sorted by their properties into individual categories B .
surface (if this display is supported by the currently selected source).
› To playback select a title. › To playback, select the category and then the title.
148 Infotainment
Multimedia database » Fig. 191 The CD/DVD» Fig. 192 slot is located in an external module in the glove box on
A Selected audio source / selected category / folder of the audio source the front passenger side.
B Sorting categories › Toinsert a CD/DVD, with the labelled side facing up, into the CD slot until it is
C Displays Folder / Track List (only available in the bibliography) automatically drawn in.
Select the audio source › To eject, press the button The CD/DVD is moved to the starting position.
If the ejected CD/DVD is not removed within 10 seconds, it is retracted again
Audio sources for safety reasons. However, the unit will not change to the CD/DVD source.
Note
■ After pressing the button it takes a few seconds for the CD / DVD to be
ejected.
■ On uneven or unpaved roads, playback jumps may occur.
Media 149
■ If the CD/DVD is physically damaged, is not readable or is inserted incorrect- CAUTION
ly the following message is displayed Error: CD/DVD. ■ Do not use an SD card with a broken write protection “slide” - there is a risk
■ It is possible that CD/DVDs protected by copyright cannot be played back at of damage to the SD card reader!
all or only in certain circumstances. ■ When using an SD card with an adapter, vehicle vibrations might cause the
card to fall out of the adapter.
SD card
USB input
Fig. 193
Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero: Installation location of the USB input and information regarding its use
insert SD card » page 91.
The USB input audio source can be connected directly or via a connecting ca-
ble.
› To connect, insert the USB audio source into the appropriate input.
› To disconnect the USB in the Media main menu, tap on the function surface
→ Tap on Remove safely.
› Disconnect the audio source from the corresponding USB input.
Fig. 194 Load USB audio source
Swing: insert SD card With the ignition, the charging process starts automatically after the USB au-
dio source is connected (applies to audio sources where charging via the USB
connector is possible).
The charging efficiency can differ compared to the charging from the usual
mains power supply.
Depending on the type of the connected external device and the frequency of
use, the charging current may not be sufficient to charge the battery of the
connected device.
Pushing in
› Insert the SD card in the slot in the direction of arrow (with the cut end fac- Some connected audio sources may not be recognised and cannot be charged.
ing right), until it “locks” » Fig. 193 or » Fig. 194.
CAUTION
Removing USB extension cords, or reducers may impair the function of the connected
› Before removing the SD card, go to the main Media menu and tap function audio source.
surface → Tap on Remove safely.
› Press on the inserted SD memory card. The SD card “jumps” into the eject Note
position. We recommend that you use extension cords from ŠKODA Original Accesso-
ries.
150 Infotainment
Bluetooth®player › Tap on the function surface → Delete.
Show level of infotainment memory
Infotainment allows audio files of a connected Bluetooth® player to play using
the A2DP and AVRCP audio profile. › Tap on the function surface in the Media main menu Manage jukebox.
It displays information about occupied and free space of the Infotainment
With Infotainment, multiple devices can be paired using Bluetooth® , but only
memory and the number of files that can still be imported.
one of them can be used as a Bluetooth®player.
Connect /disconnect Note
› To connect the Bluetooth® player with Infotainment- follow the same in- ■ Files that have already been copied are recognised and cannot be copied
structions as for pairing Infotainment with a telephone» page 160. again (shown in grey).
› To disconnect the Bluetooth®player, end the connection in the list of paired ■ It is not possible to copy files while simultaneously playing back audio/video
external devices » page 162. files in the CD/DVD drive.
Media 151
Supported audio sources and file formats - Columbus, Amundsen, Supported audio file formats
Bolero Maximum
Codec type Max bit Multi
File suffix sampling Playlists
(File formats) rate channelsa)
Supported audio sources rate
Source Interface Type Specification File system Windows Media
384 kbit /
Audio wma
Standard s
SD card SD reader SD, SDHC, SDXC 9 and 10
size
Defined by 96 kHz
USB stick; the format
HDD (without any spe- WAV wav no
(approx.
MSC cial software); 1.5 Mbit/s) m3u
USB devices support- FAT16 pls
USB 1.x; 2.x ing MSC mode MPEG-1; 2 and
FAT32 wpl
and 3.x or 2.5 mp3
USB Devices with the An- exFAT 320 kbit / m3u8
higher with Layer 3
devices droid operating system NTFS s asx
support of MTP aac; mp4;
or Windows mobile MPEG-2 and 4
USB 2.x m4a 48 kHz
(mobile phone, tablet)
Devices with the iOS Defined by yes
Apple operating system FLAC; the format
flac; ogg
(iPhone, iPod, iPad) OGG-Vorbis (approx.
5.5 Mbit/s)
Audio CD
a)
(Up to 80 Applies to the CANTON sound system.
CD/DVD min); The GPT standards (GUID partition table) method structured audio sources
ISO9660;
Applies to CD-R / RW are not supported by Infotainment.
CD/DVD Joliet (Level 1,2,3);
Infotain- (Up to 700 -
Drive UDF 1.x; Files that are protected by Digital Rights Management (DRM) technology can-
ment Co- MB);
UDF 2.x not be played back by Infotainment.
lumbus. DVD±R/RW;
DVD audio.
DVD Video
Blue-
Bluetooth logs A2DP
tooth®- - - -
and AVRCP (1.0-1.5)
Player
152 Infotainment
Supported audio sources and file formats - Swing Images
Supported audio sources Image viewer
Source Interface Type Specification File system main menu
Standard
SD card SD reader SD, SDHC, SDXC Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero.
size
USB stick;
Fig. 195
HDD (without any spe-
Images: main menu
MSC cial software);
USB devices supporting FAT16
USB 1.x; 2.x MSC mode VFAT
and 3.x or FAT32
USB Devices with the An-
higher with exFAT
devices droid operating system
support of MTP
or Windows mobile
USB 2.x
(mobile phone, tablet)
Devices with the iOS › To display the main menu, tap the sensor field and then tap the function
Apple operating system surface .
(iPhone, iPod, iPad)
Main menu » Fig. 195
Blue-
Bluetooth logs A2DP A Select the image source
tooth®- - - -
and AVRCP (1.0-1.5) Folder / Image List
Player
Display the previous image
Supported audio file formats
Switching on the slideshow
Maximum Switching off the slideshow
Codec type
File suffix Max bit rate sampling Playlists Display of the next image
(File formats)
rate
Menu settings for Images » page 137
Windows Media m3u Rotate the image 90° anticlockwise
wma 384 kbit / s 96 kHz
Audio 9 and 10 pls Rotate the image 90° clockwise
MPEG-1; 2 and 2.5 wpl
mp3 320 kbit / s 48 kHz Display the initial image size while retaining the aspect ratio
(Layer-3) asx
Guidance to GPS coordinates (Amundsen; the display only occurs if the
The GPT standards (GUID partition table) method structured audio sources image contains GPS coordinates) (applies to Infotainment Columbus,
are not supported by Infotainment. Amundsen) » page 187
Files that are protected by Digital Rights Management (DRM) technology can-
not be played back by Infotainment.
Images 153
Control viewed images Supported image file formats and sources
Operation Action Supported image sources
Finger motion across the screen to the left
Source Type Specification File system
Display of the next image (with initial representation)
SD card Standard size SD, SDHC, SDXC FAT16
Tap
USB stick; USB 1.x; 2.x and VFAT
Finger motion across the screen to the right FAT32
HDD (without 3.x or higher with
Display the previous image (with starting representation) USB devices exFAT
any special soft- support of USB
Tap ware) 2.x NTFS
Touch screen using two fingers and pull apart ISO9660;
Increase the image size Turning the knob to the right (not applica- CD / DVD (Applies CD-R / RW (Up Joliet (Level 1,2,3)
ble to Infotainment Columbus) to Infotainment Co- to 700 MB); ; -
Touch screen using two fingers and close to- lumbus) DVD±R/RW UDF 1.x;
gether UDF 2.x
Reduce the image size
Turning the knob to the left (not applica- Supported file formats
ble to Infotainment Columbus)
Codec type Max. resolution
Moving the image with an en- Drag your finger over the screen in the re- File suffix
(File formats) (Megapixels)
larged display quired direction
BMP bmp 4
Touch screen using two fingers and move
clockwise or counter clockwise (only availa- JP (E) G jpg; jpeg 4; 64
Rotate by 90 ° ble with start representation) GIF gif 4
Tap or PNG png 4
Maximum magnification of
Double finger tap on the screen Note
representation
■ The max. supported image size is 20 MB.
Double tap on the screen again ■ The GPT standards (GUID partition table) method structured image sources
Display the initial image size
while retaining the aspect ratio Pressing the knob (not applicable to Info- are not supported by Infotainment.
tainment Columbus)
CAUTION
Viewing images in the Infotainment screen is not supported by connected Ap-
ple devices.
154 Infotainment
Video DVD Operation Action
Tap after 3 s after the start of the
Play the current video from the start
video player playback
Fast rewind Press and hold a)
Main menu
Play the next video Tap
Only applies to Infotainment Columbus.
Fast forward Press and hold a)
Forward / rewind the video at the de- Tapping the playback timeline B
Fig. 196
sired time » Fig. 196 on page 155
Video DVD: main menu
a) The longer the function surface is held, the faster the fast forward/reverse.
DVD menu
Fig. 197
DVD menu
› To display the main menu, insert a CD / DVD in the corresponding slot in the
external module.
› or: In the main menu Media, select the video source, display the folder/track
list and start the video file.
Main menu » Fig. 196
A Select a video source
B Playback time axis
› to display the DVD menu in the Video DVD main menu, tap on the function
surface » Fig. 196 on page 155 .
C Information for the selected video file (e.g., video title, chapter)
Description of the DVD menu » Fig. 197
Display the video DVD menu
A Operating surface
Video DVD menu settings » page 137
B Example of the displayed menu
Note
Function surfaces on the operating surface
For safety reasons, the image display is switched off at speeds over 5 km/h.
Only the sound continues. The respective message appears on the screen. Symbol Operation
/ Move the operating surface left / right
Control playback / Show / hide full screen display of the control sur-
face
Operation Action
Close the control surface
Play / Pause Tap /
Movement in the EPG/teletext
Tap within 3 s from the start of the
Play the previous video
track playback
156 Infotainment
CAUTION Select source and control playback
■ If several devices are connected to the Infotainment system by means of
WLAN, there is the danger of WLAN overloading and thus also the inability of › To select the playback source, in the main menu, tap on the functional sur-
Media Command to function properly. face and select the source tablet.
■ High-definition video playback (e.g. HD) may cause playback problems or › To playback, select the category and then the title.
problems connecting the tablets to the Infotainment system. If two tablets are connected, the title playback starts in the two tablets at the
same time.
Main menu
Playback can be controlled via Infotainment or on each tablet, and are inde-
pendent from each other. This means there is an option to playback different
titles on the tablets at the same time.
Playback control
Operation Action
Play / pause Tap
Tap
Plays the current track from the start after 3 s from the start of the track
playback
Fig. 199 One tablet / two tablets Tap
Play the previous title within 3 seconds from the start of the
› To display the main Media Command menu, tap the sensor field and track playback
then tap the function surface . Play back the next title Tap
Main menu » Fig. 199 Movement within the track is possible by touching your finger on the timeline
A Information on playing track B » Fig. 199 on page 157.
B Playback timeline with a slider
Note
C Playback control
Some tablet types allow playback of audio files or videos by an inserted SD
D Image from the video being played back
card in the tablet. Playback of these tracks may be limited.
E Name of the tablet used/Switch to main menu of two tablets (when icon
displayed ) Supported file formats
Increase/decrease the tablet volume
F Display of main menu and operation of first tablet (symbol ) operating system Operating system
Type Format
G Display of main menu and operation of second tablet (symbol ) Android iOS
Selection of the playback source MPEG-4 Part 2
WLAN settings » page 135 MPEG-4 Part 10
Video
(H264)
XVID
Fig. 200
Telephone: Main menu
158 Infotainment
E Main telephone icon Telephone
▶ - a telephone connected via Bluetooth®
▶ - a SIM card with activated telephone services, inserted in the exter- Applies to Infotainment Swing.
nal module
F List of connected telephones, which are available as the source of tele- Fig. 201
phone contacts Telephone: Main menu
▶ - no telephone is connected for telephone contacts
▶ - a telephone is connected for telephone contacts
Change the main phone to the extension telephone
Enter the telephone number
List of contacts
Menu with text messages (SMS)
Call list The Telephone main menu appears when a telephone is connected to Infotain-
Settings for the Telephone menu » page 137 ment.
Symbols in the status bar › To display, press the button.
G Signal strength of the telephone network, data connection type if re- If another, menu id displayed which was open last, to display the Telephone
quired main menu, press the button again .
A telephone connected via Bluetooth® (applies to Infotainment Colum-
bus) Main menu » Fig. 201
A Name of the main telephone (tap to display the list of paired telephones)
Charge status of the telephone battery
B Preset station buttons for favourite contacts
Missed call
C Choice of storage group for the preferred contacts
Current call
D Name of the telephone service provider (with active roaming, the sym-
Incoming SMS
bol appears before the name )
ID of the telephone's wireless charging function » page 90 (applies to In-
Enter the telephone number
fotainment Columbus)
List of contacts » page 164
PIN code of the SIM card was not entered
Call list (missed calls, in addition to the function surface, the number of
calls when missed is displayed)
Starting voice control of the connected phone (e.g. Apple Siri, Google
Voice)
Settings for the Telephone menu » page 143
Symbols in the status bar
Signal strength of the telephone service network
Charge status of the telephone battery
Missed call
Current call
Telephone 159
Pairing and connecting The name of the Infotainment system can be checked in the Telephone main
menu if you tap on the function surface → Bluetooth in the name: menu item.
Introduction to the subject › Confirm the PIN code (enter and confirm if necessary).
To connect a telephone with Infotainment, the two devices must be paired via The phone is either connected to the Infotainment or just linked, depending on
Bluetooth®. the number of already connected external devices and on the use of the SIM
Depending on the Infotainment type, up to 20 external devices can be paired card inserted in the external module (applies to Infotainment Columbus)
with the device. After reaching the maximum number, the pairing of the next » page 161.
external device will replace that of the device that has not been used for the Pair Infotainment with the telephone
longest period of time. › If no telephone is connected to the Infotainment system, press the but-
Connection to an already paired telephone is established automatically after ton/sensor field and then tap the Find telephone function surface or press
the ignition is switched on. Or, it is sufficient to search for the phone in the list the sensor field, and then tap the function surface → Find mobile phone.
of paired devices. › If one telephone is connected to the infotainment system, then, in the Tele-
phone main menu, tap on the → Find mobile phone function surface.
The range of the connection to Infotainment is limited to the passenger com- › If a SIM card with activated telephone services is inserted in the external
partment. module of infotainment Columbus, then, in the Telephone main menu, tap on
Compatibility and update the → Find mobile phone function surface.
By reading the QR code » Fig. 170 on page 122 or after typing the following › Select the desired telephone from the list of visited external Bluetooth® devi-
address into the web browser, information about the compatibility of phones ces.
and updates are available for Infotainment Bluetooth ®can be displayed. › Confirm the PIN code (enter and confirm if necessary).
http://go.skoda.eu/compatibility WARNING
Do not pair and connect a telephone to the Infotainment system while driv-
Conditions for pairing ing the vehicle - there is risk of an accident!
The ignition is switched on.
The Bluetooth® function of Infotainment and the telephone is switched on. Connect phone using the rSAP profile
The visibility of Infotainment and the telephone is switched on. Applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM card slot in the external mod-
The telephone is within range of the Bluetooth® signal of Infotainment. ule.
The telephone is compatible with Infotainment. A phone that has been connected via the Bluetooth® rSAP profile (remote
There is no external device connected to Infotainment using Apple transfer of SIM data) can be used for phone and data services.
CarPlay.
Pair the phone with Infotainment
Pairing and connection process › Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
› In the Telephone main menu, switch on the → Business phone “interface”.
Pair the telephone with Infotainment › Switch on Bluetooth® visibility in the phone and allow the connection via the
› Search available Bluetooth® devices in your telephone. Bluetooth®rSAP profile.
› Select the name of the Infotainment system. › Search for a phone and connect to the device » page 160, Pair Infotainment
with the telephone.
160 Infotainment
If the Bluetooth ® rSAP profile is supported by the telephone to be connected, ▶ The SIM card is plugged into the external module.
then the infotainment system tries to connect to the phone using this profile ▶ An external device is connected to Infotainment using Apple CarPlay or
with priority. Android Auto.
Functional impairment Note
In the following cases, the phonecannot be connected to Infotainment via the Vehicle antennas are used to receive the mobile radio signal of the connected
Bluetooth® rSAP profile. phone.
Telephone 161
The first device (main telephone) The second device (additional telephone)
connec-
tion SIM card SIM card Third device Fourth device
variant Telephone (In the external mod- Telephone (In the external mod-
ule) ule)
HFP (Incoming / out-
going Incoming calls,
3. calls), text messages, - - text messages Bluetooth® playera) -
Telephone contacts, Data connection
Bluetooth® playera)
incoming / outgoing
HFP (incoming calls),
Calls, text messages, Phone contactsb),
4. - text messages - Bluetooth® playera)
Phone contactsb), Bluetooth® playera)
Bluetooth® playera)
Data connection
a) In every connection variant, there is only the option of connecting one external device to Infotainment as a Bluetooth ®player.
b) If telephone contacts from the third device are imported into Infotainment, it's not possible to use the telephone contacts of the SIM card inserted in the external module.
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero
The second device (additional tele- Symbol
The first device (main telephone) Symbol Operation
phone) colour
HFP (Incoming / outgoing calls), SMS, grey External device can be connected as telephone
HFP (incoming calls),
telephone contacts, Green External device is connected as telephone
Bluetooth® playera)
Bluetooth® playera)
External device can be connected as Bluetooth® play-
grey
a) Only an external device can be connected to Infotainment as a Bluetooth®player. er
Applies to Infotainment Swing White External device is connected as Bluetooth® player
The second device (additional tele- Applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM card inserted in the exter-
The first device (main telephone)
phone) nal module
HFP (Incoming / outgoing calls), Symbol
telephone contacts, Bluetooth® playera) Symbol Operation
colour
Bluetooth® playera)
An external device can be connected for using tele-
a) Only an external device can be connected to Infotainment as a Bluetooth®player. grey phone contacts and the text message function from
this external device
Managing paired external devices
An external device is connected and using of tele-
› In the Telephone main menu, tap on the function surface → Bluetooth → blue phone contacts and the text message function can be
Paired devices. carried out from this external device
In the list of paired external devices, the following symbols may appear for the
individual external devices.
162 Infotainment
Applies to Infotainment Swing Use the SIM card in the external module
Symbol
Symbol Operation Applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM card slot in the external mod-
colour
ule.
White External device can be connected as telephone
Green External device is connected as telephone
External device can be connected as Bluetooth® play-
White
er
Green External device is connected as Bluetooth® player
Connection set-up
▶ Select the desired external device from the list of paired external devices.
▶ Select the desired profile from the list of available Bluetooth® profiles - .
If external Bluetooth® devices are already connected to the device, then during
the connection process messages and options for the possible connection Fig. 202 Insert SIM card in the external module
type (e.g. replacement of the connected external Bluetooth® device) are dis-
A SIM card size “mini” (standard size 25x15 mm) must be used.
played.
The SIM card can be used for phone and data services.
Disconnection
▶ Select the desired external device from the list of paired external devices. The SIM card slot is located in an external module in the storage compartment
▶ Select the desired profile from the list of available Bluetooth® profiles - . on the front passenger side » Fig. 202.
Delete the paired external device Switching SIM card use on / off in the external module
▶ To delete, tap on one of the following function surfaces. › In the Telephone main menu, switch on the → Business phone “interface”.
Delete all or All areas - Delete all external devices Insert SIM card
- Delete the desired external device › Insert the SIM card into the appropriate slot » Fig. 202 With the beveled
corner on the left and the contacts facing downwards until it “locks”.
▶ Confirm the deletion by tapping on the function surface Delete.
Using the SIM card for the first time
When using the SIM card in the external module, select the use type.
Calls too - enabling data and telephone services.
Only data connections - enabling of data services only.
Set the network parameters for Internet connection if required » page 170.
By using the SIM card for phone services, the connection to the connected
phones is terminated.
Enter the PIN code and save
› If the SIM card is protected by a PIN code, then the PIN code of the SIM card
must be entered.
Telephone 163
› Confirm the entered PIN code by tapping . For example, if you enter 32, the unit will display contacts with the letter se-
› or: the function surface to save and confirm the PIN code. quence DA, FA, EB, etc. next to the numerical keypad.
Change PIN code Voicemail box (does not apply to the infotainment Swing)
› The PIN code can be changed in the Telephone main menu, in the → PIN ▶ To select the voice mailbox number, tap the functional surface .
setup → Change PIN menu item
If the voicemail number or was not imported or entered, then this can be en-
Changing SIM card usage tered or changed as follows.
› In the Telephone main menu, tap on the function surface → Use SIM card only ▶ Inthe Telephone main menu, tap the function surface → User profile → Mail-
for data connection function surface. box number:.
▶ Enter the number of your voice mailbox.
Remove SIM card
› Press the inserted SIM card and remove it.
List of telephone contacts
CAUTION
■ When inserting an incorrectly sized SIM card, there is a risk of damage to the
external module.
■ Avoid using an adapter for the SIM card as the SIM card may fall out while
driving due to vehicle vibrations - There is the risk of damage to the external
module.
Telephone functions
164 Infotainment
Display the contact details Management of preferred contacts (favourites)
C Select the telephone number in the contact details
Processing the telephone number of the contact before dialling Fig. 204
Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero: Favourite contacts
The contact name can be read out by a Infotainment's generated voice
Opens the menu for sending a text message (SMS)
Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen:
Start the route guidance to the contact address
Import list
After the primary telephone and/or the SIM card (applies to Infotainment Co-
Assigning favourites
lumbus) connects to the infotainment system for the first time, the import of
the telephone contacts to the infotainment memory starts. The import can
› In the main menu Telephone, tap on the desired function surface
A » Fig. 204.
take several minutes.
› Select the desired contact (if necessary one of the contact numbers).
In the infotainment phonebook, there are 4000 (applies to Infotainment Co-
Connecting to a favourite
lumbus) and 2000 (applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero, Swing) free
The functional surfaces of preferred contacts allow for an immediate dial of
storage locations for imported telephone contacts. Each contact can contain
the contact telephone number.
up to 5 telephone numbers.
The favourites are available in two storage groups.
The number of imported contacts can be determined in the menu item →
User profile → Import contacts: or. Import contacts being determined. › To the change Storage Group tap on the functional surface B » Fig. 204.
If an error occurs during the import, an appropriate message appears on the › To choose tap on the assigned function area A » Fig. 204.
screen. Change allocated favourites
Refresh list › In the main Telephone menu, press and hold the desired function surface A
» Fig. 204.
When the telephone reconnects with Infotainment, the list is automatically up-
dated. › Select the desired contact (if necessary one of the contact numbers).
The update can be performed manually as follows. Delete a favourite
▶ In
› In the Telephone main menu, tap on function surface → User profile → Manage
the Telephone main menu, tap on the function surface, → User profile → favourites.
Import contacts: or tap on Import contacts › Press the desired function surface of the preferred contact and confirm the
deletion.
You can delete all contacts by tapping on the function surface Delete all / All
areas and confirming the delete process.
Telephone 165
Function surface for emergency call Edit the telephone number before dialling (not applicable to Infotainment
If the vehicle is not equipped with the buttons for the Care Connect service Swing)
» page 16, the position of the last function surface in the first group of favour- Display the contact details » Fig. 205
ites will show the function surface for an emergency call . In some ▶ C - Dial the contact number
countries, this function may not be available.
The function surface can be assigned a different number for the preferred Phone call
contact.
Depending on the conversation context, the following functions can be execu-
To restore the emergency number, it is necessary to remove the telephone ted.
from the list of paired external devices » page 162 and then to pair and con-
End dialling / reject incoming call / end call
nect again.
Accept incoming call / return to held call
Call list Switch on/off ringer
Hold a call
Switch off/on microphone
Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero:
Set up a conference call
Show caller details (if the contact is stored in the list)
Switch on/off hands-free (call to the telephone / switch to Infotainment)
▶ To switch off the hands-free system, in the Telephone main menu, tap on the
function surface → Hands-free during a call.
▶ To switch off the hands-free system, tap on the function surface during a
Fig. 205 Call history / Contact details call.
› In the Telephone main menu, tap on the function surface and a call list will Conference
be displayed » Fig. 205.
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero.
The call list can also be displayed during a telephone call.
The conference call is a shared call with between three and six participants.
Function surfaces
A Setting the display depending on the type of call Start a conference call/invite additional participants
▶ All areas - List of all calls › During a call/conference, make the next call.
▶ Missed calls/Missed calls - List of missed calls › or: Take the new incoming call by tapping the function surface .
▶ Dialled numbers - List of dialled numbers › To initiate conference call or. return to the conference call, tap on the
▶ Received calls / Received calls - list of received calls function surface .
B Dial the contact number/telephone number Ongoing conference call
Symbols of the call type During an ongoing conference call, the call duration is displayed on the screen.
▶ - Answered call Depending on the context, the following functions can be selected.
▶ - Outgoing call
▶ - Missed call
166 Infotainment
Hold a conference call - Leave the conference temporarily (the confer- A Opening a list of templates for quick answers
ence continues in your absence) New text message - Creating and sending the message
Return to the held conference call Inbox- Open a list of received messages
Switch off/on microphone Sent - Open a list of sent messages
End conference call Outbox - Open a list of messages not sent
Conference call details Drafts- Open a list of drafts (messages in progress)
Conference details Deleted- Open a list of deleted messages
▶ During the ongoing conference call, tap on the function surface . Send contact details - Send contact details (business card) (applies to Info-
tainment Columbus)
A list of other conference participants is displayed. The following functions
can be selected depending on the type of telephone. Select source of text messages (applies to Infotainment Columbus)
View details of participant Display for the selection of the source of text messages (this applies to the
Talk to a participant separately from the conference call Infotainment Columbus with the SIM card slot in the external module)
If a SIM card used only for data services is located in the external module and if
End the call to a conference participant
a phone that supports the Bluetooth® profile MAP is connected to Infotain-
ment, then it is possible to adjust the source from which a text message menu
Text messages (SMS) will be displayed after tapping on the function surface in the main Telephone
menu.
Main menu
▶ In the Telephone main menu, tap on the function surfaces → Text message
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero. settings → Standard account.
▶ Select the desired menu item.
Fig. 206
Main menu text messages New text message
Creating and sending the message
› In the main menu of the text messages, tap on the function surface
» Fig. 206 on page 167.
› Write a text message and confirm. A view of the text message is displayed.
› Tap the function surface .
› Select the recipient of the message from the displayed contact list or tap on
› In the Telephone main menu, tap on the function surface and the main the and enter the telephone number.
menu for text messages will be displayed » Fig. 206. › To add additional recipients, tap on the function surface .
› If required, select whether the SIM card inserted in the external module or › To send the text message, tap the function surface .
the telephone (applies to Infotainment Columbus) is to be used as the source Viewing the text message
of the text messages. After opening the view message function, the following functions can be exe-
Depending on your type of connected telephone, you can perform the follow- cuted.
ing functions. The text can be read out by Infotainment's generated voice
The text can be stored as a draft
Telephone 167
Open a list of templates with the open to replace the recorded text with The text can be read out by Infotainment's generated voice
the selected template Display a menu with additional options
Open the contact list ▶ Reply with template - Reply using a template
▶ Delete current text message - Distance of displayed text message (applies to
The message can be edited, as long as the text range is within the entered
Infotainment Columbus, when the SIM card is inserted in the external
view.
module or the telephone is connected via the Bluetooth®-profile rSAP)
Contact list ▶ Display numbers - Recognition of telephone numbers in the message in-
After the list has been opened the following functions can be executed. cluding the contact number (recognised numbers can be dialled directly
Insert a contact in the recipient list or edited before dialling, or may be sent to this message)
Enter the telephone number Forwarding a message with the option to edit the message before sending
Return to view the message Reply to the sender via a message
Tap on the Find function surface to open a list of available telephone contacts.
After selecting the contact number or entering the telephone number, the re-
cipient list will be displayed in the screen.
Recipient list
The following functions can be executed by tapping on one of the functional
surfaces.
Display contact list with the option of adding/removing additional re-
cipients (tap on the function surface to return to the recipient list )
Removal of the contact from the recipient list
Sending the message
Return to view the message
168 Infotainment
Data connection Connecting Infotainment Amundsen
Internet connection
Infotainment Columbus
170 Infotainment
Setting the Infotainment hotspot › If the Infotainment WLAN is not activated, activate it in the menu item →
→ WLAN → WLAN → WLAN.
The Infotainment hotspot is factory set.
In area A » Fig. 209, a list of available or previously connected hotspots is dis-
The setting can be changed in menu item → → WLAN → Mobile hotspot → played.
Hotspot (WLAN) settings.
The hotspot list can be updated by tapping the function surface B .
Security level: - Type of access protection (always set to WPA2)
■
■ Network key - Access password
› Select the hotspot and enter the password.
■ SSID: ... - Hotspot name If the hotspot is not visible, you can establish the connection to it manually.
■ Do not send network name (SSID) - Switch the visibility of the hotspot on/off
› Tap the function surface Manual settings.
▶ To save the configured parameters, tap the Store function surface. › Set the required hotspot parameters.
› Tap the function surface Connect.
Connecting an external device to the Infotainment hotspot Icons and function surfaces in the list of available hotspots A » Fig. 209
› Switch-on the ignition. Connected hotspot
› Switch on WLAN in the external device and search for the infotainment hot- Signal strength of the connected hotspot
spot. Delete the hotspot
› Select the Infotainment hotspot and enter the required password. Hotspot connection recommendations
› Confirm the connection. ▶ Only leave the hotspot to be connected switched on, switch off the other
Note hotspot.
The name of the Infotainment hotspot (SSID) and the access password can be ▶ On some hotspots, the connection setup takes longer, wait for the end of
found in menu item → → WLAN → Mobile hotspot → Hotspot (WLAN) settings. the connection setup.
▶ If the connection is interrupted, search for available hotspots again and re-
Connect Infotainment to the hotspot of the external device peat connection setup.
▶ Delete unused hotspots. This shortens the time required for connection set-
up.
Fig. 209
Main menu of the Infotainment Note
WLAN ■ It is not possible to connect Infotainment Columbus to the hotspot of the ex-
ternal device as long as a SIM card with enabled data services is in the external
module of Infotainment or a phone connected to Infotainment via the Blue-
tooth®rSAP profile.
■ An Infotainment Amundsen connection with external device hotspot is not
possible, as long as there is an active connection using the Carstickdevice.
The Infotainment system can only be connected to a hotspot with WPA2 Connect via WPS
access protection.
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen.
› Switch-on the ignition.
It is not necessary to enter the access password when connecting via WPS.
Using the applications in the connected external device it is possible to use the
navigation to make a call, to listen to music.
For reasons of safety, the operation of some applications while driving is not
possible or only limited.
Read in the QR code» Fig. 210orenter the following address in the web brows-
er to open the website with information on the SmartLink communication sys-
tem.
http://go.skoda.eu/connectivity-smartlink
Depending on the model of the connected external device, some applications
can be operated via the Infotainment system, using your voice or using the
buttons on the multi-function steering wheel.
To activate voice control for the connected external device, hold down or
or hold down the button on the multifunction steering wheel.
172 Infotainment
CAUTION Connection set-up / disconnection
To establish the connection, it is necessary for the date and time in Infotain-
ment to be set correctly. If the date and time setting is based on the GPS sig- Connection set-up
nal, then problems may arise with establishing a connection with a poor GPS › Switch-on the ignition.
signal reception. › Switch on the Infotainment system.
› Switch on the external device.
Note › For connection via Apple CarPlay, switch on the data connection and the
■ We recommend that you use extension cords from ŠKODA Original Acces- voice control (Siri) in the external device to be connected.
sories. › Connect the external device to the USB input using a cable » page 91.
■ With some connected external devices, it is necessary for the connected ex- › Select the type of supported communication system B » Fig. 211 on
ternal device to be “unlocked” for trouble-free functioning of the SmartLink page 173.
function. Disconnection of the active connection
Main menu
› In the main SmartLink menu, tap on function surface .
› Or: disconnect the cable from the USB input (the external device will be con-
nected automatically when reconnected).
Note
Some applications require the data connection in the connected external de-
vice to be switched on.
Android Auto
SmartLink 173
If route guidance is taking place at this moment in Infotainment, then there By connecting the external device with Apple CarPlay, all currently connected
is the option to start the route guidance in the Android Auto application. And Bluetooth® devices will be disconnected.
vice versa, if route guidance is currently taking place in the Android Auto ap-
For the duration of the connection, no Bluetooth devices can be connected to
plication, then there is the possibility that this will be terminated by the start
the infotainment system. The SIM card inserted in the external module can on-
of route guidance by the Infotainment system.
ly be used for data services.
A list external of devices, supported regions and applications that the Android
For the duration of the connection, the external device cannot be used as an
Auto connection supports can be found on the websites of Google Inc..
audio source in the Media menu.
main menu Some phone features of the connected external device can be operated in the
display of the instrument cluster » page 52.
Fig. 212 If route guidance is taking place at this moment using Infotainment, then this
Android Auto: main menu is terminated by starting the route guidance in the Apple CarPlay application.
And vice versa, if route guidance is currently taking place in the Apple
CarPlay application, then this will be terminated by the start of route guidance
by the Infotainment system.
A list external of devices, supported regions and applications that the Apple
CarPlay connection supports can be found on the websites of Apple Inc..
main menu
Main menu » Fig. 212
Navigation applications
Fig. 213
Telephone applications Apple CarPlay: main menu
Overview regarding current applications, telephone calls, accepted text
messages, tasks in the working directory, weather or similar.
Music applications
Display of other available applications as well as the option of returning to
the SmartLink main menu
Switching on voice control (Google Voice)
The symbol appears next to the function surface in the area A appears and Main menu » Fig. 213
then, after tapping on this function surface again, a list of new applications is
A List of available applications
displayed.
B More pages with applications
Depending on how long the function surface is pressed:
Apple CarPlay ▶ Tap - Return to main menu Apple Carplay
▶ Hold - Switch on voice control (Siri)
Introduction to the subject
A connection can only be established to an external device that supports the
Apple CarPlay communication system.
174 Infotainment
MirrorLink® Display of the function surfaces during the running application
Return to MirrorLink® main menu
Introduction to the subject Show function surfaces at the top/bottom (applies to Infotainment
Amundsen, Bolero)
A connection can only be established to an external device that supports the
MirrorLink® communication system. Move the functional surfaces in the desired corner of the screen
(applies to the infotainment Swing)
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero: if you would like to
connect the device in the phone menu, the external device must be paired and To show/hide the function surfaces, press the controller (applies to Infotain-
connected before establishing a connection » page 160. ment Amundsen, Bolero).
Applies to Infotainment Swing: by connecting the external device, all currently function problems
connected Bluetooth®devices and the external device are automatically con-
nected as the main phone. Depending on the device to be connected, a con- If problems occur with the MirrorLink ®connection, then one of the following
nection confirmation may be required. messages may occur on the screen.
For the duration of the connection, the external device cannot be used as an ■ Fault: Transfer - Disconnect and reconnect the external device
audio source in the Media menu. ■ MirrorLink® audio is unavailable. - Disconnect and reconnect the external device
■ MirrorLink® availability on this mobile device is restricted. - it is not possible to use the
main menu connected device during the journey or the device only has limited availabili-
ty (applies to Infotainment swing)
■ The mobile device is locked. Please unlock the mobile device to use MirrorLink® - “unlock”
Fig. 214
MirrorLink®: Main menu the connected external device
■ Unable to start app or app not working. - Disconnect and reconnect the external
device
ApplicationŠKODA OneApp
Introductory information
SmartLink 175
The ŠKODA OneApp application is available in the App Store and Google Play A possible connection between the mobile telephone and the Infotainment
online shops. system via WLAN will be terminated after a connection is established using
SmartLink.
Scan the QR code » Fig. 215 or enter the following address in your web brows-
er to open the website with information on the ŠKODA OneApp application. Connection via WLAN (applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen)
http://go.skoda.eu/infotainment › Switch on the ignition.
› Establish the WLAN connection » page 170.
For the full functionality of the ŠKODA One App application, data transfer › In the mobile telephone, start the ŠKODA OneApp application.
from external devices must be activated.
Disconnection
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero The connection can be switched off in one of the following ways.
▶ To activate data transfer from external devices, tap the sensor field
and then tap on function surface → → Mobile device data transfer → Activate data › Switch off the ignition for longer than 5 seconds (for vehicles with a starter
transfer for ŠKODA Apps. button, switch off the engine and open the driver's door).
› End the connection in the ŠKODA OneApp application.
Applies to Infotainment Swing
▶ To activate
› Disconnect the mobile telephone from the USB port or terminate the WLAN
data from external devices, press the button, then tap on connection.
function surface → Activate data transfer for ŠKODA apps.
Note
Some functions of the application are not available in all countries or there is a
function restriction during the journey » page 122, Mobile devices and applica-
tions.
Connecting to Infotainment
The mobile telephone can be connected to the infotainment system using the
SmartLink function or via WLAN.
Connection by SmartLink
› Switch on the ignition.
› The connection means SmartLink (e.g.. MirrorLink®) build up » page 172,
› In the list of available applications, select the ŠKODA One App application.
Depending on the model of the connected external device, some applications
can be started using voice activation, via the Infotainment screen, using the
operating elements on Infotainment, or using the buttons on the multi-func-
tion steering wheel.
Once connected, the contents of the application in the infotainment screen
may be displayed.
176 Infotainment
Navigation Navigation data
Columbus navigation data source
Introductory information
The navigation data is stored in the internal Infotainment memory.
Navigation - function sequence Amundsen navigation data source
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen. The navigation data is stored on an Original SD card.
In order to ensure the function of the navigation, the Original SD card, with the
Route guidance is started as follows.
navigation data, must be inserted in the respective slot in the external module
› Search for/ enter a new destination or Select one of the stored destinations. » page 124.
› Confirm the route calculation in the destination details or if necessary, adjust If the original SD card should be damaged or lost, a new original SD card can
the route options.
be purchased from the ŠKODA Original Accessories.
› Select the preferred route type, if this is requested by Infotainment.
With a non-original SD Card, the navigation does not work.
A route calculation occurs and route guidance starts.
Finding out the version of the navigation data
The route guidance is provided by graphical nav. announcements.
› In the Navigation main menu, tap on the functional surface → Version infor-
There is an option to add additional destinations during route guidance, or to mation.
adapt the route.
Update navigation data
If a traffic radio station is available, information concerning traffic delays is We recommend that you update the navigation data on a regular basis (e.g.
evaluated by Infotainment and, if necessary, an alternative route is offered. Due to newly developed roads and changed traffic signs).
If you deviate from the route, then a new route calculation is carried out. The information on updating the navigation data is to be obtained from a
ŠKODA partner or on the following ŠKODA Internet pages.
GPS satellite signal
http://go.skoda.eu/updateportal
Infotainment uses the GPS (Global Positioning System) satellite signal for
Update navigation data online
route guidance.
When activated online services infotainment online » page 14 can the naviga-
Outside the range of the GPS satellite signal (e.g. in dense vegetation, in tun- tion data for the infotainment Columbus Updating online » page 178, Naviga-
nels, parking garages, etc.), Infotainment navigates only with restrictions using tion data and POI categories Import / Update online,
vehicle sensors.
If an update of the navigation data for the current vehicle position or the desti-
The unit offers the possibility to show in the split screen display the following nation of the route is available, which in this regard from a Infotainment auto-
Position » Fig. 218 on page 179 information about the current geographical posi- matic Note issued and offered an upgrade option.
tion of the vehicle and the satellite signal.
An online update of navigation data is also manually feasible as follows.
Geographical longitude ▶ Inthe Navigation main menu, tap the functional surface → Version information
Geographical latitude → → Update (online) → Maps.
Elevation ▶ The Select / the desired country / region.
Number of received/available satellites ▶ Tap on the function surface Retrieve.
If no GPS satellite signal is available, no values are displayed. During the upgrade process, infotainment is usable without limitation.
Navigation 177
To complete the update of the navigation data, the ignition must be switched › To display, tap the sensor field .
off for at least 30 min. › or: Tap the sensor field and then the function surface .
Description of the function surfaces A » Fig. 216
Navigation data and POI categories Import / Update online
Context-dependent:
When Infotainment Online » page 14 online services are activated, there is the Route guidance is disabled - Search / enter a new destination
option of downloading/updating navigation data (applies to Infotainment Co- Route guidance is enabled - The following menu is displayed:
lumbus) or of downloading POI categories created in the user profile on the ▶ Route details - Displays the route details » page 192
ŠKODA Connect Portal website. ▶ Change route in map - Displays a menu for the route change in the map
Main menu
Fig. 216
Navigation: Main menu
178 Infotainment
Map additional window
The following information and function surfaces can be displayed in the › To switch on/offin the main menu Navigation, tap on the function surface
map. » Fig. 217 → Split screen.
A Vehicle position › To select content of the additional window A » Fig. 218 tap the function
B Route surface and select one of the following menus, depending on the context.
C Function surfaces for card use » page 187 ■ Audio - Operation of Radio/Mediaplayback
D Functional surface of the POI ■ Compass - Displays the current vehicle location in relation to the compass di-
E Functional surface for the POI list rections
■ Freq. Routes - Display the three most frequently travelled routes (if route guid-
F Function surface for displaying a traffic incident » page 198
ance is disabled) » page 192
G Information on the maximum permitted speed
■ Manoeuvre - Displays graphical driving recommendations (if route guidance is
Destination position enabled) » page 191
Intermediate destination position ■ Position - Displays the geographical coordinates of the current vehicle loca-
Destination position Home address tion
Favourite position ■ Map - Displays the preview map (applies to Infotainment Columbus)
» page 189
Information in the status line
Street name / street number of the current vehicle position
Google Earth™ online map
Distance to destination
Route to the stopover Only valid for Infotainment Columbus.
Estimated travelling time to the destination
Fig. 219
Estimated travel time to the stopover
Google Earth™ map
Estimated time of arrival at destination / stopover
Navigation 179
In the Google Earth™ map, the map is represented based on the images down- Function surfaces » Fig. 220
loaded from the Internet. A Search for a destination or POI (point of interest) by name » page 180
› To display, tap the function surface F » page 187, Options for map display B Destination entry by address » page 181
C Online POI search » page 180
The map and symbol display in the Google Earth™ map is dependent on the
provider, American company Google, Inc. D Search for a point along the route (only works with active route guidance)
» page 180
To display the Google Earth™ map, the following conditions are required. E Destination input via the map point or using the GPS coordinates
The Infotainment Online online services are activated » page 14. » page 182
Internet connection » page 169.
The signal from the data service provider network for the data connection Search POI destination /
is available.
Fig. 221
Note Menu for the destination search
■ In the Google Earth™Display is possible no insertion of the symbols of the
POI categories.
■ When driving through a tunnel changes the 3D representation of the Google
Earth™Card automatically in the 2D display.
■ The speed of the Google Earth™ display depends on the Internet connection
speed.
Fig. 220
Selecting the type of destina-
tion search/destination entry
The feature allows a full text search of locations or points of interest (POI) by
› Route guidance is disabled - From the navigation main menu, the function entering keywords.
surface → .
Show menu
› Route guidance is enabled - From the main Navigation menu, tap the func- › Route guidance is disabled - From the navigation main menu, the function
tion surface → Enter destination → .
surface → .
180 Infotainment
› Route guidance is enabled - From the main Navigation menu, tap the func- Enter destination using the address
tion surface → Tap Enter destination
› Then tap the function surface of one of the menu items for the destination
search A , C or D » Fig. 220 on page 180.
Function surfaces » Fig. 221 and » Fig. 222
A Input line
B Depending on the search mode, the following symbols are displayed
- Display the map as well as the list of the destinations listed in the navi-
gation database
- Display the map as well as the list of online destinations
C - Select the destination search/destination entry » page 180
Fig. 223 Enter destination using the address: Main menu/list of places
D List of last destinations (if no character is entered) / List of visited destina-
found
tions
E Keypad Show menu
F Status of online services › Route guidance is disabled - From the navigation main menu, the function
surface .
Find destination
▶ Enter the POI name or the POI category (POI) and, if required, the place and › Route guidance is enabled - From the main Navigation menu, tap the func-
tion surface → Tap Enter destination
street name or house number/postal code.
› Then tap the function surface → B » page 180.
A list of the destinations found is displayed in area D » Fig. 221.
Enter destination
▶ Select the desired destination and the destination details will be displayed. › Enter the destination address and then confirm » Fig. 223 - .
▶ Or: tap function surface B » Fig. 221.
› Tap the function surface to see the destination details.
A map with the following symbols and a list of the destinations found is dis- Relevant names (e.g. Place/street names) are offered in the entry line during
played. entry, depending on the context. The location of the proposed destination can
Destinations found in the navigation data » Fig. 222 - . be displayed by tapping the function surface Map.
Destinations found online » Fig. 222 - . Depending on the number of places visited, a map with a list of visited places
▶ Select the desired destination and the destination details will be displayed. can be displayed automatically » Fig. 223 - .
The map with the list of visited locations can be accessed manually by tapping
the function surface .
Navigation 181
Entering a destination via the map point and using GPS coordinates Entering a destination via the map point
Fig. 225
Menu after tapping the map
point
Fig. 224 Enter destination: via the map point/using GPS coordinates Tap on the map to display the symbol and a menu with the following menu
items (depending on the context) » Fig. 225.
Show menu
Display the destination details » page 190
› Route guidance is disabled - From the navigation main menu, the function A
surface . B Display the POI details/display the POI list (function surface) )
› Route guidance is enabled - From the main Navigation menu, tap the func- Start route guidance to the selected point
tion surface → Tap Enter destination Paste the selected point as the next destination in the current route
› Then tap the function surface → E » Fig. 220 on page 180. guidance
Enter destination via map point Start route guidance to the favourite
› By sliding the screen move the desired destination into the cross-hair Start route guidance to the home address
» Fig. 224 - . Destination search in the vicinity of the selected point » page 180
› Tap the function surface to see the destination details. C Define the starting point for demo mode (if it is turned on) » page 191
Enter destination through GPS coordinates
› Tap in the values of the GPS coordinates one at a time and adjust » Fig. 224 - Find petrol station, restaurant or car park
,
› Tap the function surface to see the destination details.
If information is available about the point entered in the navigation data, then
these will be displayed instead of the GPS coordinates (e.g. address A
» Fig. 224).
182 Infotainment
Note
With function activated → Fuel options → Select preferred fuel station function ac-
tivated, the preferred fuel stations are displayed in the first three positions
during the fuel station search.
Saved destinations
Last destinations
List of last destinations
Fig. 227 List of car parks found: in the navigation data/online › In the Navigation main menu, tap on the function surface → Last destinations.
The Infotainment allows you to find petrol stations, restaurants or car parks Details of the last destination (not applicable to Infotainment Columbus)
quickly in the navigation data as well as online. › In the main Navigation menu, tap the sensor field.
If route guide is disabled, then the details of the last destination are displayed
› In the Navigation main menu, tap the functional surface . to where the route guidance was carried out. If route guidance is enabled,
› The function surface of the desired category button. Then the details of the final destinations are displayed.
› or: Tap the sensor field and then the function surface → or .
Search destination in the navigation data Last destinations menu for destination / POI search
Depending on the context below a list be examined POIs in the selected cate- In the menu for finding destinations in D » page 180, a short list of the most
gory is displayed. recent destinations is displayed.
▶ There is no route guidance - The nearest destinations in a radius of 200 km Function surfaces in the list of last destinations
from the current vehicle position are displayed. Search - Destination search by name (the function surface is displayed with
▶ There is a route guidance - Destinations on the route or near the route are more than 5 entries available)
displayed. - Display the details of the selected destination » page 190
Find Target online
target memory
When Infotainment Online » page 14 services are activated, a list of POIs from
the selected category in a radius around the current vehicle position is dis-
played, regardless of whether or not route guidance is taking place.
After performing destination search, it is possible to switch between the list of
visited in the navigation data or online goals by one of the following functional
areas on the position A » Fig. 226 or. » Fig. 227 is tapped.
Displays the list of destinations visited in the navigation data.
Displays list of last destinations
Navigation 183
List of stored destinations ▶ Show the destination details by tapping on the function surface at the de-
› In the Navigation main menu, tap on the function surface → Destinations. sired destination.
› Tap on function surface A » Fig. 228 and select one of the following catego- ▶ Tap on the function surface Edit .
ries of saved destinations B » Fig. 228. ▶ Tap on the function surface Favourite .
184 Infotainment
Import your own goals Goals in vCard format
Introduction to the subject In the Infotainment memory, a custom destination can be imported in the
vCard format (*.vcf) from an SD card or a USB source.
Fig. 229 Import
MyDestination application on › Insert the SD card into the external module or connect a USB source with
the ŠKODA websites the own destination file.
› In the Navigation main menu, tap on the function surface → Manage memory
→ Import destinations (SD/USB).
› Select the source and confirm the import.
Route guidance
› In the Navigation main menu, tap on the function surface → Destinations →
→.
Fig. 230 › Search for and select the desired imported destination.
Websites ŠKODA Connect Delete own destination
› In the Navigation main menu, tap on the function surface → Destinations →
→.
› Tap the function surface Tap on the desired custom destination.
› In the destination details, tap the function surface Edit → Delete and confirm
the deletion.
Navigation 185
Guidance to the POI There are details of the selected target appears » page 190,
› Tip on the traffic obstruction icon in the map. Clear all own POI categories
There are details of the selected target appears » page 190. › In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface → Manage memory →
Delete "My POIs".
Clear all own POI categories
› In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface → Manage memory → › Tap the function surface Delete and confirm the deletion.
Delete "My POIs".
› Tap the function surface Delete and confirm the deletion. In user profile “ŠKODA Connect Portal” objectives created
The in the user profile on the website ŠKODA Connect Portal or in the applica-
In user profile “ŠKODA Connect Portal” created POI categories tion ŠKODA Connect drawn objects can be imported to the infotainment
memory.
The in the user profile on the website ŠKODA Connect Portal started own POI
categories can be imported into the infotainment memory. The requirement for importing the destinations is that Infotainment Online
» page 14 services are activated.
The requirement for importing a POI category is that Infotainment Online
» page 14 services are activated. import goals
Import POI categories › In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface → Destinations → →
.
In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface → Version information →
Update (online). › Or: tap the sensor field and then the function surface → .
› Tap on the function surface Update .
› or: Tap the sensor field and then the function surface → . › Are new targets available, then confirm the import.
A menu for importing/updating the navigation data and POI categories is dis- If the user profile on the website ŠKODA Connect Portal or in the application
played. ŠKODA Connect creates an object and sent to the infotainment, after switch-
› Tap the function surface → POIs → Retrieve. ing on the ignition in the infotainment screen displays a message regarding a
new destination with the option to import this displayed.
Are new POI categories available, their number and the file size is displayed on
the Infotainment. Guidance to an online destination
› Tap the function surface Startto start route guidance. › In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface → Destinations → →
.
› To complete the import, tap the function surface Next and confirm the im- › In the list of online dests to visit and select the desired destination.
port.
Delete Online destinations
Show POIs in the map
› In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface → Map → Select catego- › to delete all Online destinations in the main menu navigation the function
surface → Manage memory → Delete user data → Online destinations.
ries for POIs → My points of interest (Personal POI).
› Select the desired POI category. › To delete one online destination, go to the navigation main menu and tap on
function surface → Destinations → → → → Edit → Delete.
The insertion of the symbols of the POI categories in the Google Earth™Card is
not possible.
Route guidance to a destination of imported POI category
› Tip on the traffic obstruction icon in the map.
186 Infotainment
Image with GPS coordinates Display of the route from the current vehicle location to the destination
Presentation of the destination position or the next interim destination in
Fig. 231 the map (depending on the menu item setting ) → Advanced settings → Sta-
Image with GPS coordinates tus line:)
A Automatic map display in day or night mode (depending on the currently
active vehicle lighting)
B Daytime map display
C Night-time map display
D Switch the split screen display on/off » page 179
E Switch the display of selected POI categories on/off » page 182, Entering
a destination via the map point
Infotainment enables guidance to the GPScoordinate data stored in the image.
F Switch the display of Google Earth™ online map on/off » page 179
› Tap the sensor field and then the function surface Images. If the map scale of the 2D Map or 3D Map is greater than 10 km, then the map
› Select the connected source and open the image with GPS coordinates. is automatically displayed as 2D and aligned in the direction of north. If the
› Tap on the function surface » Fig. 231 in the image and a menu will open scale is increased beyond this value, then the map is switched back to the orig-
with the option to start route guidance.
inal representation.
The image can be obtained from an external device in which GPS coordinates
were stored at the time of image creation. This can also be created and impor- Map scale
ted in the “MyDestination” application » Fig. 229 on page 185,
Fig. 233
Map Function surfaces for
the map scale change:
Options for map display Infotainment Columbus
Fig. 232
Map options
Navigation 187
The turning off occurs likewise when the map is moved or the map scale is
changed manually.
Map view in reduced scale
▶ In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface A → .
The map scale is reduced for a few seconds and then restored.
Fig. 235
Fig. 234 Function surfaces for the map scale change: Infotainment
Change the map orientation
Amundsen
188 Infotainment
Map alignment 3D - Three-dimensional map display
Turn on/off the automatic change of scale
Fig. 236
Map alignment POIs display
The Infotainment system offers the possibility of displaying POI symbols on
the map on the Infotainment screen.
› To activate/deactivate the display, go to the main Navigation menu and tap
on the function surface → POIs.
› To select the POIs to be displayed, go to the main Navigation menu and tap
on the function surface → Map → Select categories for POIs and select the de-
The moved map can be centred/aligned to the vehicle, destination or route po- sired categories (max. 10).
sition.
Road sign display
› To centre the map, tap on function surface A » Fig. 236.
Infotainment offers the option of displaying the traffic signs stored in the navi-
Options for map display in the split screen gation data or detected by the front camera during guidance on the Infotain-
ment screen G » Fig. 217 on page 179.
Only valid for Infotainment Columbus.
› To switch on/off the road sign display in the main menu Navigation, tap the
function surface → Map → Show road signs.
For some vehicles it is possible to set an alert when exceeding the permitted
speed limit set by a road sign.
› Tap the sensor field and then the function surface → driver assistance →
speed warning:.
For trailer towing, we recommend that you activate detection of road signs
relevant to trailers.
› Tap the sensor field and then the function surface → Driver assistance →
Fig. 237 Map in split screen Show road signs relevant to trailers.
Navigation 189
The route guidance takes place as follows ▶ While entering a destination.
▶ Through graphical driving instructions in the Infotainment display screen and ▶ By tapping the function surface in the destination list.
in the display of the instrument cluster. ▶ By tapping the sensor field in the Navigation main menu (not applicable
▶ With navigation announcements. to Infotainment Columbus), the details of the last destination are displayed.
Infotainment tries to allow for continued guidance even if the navigation data Function surfaces
is incomplete or there is no data at all for the given area. Using functional surfaces in the field A the following functions can be per-
The route is recalculated each time if you ignore driving recommendations or formed, depending on the context.
change the route. ▶ Start / Stop route guidance.
▶ Searching for a nearby destination » page 180.
CAUTION ▶ Setting route options.
The nav. announcements provided may vary from the actual situations, e.g. due ▶ Store destination.
to out-of-date navigation data. ▶ Edit destination (the object can be deleted, renamed or saved).
▶ Dial the POI telephone number (if Infotainment is connected to a tele-
Destination details phone» page 160, Pairing and connecting).
Fig. 239
Alternative routes
The following menu items and information are displayed in the destination de- Route calculation is done on the basis of the set route options. The route op-
tails » Fig. 238. tions can be set: → Route options.
A Area with functional surfaces
Alternative routes
B Detailed destination information With selection of alternative routes turned on, the following menu is displayed
C Destination position in the map after the calculation of a new route » Fig. 239.
D Detailed target information (if available) A - calculate the most economical route with the shortest driving time
E Status of online services and shortest distance travelled – the route is highlighted green
Display the destination details B - calculate the fastest route to the destination, even if a detour is nec-
The destination details can be displayed in one of the following ways. essary –the route is highlighted in red
C - calculate the shortest route to the destination, even if a longer driving
time is required – the route is highlighted in orange
190 Infotainment
In the functional surfaces of the alternative routes, information on the route › Define the starting point by entering the address or the current vehicle posi-
length estimated travel time and the following symbols are displayed (applies tion.
to the Infotainment Columbus). › The demo mode starting point can also be set provided demo mode is turned
on by tapping on the desired map location and selecting the menu item Start
Use of a toll motorway
Demo Mode » page 182, Entering a destination via the map point.
Use of a train / ferry
Using a tunnel Graphical driving recommendations
Use of a toll road
Using a vignette duty road
It is possible to select an already calculated alternative route before the calcu-
lation of the remaining routes is completed.
Selecting the type of route will start the route guidance.
If no route selection is made within 30 s after the calculation of all routes, the
route guidance is automatically started according to the preferred route type.
Navigation 191
Nav. announcements Finish route guidance
Infotainment issues nav. announcements during route guidance. The route guidance can be finished in one of the following ways.
The navigation announcements are generated by Infotainment. The flawless › The final destination is reached.
clarity of the message (e.g., road or city name) cannot always be guaranteed. › In the main menu Navigation by tapping the functional surface → Stop route
guidance.
The last navigation announcement can be repeated in the main Navigation
menu by tapping on the function surface → . › By turning off the ignition for longer than 120 minutes.
The timing of the navigation message is dependent on the type of road and on Abort route guidance
the driving speed.
If the ignition is switched off and on again, then the route guidance is contin-
The type of nav. announcements can be set: → Navigation announcements.
ued depending on the stop time in one of the following ways.
Note ▶ Within 15 min. - route guidance is continued taking into account the calcula-
Route guidance on the most frequently travelled route takes place without ted route.
navigation announcements. ▶ From 15 min to 120 min - after confirming the message on the infotainment
screen, the route guidance continues, taking into account the calculated
Most common routes route.
▶ After 120 min - the route guidance is cancelled.
The most frequently travelled routes are automatically saved by Infotainment.
Of these, up to 3 routes can be offered, which best match the current time,
day of the week as well as the vehicle position. Route
A route guidance to one of the most travelled routes can be started as long as Route schedule
no route guidance takes place.
› To display the menu with the most frequently travelled routes, tap on func-
tion surface Freq. in the split screen routes → Show on map.
› Select the desired route.
Then a selected route is calculated and the route guidance starts.
The menu display in the split can be turned on/off in the main menu navigation
by tapping the function surface → Route options → Freq. Routes .
The stored most frequent routes can be deleted in the main menu navigation
by tapping the functional surface → Manage memory → Delete user data → Freq.
Fig. 241 Route details: a route destination/several route destinations
Routes .
Note During route guidance, the Route details (Information about the current route)
can be displayed.
Route guidance on the most frequently travelled route takes place without
navigation announcements. › In the Navigation main menu, tap the functional surface → Route details.
192 Infotainment
A route destination Change positions of destinations with each other
In the route plan, the following information is displayed at the destina- ▶ The relevant function surface and move the destination to the desired po-
tion» Fig. 241 - . sition.
A Area with functional surfaces With destinations on the route already reached, the note Destination reached is
B Destination information displayed below the destination name. It is not possible to change the position
Estimated time of arrival at destination / remaining driving time to desti- of these destinations with each other.
nation Store route
Remaining distance to the destination ▶ In the area A , tap the functional surface Save.
C Chosen route type (economic, fastest, shortest) ▶ Save the edited route as a new route or replace the existing saved route.
D Current vehicle position (address / GPS coordinates) The route is saved in the route list» page 194.
The display of the arrival time or the remaining driving time can be adjusted as Stop route guidance
follows. ▶ In the area A , tap the functional surface Stop.
▶ In the Navigation main menu, tap on the functional surface → Advanced set-
tings → Time display:. Route change in the map
Several route destinations Only valid for Infotainment Columbus.
In the route plan, the following information is displayed at the respective desti-
nations» Fig. 241 - .
A Area with functional surfaces
Stopover (with sequential number)
Final destination
Estimated time of arrival at destination / stopover
Driving distance to destination / stopover
Substitution of destinations among themselves
Delete the destination
Continuation of the route guidance from the selected target (previous Fig. 242 Route change in the map / route transit point
waypoints are skipped)
A route in which there are no intermediate targets can be changed during
Display the destination details » page 190 route guidance by inserting a transit point.
Insert destination into the route Add a transit point
▶ In the area A , tap on the function surface Enter destination and enter a new
destination.
› In the Navigation main menu, tap on the function surface → Change route in
map.
▶ Or: tap on the area A the functional surface destinations and select an object
in the list of stored destinations.
› Touch the screen in the route field and move the cross-point to the desired
location on the map, e.g. A , move » Fig. 242).
Each additional destination is added to the list as the first subsequent destina- The transit point B is added to the route » Fig. 242.
tion route.
› Tap on the function surface .
Navigation 193
Then a new route is calculated and route guidance starts. › Switch on the ignition. When a new route is available, a message regarding
the option to import this route appears in the Infotainment screen automati-
Customise transit point
cally .
› In the Navigation main menu, tap on the function surface → Change route in
map. If the user opts not to import the route immediately, the route can be impor-
› Touch the transit point B and move to a different location on the map. ted later manually as follows.
› Tap on the function surface . › In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface → Routes Tap to
Then a new route is calculated and route guidance starts. check if a new route is available.
Remove transit point
› Or: tap the sensor field and then the function surface → .
› The function surface import routes Tap.
› In the Navigation main menu, tap on the functional surface → Change route in
map. If a new route available, then a message is displayed on the Infotainment.
› Tap on function surface Delete waypoint. › Tap the function surface Retrieveto start route guidance.
› Tap on the function surface . After being successfully imported, the route is displayed in the list of saved
Then a new route is calculated and route guidance starts. routes.
194 Infotainment
Main menu Record waypoints
› In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface → Waypoint mode. Start recording a waypoint tour
▶ Inthe Waypoint mode main menu, tap on the function surface → Record
The main menu is displayed» Fig. 243.
waypoint tour.
Any ongoing route guidance is terminated after the selection of this way-
Select one of the following recording types.
point mode menu.
■ Select on map - Enter destination on the map and start recording waypoints
Description of the function surfaces A » Fig. 243 ■ Start recording - Start recording waypoints without entering a destination
Context-dependent:
▶ No route guidance is taking place - Start recording a waypoint Recording a waypoint tour
tour/display saved waypoint tour management/exit menu After starting the recording of a waypoint tour, the following contextual infor-
▶ A waypoint tour is being recorded - Stop recording a waypoint mation may be displayed » Fig. 244.
tour/manually adjust waypoint/exit menu A Automatically set waypoints
▶ Route guidance is taking place - Stop route guidance/skip the next
B Manually set waypoints
waypoint/exit menu
C Split screen Waypoints with the number of already set waypoints / maxi-
Setting the map display / show / hide the split screen / switch on / off the
mum number of waypoints
display of POIs on the map
Operation of Radio/Mediaplayback Add waypoint manually
▶ In the Waypoint mode main menu, tap on function surface → Add waypoint
Setting Navigation is not available in theWaypoint mode menu
manually.
Stop recording
▶ In the Waypoint mode main menu, tap on the function surface → Stop re-
cording.
The recording also stops when the waypoint mode menu is exited.
The recorded waypoints are merged to a waypoint tour and stored in the way-
point memory after completion of the recording.
The recording cannot be continued once it has been stopped. A new recording
must be started.
Navigation 195
Guide along a saved waypoint tour If you drive past a waypoint and this does “not disappear” from the waypoint
tour (e.g. because the distance to this waypoint is too large), then there is the
option to “skip” over this waypoint and continue the guidance to the next way-
point.
▶ In the Waypoint mode main menu, tap on function surface → Skip waypoint.
Stop route guidance
▶ In the Waypoint mode main menu, tap on function surface → Stop route guid-
ance.
The guidance also stops when waypoint mode is exited.
Fig. 245 Display a waypoint / guide along a waypoint tour Manage waypoint tour memory
Start guidance › to display a list of saved and imported waypoint tours, from main menu
Waypoint mode, tap the function surface → Waypoint memory.
› In the Waypoint mode main menu, tap on the function surface → Waypoint
memory. The name of the waypoint tour, the date and time of storage and the number
› Select the desired route from the displayed list. of waypoints appears in the function surface for the waypoint tour.
› Tap on the function surface . › Choose the desired waypoint tour, and then select one of the following menu
› Select one of the following menus A » Fig. 245. items.
■ Reverse tour - Reverse the order of waypoints (suitable for guiding along a Store the waypoint tour on the SD card
waypoint tour in the reverse direction)
■ Next waypoint. - Skip to the next waypoint Delete the waypoint tour
■ Start - starts route guidance Rename the waypoint tour
Display the waypoint tour » Fig. 245 on page 196
Route guidance
During the guidance along a waypoint tour, no nav. announcements are made Import waypoint tour from the SD card
by Infotainment. ▶ Inthe Waypoint mode main menu, tap on the function surface → Waypoint
memory → Import.
When driving along the waypoint tour shown, follow as closely as possible the ▶ Select the source of the waypoint tour recording and confirm the import.
information shown on the Infotainment screen.
While driving along a waypoint tour, the split screen shows the Waypoints and
the direction to drive as well as the distance to the next waypoint, the se-
quence number of the next waypoint and the total number of waypoints B
» Fig. 245.
The waypoint tour from the vehicle position to the next waypoint “reduces”
continuously while driving “ ” C » Fig. 245 .
If you drive past but very close to the next waypoint, the route guidance will
continue with the subsequent waypoint.
196 Infotainment
▶ Symbol of the traffic obstruction
Traffic reports
▶ Number of roads affected
▶ Name of the location in question
List of traffic reports
▶ Description of the traffic obstruction
› To display the list of traffic reports, tap on the sensor field and then tap ted the route and the route passes through the traffic obstruction
the function surface . ▶ Orange - The traffic obstruction is on the route, the route is recalculated and
an alternative route is available
In the list of traffic messages and the map, a max. of 6 messages are displayed,
that are provided with a letter and a traffic obstruction symbol (e.g. , , ) Distinguish the importance of a TMC message traffic obstruction using
A » Fig. 246. colour
The colour differentiation of traffic conditions on the provider of the online
At present on the route traffic information is taken by using a nav. announce-
traffic reports depends.
ment.
To change the map orientation, go to the Navigation main menu and tap on
Source of Traffic Information function surface → Map → Traffic flow settings.
On the position C » Fig. 246 can the following symbols are displayed.
Update
TMC Traffic Information (with strikethrough icon, the Infotainment is out
The list of traffic reports will be automatically updated by Infotainment on a
of range of any traffic information provider)
continuous basis.
Online traffic information
Display options
▶ Route guidance is disabled - All traffic messages are displayed.
▶ Route guidance is taking place - After tapping function surface B
» Fig. 246 in the displayed menu, you can select all traffic messages by tap-
ping the function surface All areas, or you can select only the traffic messages
present on the route by tapping the function surface Route.
A traffic report may contain some of the following information.
Navigation 197
Detail of the traffic report enter / remove traffic conditions on your route manually
If a traffic obstruction is detected during route guidance (e.g. traffic jam), this
Fig. 247 traffic obstruction be manually entered into the route.
Detail of the traffic report
After entering, Infotainment calculates and provides an alternative route.
Enter traffic obstruction
› In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface → Congestion ahead.
› Adjust the length of the traffic obstruction.
The traffic obstruction will be displayed in red in the map to the right along the
route.
The details of the traffic message depends on the source of the traffic mes- Remove traffic obstruction
sage. The traffic obstruction is removed from the route after completion of the
› To display this, select the desired traffic report from the list of traffic re- route guidance or can manually be removed as follows.
ports. › In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface → Delete "congestion
› or: Tap on the traffic obstruction icon in the map. ahead".
Depending on the context, the following information and functional surfaces
are displayed » Fig. 247.
A Map of the affected location
B Description of the traffic obstruction
C Reception timing and information relating to the traffic report provider
(is ŠKODA Connect the provider, it is an online traffic report)
D Symbol of the traffic obstruction
E Length of the traffic obstruction
Dynamic route
Infotainment enables an evaluation of the traffic reports received during the
route guidance. In fulfilling the following conditions a bypass route is calcula-
ted, and the appropriate announcement is issued.
The dynamic route function is turned on.
The traffic congestion included in the traffic information is on the route.
The traffic obstruction will be evaluated by Infotainment as of great im-
portance.
› To switch on/offin the main menu Navigation, tap on the function surface
→ Route options → Dynamic route.
198 Infotainment
Operation of the steering wheel heating
vehicle systems
Vehicle system settings
CAR - Vehicle settings
Note
Settings relating to the vehicle systems can only be made when the ignition is
switched on.
Main menu
Fig. 248
Function surfaces in the main
menu
› Tap on the button/sensor field / → to display the main menu with
the following function surfaces » Fig. 248.
Selecting the following menu points
▶ Sport (applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen)
▶ Convenience consumers
▶ Driving data
▶ DriveGreen
▶ Vehicle status
Operating playback - Radio / Media
With manual air conditioning, depending on the vehicle equipment: Set-
ting the auxiliary heating and ventilation/operation of heated windscreen
200 Driving
Switching the ignition on/off Starting the engine
› On vehicles with Ignition lock, turn the key to position 3 and the engine
starts» Fig. 249 on page 201 . Release the key, the engine will start auto-
matically.
If the engine does not start within 10 seconds, turn the key to position 1 . Re-
peat the starting process after 30 seconds.
› On vehicles with starter button, press the button briefly » Fig. 249 on
page 201 - , the motor will start automatically.
In vehicles with diesel engines, the glow plug warning lights up after the
ignition is switched on. The engine can be started after the indicator light goes
out.
Fig. 249 Positions of the vehicle key in the ignition lock / starter button
Stopping the engine
Read and observe and on page 200 first. › Stopping the vehicle.
Positions of the vehicle key in the ignition lock » Fig. 249 -
› On vehicles with ignition lock, turn the key to position 1 » Fig. 249 on
page 201 .
1 Ignition switched off, engine switched off
› On vehicles with starter button, press the button » Fig. 249 on page 201 - ,
2 Ignition switched on The engine and the ignition will be switched off simultaneously.
3 Starting engine
For vehicles with automatic transmission, the ignition key can only be removed
Switching on /off ignition in vehicles with starter button if the selector lever is in position P (this only applies to a few countries).
› Press the » Fig. 249 - button, the ignition is turned on / off. Do not switch the engine off immediately at the end of your journey after the
On vehicles with manual transmission the pedal must not be depressed to engine has been running for a prolonged period at high loads. Leave it to run at
switch on / off the ignition, otherwise the engine will start. an idling speed for about 1 minute. This prevents any possible accumulation of
heat when the engine is switched off.
On vehicles with automatic transmission, the brake pedal must not be de-
pressed to switch on / off the ignition, otherwise the engine will start. Emergency shutdown of the engine in vehicles with starter button
The system is equipped with a protective device against accidental switching
Starting engine / Stopping off, the engine can only be shut off while driving in the event of an emergency.
Read and observe and on page 200 first. › Keep the knob pressed » Fig. 249 on page 201 - or press it twice within 1
second.
Before starting the engine After the emergency stop of the engine, the steering lock will remain un-
› Switch on the parking brake. locked.
› For vehicles with manual transmission, shift gear stick to neutral, depress
the clutch pedal and hold it there until the engine starts. CAUTION
› For vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in position When the outdoor temperature is below -10 ° C, the selector lever when start-
P or N and » depress the brake pedal until the engine starts. ing must always be in P mode.
Operation
Fig. 251
Display
If no engine start is possible and the display of the instrument cluster shows a
message that the key could not be detected by the system or there is a sys-
tem fault, then try to start the engine as follows.
› Push the starter button and then hold the key with the back of it on the but-
ton » Fig. 250. Vehicles with manual transmission
The engine is automatically switched off as soon as the vehicle comes to a
If the engine does not start, the help of a specialist garage is required. halt, the shift lever is moved into neutral and the clutch pedal is released.
CAUTION The engine is automatically started as soon as the clutch pedal is depressed.
The key may not be detected by the system if the battery in the key is running
Vehicles with automatic transmission
out of charge or the signal fails.
The engine is automatically switched off as soon as the vehicle comes to a
halt and the brake pedal is operated.
START-STOPsystem
The engine is automatically started as soon as the accelerator pedal is de-
Introduction pressed or the brake pedal is released (with deactivated Auto Hold function).
202 Driving
Requirements for the system to function correctly Note
The following conditions must be met for the system to function correctly. ■ If the driver's seat belt is removed for more than approx. 30 seconds or the
The driver's door is closed. driver's door is opened during automatic stop mode, the engine will have to be
The driver has fastened the seat belt. started manually.
The driving speed was higher than 4 km/h after the last stop. ■ No automatic engine shut-down takes place when a vehicle with automatic
transmission is moving at low speed (e.g. during a traffic jam) and remains sta-
System status tionary after pressing the brake pedal lightly. Automatic engine shut-down
The system status is shown in the display when the vehicle comes to a halt takes place if you press the brake pedal down with more force.
» Fig. 251. ■ For vehicles with automatic transmission there is no automatic engine shut-
The engine is switched off automatically; when moving off, the ignition down when the system detects a manoeuvring action due to a large steering
process will be initiated automatically. angle.
The engine is not switched off automatically.
When stopping, the engine will not switch off for the following reasons,
Manually disable / enable system
among others.
▶ The engine temperature for the proper function of the system has not yet Fig. 252
been reached. Button for the START-STOP sys-
▶ The charge state of the vehicle battery is too low. tem
▶ The current consumption is too high.
▶ High air conditioning or heating output (high blower speed, big difference
between the desired and actual interior temperature).
If the engine is shut down automatically and the system detects that the en-
gine is required, such as when the brake pedal is pressed repeatedly, then the
system automatically starts the engine.
› To deactivate/activate, press the button » Fig. 252.
More information about the current system status can be displayed in the In-
When the system is deactivated, the symbol illuminates in the button.
fotainment screen in menu / → → Vehicle status.
If the system is deactivated, it will be reactivated automatically after the igni-
If there is a system fault, the following message will appear in the display of
tion has been switched off and on.
the instrument cluster. Seek help from a specialist garage.
Note
If the system is deactivated when the engine is turned off automatically, then
the automatic start process takes place.
204 Driving
Emergency braking function
If, while driving, a fault occurs in the brake system, the parking brake can be
used as an emergency brake » .
› Pull the button in the direction of arrow 1 and » Fig. 254 hold (you hear
an audible signal), the vehicle starts to brake strongly.
The braking process is interrupted when the key is released or the accelerator
pedal is actuated.
WARNING
Fig. 254 Parking brake operation ■ The emergency brake is to be used only in an emergency when the vehi-
cle cannot be stopped with the brake pedal.
■ Do not place any objects in the recessed grip for the finger in front of the
Read and observe on page 204 first.
parking brake key - the parking brake button could be blocked!
The electric parking brake (hereinafter referred as a parking brake) replaces
the handbrake. This secures the vehicle when stopping and parking against un- Note
wanted movement. ■ If the vehicle battery is discharged, it is not possible to release the parking
The parking brake can be used when the ignition is on or off. brake. First connect the vehicle first to a power source, such as the battery of
another vehicle » page 283, Jump-starting and then turn off the parking brake.
Switching on ■ Noise when switching on and off the parking brake is normal and therefore
› Pull the button in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 254 and hold until the harmless.
symbol in the button and warning light illuminating the instrument cluster.
Automatic shut-off Auto Hold function
The parking brake switches off automatically when starting, as long as the
driver's door is closed and the driver has fastened the seat belt. Fig. 255
Should the vehicle start to roll away when starting on a downhill slope, step on The Auto-Hold function button
the accelerator or switch on the parking brake.
Turning off the parking brake can be prevented if, before starting, the but-
ton is pulled and held in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 254. The parking brake
turns off after releasing the button.
Manual shut-down
› With the ignition switched on, press the brake pedal and at the same time
push the button in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 254. Read and observe on page 204 first.
› With the engine running, press either the brake or accelerator pedal and The Auto Hold function (hereinafter referred to only as system) prevents the
press the button in the direction of arrow 2 .
vehicle from rolling unintentionally when stopped. It is, for example, not neces-
The symbol in the button and the warning light in the instrument cluster sary to secure the vehicle with the brake pedal or parking brake at traffic
go out. lights.
206 Driving
Manual gear changing and pedals CAUTION
If not in the process of changing gear, do not leave your hand on the gear shift
Introduction lever while driving. The pressure from the hand can cause the gear shift mech-
anism to wear excessively.
CAUTION
When stopping on a slope, never try to hold the vehicle using the accelerator Pedals
pedal – this may lead to gear damage. Read and observe on page 207 first.
Manual gear changing The operation of the pedals must not be hindered under any circumstances!
In the driver's footwell, only a footmat (supplied by the factory or from the
Fig. 256 ŠKODA Original Accessories) which is secured on the respective attachment
The shift pattern points should be used.
WARNING
No objects should be located in the driver's footwell, otherwise the pedal
operation could be disabled - risk of accident!
Automatic transmission
Read and observe on page 207 first.
Introduction
The gearshift pattern for the individual gear positions is shown on the gear lev-
er » Fig. 256. The automatic transmission performs an automatic gear change irrespective
The gear shift indicator should be observed when changing gear » page 47. of the engine load, the operation of the accelerator, the vehicle speed and the
selected driving mode.
Always depress the clutch pedal all the way down. This prevents uneven wear
on the clutch. The modes of the automatic transmission can be adjusted by the driver by
means of the selector lever.
Engage reverse gear
› Stop the vehicle. WARNING
› The clutch pedal is fully depressed. ■ Do not use the throttle if the forwards mode has been set using the se-
› Switch the gear lever to N. lector lever prior to starting up - risk of accident!
› Push the shift lever downwards fully to the left and then forward into ■ Never move the selector lever to mode R or P when driving – risk of acci-
R» Fig. 256. dent!
The reversing lights will come on once reverse gear is engaged, provided the
ignition is on.
WARNING
Never engage reverse gear when driving – risk of accident!
Read and observe and on page 207 first. Read and observe and on page 207 first.
Move the selector lever to change to the following positions » Fig. 257. In The selector lever is locked in mode P and N to prevent that the forward driv-
some positions you have to push the locking button » page 208, Selector lever ing is selected accidentally, thereby setting the vehicle in motion.
lock.
The selector lever is locked only when the vehicle is stationary and at speeds
When the ignition is switched on, the gearbox mode and the currently selected up to 5 km/h.
gear are indicated in the display » Fig. 257.
The selector lever lock is indicated by the illumination of the warning light.
P Park - the position can be set only when the vehicle is at a standstill.
Release the gear selector lever from P mode or N
The drive wheels are mechanically locked.
R Reverse gear - the position can be set only when the vehicle is at a stand-
› Press the brake pedal and, at the same time, push the lock button in the di-
rection of arrow 1 » Fig. 258.
still and the engine is at idling speed.
N Neutral (idle position) - the power transmission to the drive wheels is in- To move the selector lever from mode N to D / S only the brake pedal is press-
terrupted. ed.
208 Driving
The selector lever is not locked when quickly moving across the position N If you do not pull one of the rocker switches - / + for a certain time, manual
(e.g. from R to D/S). This, for example, helps to rock out a vehicle that is stuck, shifting of the gears is deactivated automatically.
e.g. in a bank of snow. The selector lever lock will engage if the lever is in posi-
Changing gear
tion N for more than approx. 2 seconds without the brake pedal being de-
pressed. › To shift up, tap the selector lever forwards + or pull the rocker switch +
briefly towards the steering wheel » Fig. 259.
If it is not possible to release the gear selector from mode P in the usual man- › To shift down, tap the selector lever backwards - or pull the rocker switch
ner, then this can be emergency unlocked » page 289. - briefly towards the steering wheel » Fig. 259.
Note The currently selected gear is marked with the letter M in the instrument clus-
If you want to switch the selector lever from mode P to mode D/S or vice ver- ter display.
sa, move the selector lever quickly. This prevents that you accidentally select The gear shift indicator should be observed when changing gear » page 47.
mode R or N.
When accelerating, the gearbox automatically shifts up into the higher gear
just before the maximum permissible engine speed is reached. If a lower gear
Manual shifting of gears (Tiptronic)
is selected, the gearbox does not shift down until there is no risk of the engine
over revving.
Note
It may be beneficial, for example, when travelling downhill, to use manual shift-
ing of gears. Shifting to a lower gear reduces the load on the brakes and hence
the wear of the brakes.
210 Driving
A driving liquid display Radiator shutters
With the driving is fluid, the display is located in the middle (near the green
dot). When accelerating, the display moves down, and upwards when braking. The radiator shutters located in front of the radiator (hereinafter: shutter) help
to reduce CO2 emissions as well as harmful emissions and to save fuel.
B “Green leaf”
The greener the leaf, the more economic the driving style. With less economi- If the system detects that it is possible to reduce the amount of air flowing to
cal driving, the leaf is presented without any green colouring or it can be com- the radiator, it closes the blinds. As a result, the air resistance of the vehicle is
pletely hidden. reduced.
C bar graph If a driving speed of 150 km/h is reached due to a function impairment of the
The higher the green bars, the more economical the driving style. Each bar shutters, a message regarding the function impairment of the shutters is
shows the driving efficiency in 5-second steps, the current bar is on the left. shown in the instrument cluster display.
D scoring (0 - 100) After this message has been displayed, the maximum speed of the vehicle is
The higher the indicated value, the more economical the driving style. When automatically limited to 170 km/h. The manner of driving should therefore be
you tap the function surface D , a detailed assessment showing the driving ef- adapted to this limitation.
ficiency during the last 30 minutes is displayed. If this message appears in the winter, the cause may be ice or snow caught up
If the trip lasts less than 30 minutes from the start, then the overview will add in the blinds. After the ice or snow has thawed, the blinds are functional again.
the assessment from the previous journey (the bars are shown in dark green). If the impairment not due to ice or snow, then assistance from a specialist
should be sought.
E the average fuel consumption from the start
When you tap the E function surface, a detailed overview of the average fuel
consumption during the last 30 minutes is shown. Avoiding damage to your vehicle
If the trip lasts less than 30 minutes from the start, then the overview will add Driving Tips
the overview of the average fuel consumption from the previous journey (the
bars are shown in dark green). Only drive on such roads and in such terrain that match the vehicle parameters
» page 299, Technical data as well as your driving skills.
F symbols
The display may show the following four symbols, which give information on The driver is always responsible for deciding whether the vehicle can handle
the current driving style. travelling in the given terrain.
Economical driving style WARNING
The current speed has a negative effect on fuel consumption. ■ Adjust the speed and driving style to the current visibility, weather, road
Travelling is not fluid, this is to avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking and traffic conditions. Too high a speed or an erroneous manoeuvre may
Recommended gear cause serious injury and damage to the vehicle.
■ Combustible objects such as dry leaves or twigs caught under the base of
Tips for economical driving
the vehicle could ignite on hot vehicle parts - risk of fire!
Tap on the B leave to display tips for economical driving.
Note
Resetting the single-trip memory “Since start” also resets the average con-
sumption E and the driving assessment D as well as diagram C .
212 Driving
The sensor function may be impaired in the event of one of the following sit- Stability Control (ESC)
uations arising.
▶ The sensor cover is soiled (e.g. with mud, snow and the like). Read and observe on page 213 first.
▶ The area in front of and around the sensor cover is obscured (e.g. by labels,
auxiliary headlights and the like(. ESC improves vehicle stability in critical driving situations (e.g. if the vehicle
▶ When visibility is poor (e.g. fog, heavy rain, thick snowfall). starts to skid) by the braking the individual wheels to maintain the direction.
▶ In exceptional cases, the sensor may be covered in the area beneath the cov- During an ECS intervention, the warning light flashes in the instrument clus-
er, e.g. due to snow. ter.
If the sensor cover or the sensor is dirty or covered, a message to that effect
from the ACC system » page 237, Malfunctions or Front Assist » page 240, ESC Sport
Malfunctions system appears in the instrument cluster display.
Fig. 263
WARNING ESC Sport / ASR system button
■ If you suspect that the sensor is damaged, deactivate the ACC system
and Front Assist system» page 235, » page 239. Have the sensor checked by
a specialist garage.
■ A collision or damage in the front or lower area of the vehicle could affect
the sensor function - there is risk of accident! Have the sensor checked by
a specialist garage.
■ Do not cover the area in front of and around the sensor cover. This can
lead to impaired function of the sensor - risk of accident! Read and observe on page 213 first.
CAUTION ESC Sport allows for a sportier driving style. With ESC Sport switched on, in
Remove snow with a brush and ice with a solvent-free de-icer from the sensor the event of light oversteer or understeer of the vehicle, no ESC interventions
cover. take place and the ASR is so limited that the drive wheels can spin.
Activation
Braking and stabilisation systems › Press and hold down the » Fig. 263 button.
› or: In the Infotainment system, in the menu / tap on function surface
Introduction → ESC system: → ESC Sport.
With activation the warning light lights up in the instrument cluster and an
The brake and stabilization systems are automatically activated each time the appropriate message is displayed in the instrument cluster.
ignition is switched on, unless otherwise indicated.
Deactivation
The error display is in Chapter » page 37, Warning lights.
› Press the » Fig. 263 button.
WARNING › or: In the Infotainment system, in the menu / tap on function surface
→ ESC system: → Activated.
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be
observed » page 212, in section Introduction. With deactivation the warning light extinguishes in the instrument cluster
and an appropriate message is displayed in the instrument cluster.
214 Driving
Brake Assist (HBA) Trailer stabilisation system (TSA)
Read and observe on page 213 first. Read and observe on page 213 first.
The HBA increases the braking effect and helps to reduce the braking dis- The TSA helps the combination stable in situations where the trailer sways and
tance. then the whole trailer combination.
The HBA is activated by very quick operation of the brake pedal. In order to TSA brakes the individual wheels of the towing vehicle in order to damp the
achieve the shortest possible braking distance, the brake pedal must be ap- rocking motion of the entire vehicle combination.
plied firmly until the vehicle has come to a standstill.
The following conditions are required for the correct TSA function.
The HBA function is automatically deactivated when the brake pedal is re- The trailer was shipped from the factory or purchased from the ŠKODA
leased. genuine accessories.
The trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle via the trailer
Hill Start Assist socket.
Read and observe on page 213 first. The parking aid is activated.
The speed is greater than 60 km/h.
When driving on slopes, Hill Start Assist (hereinafter referred to simply as the
system) allows you to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator Further information » page 250, Towing device and trailer.
pedal without the vehicle rolling downhill on its own.
Parking aid (ParkPilot)
The vehicle is braked by the system for about 2 seconds after releasing the
brake pedal. Introduction
The system is active as of a 5% slope, if the driver door is closed. The system is
only ever active on slopes when starting off in forward or reverse. The parking aid (hereinafter referred to as system) uses acoustic signals or the
Infotainment screen when manoeuvring around obstacles in the vicinity of the
Multicollision brake (MCB) vehicle.
Read and observe on page 213 first. WARNING
■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be
MCB helps to decrease speed after a collision by means of automatic braking
observed » page 212, in section Introduction.
interventions and to stabilise the vehicle. This reduces the risk of a subsequent
■ Moving persons or objects may not be recognized by the system sensors.
crash due to uncontrolled vehicle movement.
■ Under certain circumstances, surfaces of certain objects and types of
The automatic brake interventions can take place only if the following condi- clothing cannot reflect the system signals. There is a danger that such ob-
tions are met. jects or people may not be recognised by the system sensors.
There was a front, side and rear-end collision of a certain severity. ■ External noise sources may affect the signals of the system sensors.
The impact speed was greater than approx. 10 km/h. There is a danger that obstacles may not be detected by the system sen-
The brakes, the ESL and other required electrical systems remain function- sors.
■ Before reversing, make sure that there are is not any small obstacle, such
al after impact.
as a rock, thin post etc., in front of or behind your vehicle. Such obstacles
The accelerator pedal is not actuated.
may not be recognised by the system sensors.
Settings in Infotainment
Read and observe and on page 215 first. Fig. 264 Installation location of the sensors on the left side of the vehi-
cle: front/rear
› In the infotainment system, in menu / tap on function surface → Park-
ing and manoeuvring.
Fig. 265
■ ParkPilot - Settings for the parking aid Sampled areas and range of the
■ Activate automatically - Activate/deactivate the compact parking aid display
sensors
(when driving forward)
■ Front volume - Adjust the volume of the beeps for obstacle detection in front
■ Front tone setting - Setting the pitch of the beeps for obstacle detection in
front
■ Rear volume - Set the volume level of the beeps for the rear obstacle detec-
tion
■ Rear tone setting - Setting the pitch of the beeps for the rear obstacle detec-
tion Read and observe and on page 215 first.
■ Entertainment fading while parking – Lowers the audio volume (e.g. radio vol-
The system uses ultrasound waves to calculate the distance between the
ume) with activated parking aid
bumper and an obstacle. The ultrasonic sensors are, depending on vehicle
■ Manoeuvre braking - Activation / deactivation of the automatic emergency
equipment,, located in the back or in the front bumper » Fig. 264.
braking
Depending on the equipment, the following system versions are possible
» Fig. 265.
▶ Variant 1: warns of obstacles in areas C , D .
▶ Variant 2: warns of obstacles in areas A , B , C , D .
▶ Variant 3: warns of obstacles in the areas A , B , C , D , E .
216 Driving
Approximate range of sensors (in cm) Read and observe and on page 215 first.
Variant 1 Variant 2 Variant 3
Area » Fig. 265 Function surfaces and warnings » Fig. 266
(4 sensors) (8 sensors) (12 sensors)
A Road display.
A - 120 120
Depending on the Infotainment type: Switching off park assistant dis-
B - 60 90 play.
C 160 160 160 Switching audible parking signals on/off.
D 60 60 90 Disable / enable the automatic emergency braking.
E - - 90 Change to rear-view camera display .
Audible signals There is an obstacle in the collision area (the distance to the obstacle
The interval between the acoustic signals becomes shorter as the clearance is is less than 30 cm). Stop moving in the direction of the obstacle!
reduced. At a distance of approx. 30 cm a continuous tone starts to sound - There is an obstacle in the road (the distance to the obstacle is great-
Danger area. er than 30 cm).
The acoustic signals can be set in Infotainment» page 216. An obstacle is located outside of the road (the distance to the obsta-
cle is greater than 30 cm).
Towing a trailer
System failure (there is no indication of obstacles).
When towing, or when another accessory is connected to the trailer socket,
only the areas A and B » Fig. 265 are active in the system. Road display
The road display A » Fig. 266 indicates the road on which the vehicle would
Note
take the current steering wheel and shift / selector lever position.
■ If with Version 3 vehicles not all fields around the vehicle silhouette are ac-
tive after activation the vehicle should be moved forwards or backwards. The shift lever is in the neutral position and the gear selector is in mode N. the
■ The signal tones for front obstacle recognition are factory-set to be higher road display is at the front.
than for rear obstacle recognition.
■ The setting of the acoustic signals is stored (depending on the Infotainment
type) in the active user account personalisation » page 53.
Fig. 266
Screen display
Read and observe and on page 215 first. Read and observe and on page 215 first.
Activation The automatic system activation occurs when moving forward at a speed be-
To activate the system, engage reverse gear and, on vehicles with version 2 low 10 km/h when the vehicle approaches an obstacle.
and 3, also press the » Fig. 267 button.
After activation, the following is shown in the left pane of Infotainment display
When activating, an alarm sounds and the symbol illuminates in the button. » Fig. 268.
Deactivation Acoustic signals are sounded as of a distance from the obstacle of around
On vehicles with Version 1, the system can be deactivated by moving out of 50 cm.
reverse gear. The automatic display can be activated / deactivated in Infotainment
For vehicles with version 2 and 3, the system is automatically deactivated by » page 216.
pressing the button or at a speed above 15 km/h (the symbol in the but-
ton goes out). Note
The setting (activate / deactivate) of the automatic display is stored (depend-
Fault display ing on the Infotainment type) in the active user account personalisation
Vehicles with Variant 1 » page 53.
▶ After system activation an acoustic signal sounds for approx. 3 seconds
(there is no obstacle near the vehicle). Automatic emergency braking
Vehicles with the Variants 2 and 3
▶ After system activation, the symbol flashes in the button.
Read and observe and on page 215 first.
▶ In the display of the instrument cluster a message about an error of the Park-
If the system detects a collision risk when travelling forwards or reversing at a
Pilot system appears (at the same time there is an audible signal). speed up to 8 km/h, there is an automatic emergency braking to reduce the
Seek help from a specialist garage. impact consequences.
218 Driving
After switching the ignition on and off, the systems remains activated / deacti- WARNING
vated depending on the setting prior to switching off the ignition. ■ In the case of a collision or damage to the rear of the vehicle, the function
The brake function can also be deactivated once with the function surface of the systems may be affected - risk of accident! Have the vehicle
» Fig. 266 on page 217. checked by a specialist garage.
■ Do not cover the sensor area - the function of the systems could be limi-
ted.
Rear traffic alert and wizard for “Blind spot”Monitoring ■ Remove snow, ice and such obstacles from the sensor environment im-
Introduction mediately.
WARNING
Fig. 269
Installation location of the radar The wizard for “blind spot”monitoring is limited by physical and system-re-
sensors lated limits. Therefore, in the following situations the system can be de-
layed in drawing attention (or not at all) to a vehicle in the next land.
■ When a vehicle is approaching at a very high speed.
■ When passing through a very sharp curve or a roundabout.
CAUTION
■ If a trailer or other accessory is to be connected to the trailer socket, then
The Rear Traffic Alert and Wizard for “blind spot” monitoring works based on the two systems are not available.
the information from the radar sensors in the rear bumper » Fig. 269. The radar ■ In adverse weather conditions (heavy rain, water vapour, very low or high
sensors are not visible from the outside. temperatures, etc.), the system function may be limited - “failure to recognise
a vehicle”.
Rear Traffic Alert ■ Accessories additionally installed on the vehicle rear, such as bicycle carriers,
The Rear Traffic Alert (hereinafter referred to as system) warns when leaving a
can impair the system function.
parking space from a transverse parking space about any approaching vehi-
cles.
If necessary, the system tries to avoid a collision with automatic braking, or at
least to mitigate the consequences.
Wizard for “blind spot”monitoring
The wizard for“blind spot monitoring” (hereafter referred to as system) draws
attention to vehicles travelling in the same direction in the next lane in the so-
called blind spots.
The “blind spot” is an area that is not easily visible in a rear-view mirror or even
directly from the vehicle.
WARNING
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be
observed » page 212, in section Introduction.
At a speed over 15 km/h, the area alongside and behind the vehicle is moni-
tored by the system. At the same time, the distance and the difference in
speed between your vehicle and the other vehicles in the monitored area can
be measured.
When driving, the sensors monitor an area to the left and right to the extent of
a normal lane width.
If a vehicle is detected in the “blind spot” area, the system indicates this vehi-
Fig. 270 Infotainment screen: warning indicator/driving situation cle by the indicator light in the exterior mirror.
System constraint
Read and observe and on page 219 first.
The system is unable to recognise the specific lane width by means of sensors.
With the ignition switched on, the area next to and behind the vehicle is moni- Therefore this can e.g. in the following cases respond to a vehicle in a further
tored by the radar sensors of the system. If an approaching vehicle is detected lane.
▶ When driving on a road with narrow lanes or on the lane edge.
from the rear of the vehicle » Fig. 270, the system warns of this fact.
▶ Driving around a bend.
Warning - vehicles with parking aid
You will hear a continuous tone and one of the following warning levels ap- The system may also respond to objects on the roadside such as crash barri-
pears on the Infotainment screen » Fig. 270. ers, noise barriers or similar objects.
A An oncoming vehicle is detected. Do not continue driving backwards and Wizard for “Blind Spot”Monitoring - driving situations and warnings
check around the vehicle.
B A vehicle in the collision region is detected. Do not continue driving back-
wards .
Warning - vehicles without parking sensors
An acoustic signal is sounded and information for the driver to observe the
traffic behind is shown in the instrument cluster.
Automatic emergency braking
If the driver does not react to the warning and the system detects an impend-
ing collision, then this can trigger an automatic braking at a speed up to 10
km/h. A corresponding message is shown in the information cluster display.
Fig. 271 Driving situation / indicator light in the left outside mirror indi-
cates the driving situation
220 Driving
Note
The brightness of the indicator light is dependent on the setting of the vehi-
cle lighting. With the low or high beam on the brightness of the light will be
lower.
Activation / deactivation
Read and observe and on page 219 first.
The activation or deactivation of the system can be carried out in one of the
Fig. 272 Driving situation / indicator light in the right outside mirror in- following ways.
dicates the driving situation ▶ In the instrument cluster display » page 52, Assist systems menu item.
▶ In the infotainment system, in menu / → → Driver assistance (Applies to
Read and observe and on page 219 first. the “blind spot” monitoring assistant).
▶ In the Infotainment system, in menu / → → Parking and manoeuvring (Ap-
In the following situations, the indicator light in the outside mirror indicates a plies to Rear Traffic Alerts).
vehicle in the “blind spot”.
After switching off and switching on the ignition, depending on the setting pri-
▶ Your vehicle B is being overtaken by vehicle A » Fig. 271.
or to switching off the ignition, the systems remains activated / deactivated.
▶ Your vehicle C is overtaking vehicle D at a speed of max. 10 km high-
er» Fig. 272. If the speed during the overtaking is even higher, then there is Note
no warning by the warning light. When activating the wizard for “blind spot” monitoring, the warning lights
The warning display is always in the exterior mirror on the side of the vehicle illuminate briefly in the two exterior mirrors.
where a vehicle is detected in the “blind spot”.
The greater the speed difference between the two vehicles, the earlier the
Malfunctions
warning (by means of the warning light) regarding the vehicle that is overtak- Read and observe and on page 219 first.
ing you takes place.
If the systems are not available, an appropriate message appears in the display
Two warning levels of the instrument cluster.
light up - a vehicle has been detected in the “blind spot”.
Sensor covered / dirty
flash - a vehicle has been detected in the “blind spot” and the turn signal is
If the sensor is dirty or covered, a message indicating that there is no sensor
switched on.
view appears. Clean or remove the obstructing object from the sensor envi-
An advanced warning for vehicles with Lane Assist ronment » Fig. 269 on page 219.
flash also if the steering wheel is turned in the direction of the vehicle in
Systems unavailable
the “blind spot” . Therefore the Lane Assist » page 243 must be enabled and
If the systems are unavailable, a message regarding unavailability appears. Stop
the boundary line between the vehicles detected.
the vehicle, switch off the engine and then start it again. If the systems are still
If in this case your vehicle indicates crossing the boundary line, with a short vi- not available, seek the assistance of a specialist garage.
bration of the steering wheel.
Introduction
The rear view camera (following as system) helps the driver when parking and
manoeuvring by displaying the area behind the vehicle in the Infotainment
screen (hereinafter only referred to as screen).
There are four modes available for different situations during the park and ma- Fig. 273 Installation location of the camera / scanned area behind the
noeuvring action. The mode change is carried out using the function surfaces vehicle
on the screen» page 223.
Read and observe and on page 222 first.
WARNING
■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be The camera for capturing the area behind the vehicle is in the grip of the boot
observed » page 212, in section Introduction. lid » Fig. 273.
■ The system displays auxiliary boxes and lines regardless of the current ve- Area behind the vehicle » Fig. 273
hicle environment. The driver is responsible for checking that there is no A Detection range of the camera
obstacle in the selected parking space and that the vehicle can safely park B Area outside the detection range of the camera
in this space.
■ The camera may not be soiled or obscured, otherwise the system func- The system can assist the driver when parking and manoeuvring under the fol-
tion will be significantly affected - there is a risk of accident. For informa- lowing basic conditions.
tion on cleaning » page 258. The ignition is switched on.
The system is activated.
CAUTION The luggage compartment lid is completely closed.
■ The camera image is distorted by contrast with eyesight. For this reason, the The vehicle is travelling at less than 15 km/h.
screen display is only of limited use for estimating distances to following vehi- The area behind the vehicle is clearly visible.
cles.
The selected parking / manoeuvring area is clear and even.
■ Some items, such as narrow columns, chain link fences, lattices or roadway
irregularities may not be represented adequately in terms of screen resolution.
■ In a crash or damage the vehicle's rear camera can possibly deviate from the
correct position. If this is the case, have the sensor checked by a specialist ga-
rage.
Note
The camera can be equipped with a cleaning system » page 77. The spraying is
carried out automatically when the rear window is sprayed.
222 Driving
Activation/deactivation Function surfaces » Fig. 275
A Turns off the display of the area behind the vehicle
Fig. 274 B Mode - traverse parking
Button for activation / deactiva- C Mode - parallel parking
tion D Mode - driving up to a trailer / distance monitoring
E Mode - monitor the area behind the vehicle (wide view)
F Screen settings - brightness, contrast, colour
G Parking aid (mini display)
Switch thumbnail display on/off
Switch to full screen display
Read and observe and on page 222 first.
Orientation lines and lane
Activation
The system is activated by selecting reverse gear or pressing the symbol Fig. 276
button» Fig. 274. Orientation and lane lines
When activating, an alarm sounds and the symbol illuminates in the button.
The mode for traverse parking is displayed on the screen.
Deactivation
The system is deactivated when you press button , switch off the ignition,
put the selector lever in position P, or when you drive forwards at a speed of
more than 15 km/h (the symbol in the button goes out).
Read and observe and on page 222 first.
Function surfaces In the modes for transverse and parallel parking guidance, orientation lines for
the assessment of distance and lane lines are displayed on the screen.
Fig. 275
Function surfaces Screen display » Fig. 276
A The distance is about 40 cm (safety distance limit).
B The distance is about 100 cm.
C The distance is about 200 cm.
D The lane lines terminate approximately 300 cm behind the vehicle.
The distance may vary slightly depending on the load of the vehicle and the
road inclination.
Read and observe and on page 222 first. The distance between the side lines corresponds approximately to the vehicle
width including mirrors.
It is possible to adjust the parking and manoeuvring mode by means of the
function surfaces.
This mode supports the driver when reverse parking in a parking space that is
parallel to the road.
Parking manoeuvre
› When driving past a parking space push the button » Fig. 274 on
page 223.
Fig. 277 Screen display › Tap the function surface C » Fig. 275 on page 223.
Read and observe and on page 222 first. The screen shows auxiliary boxes for both road sides.
This mode supports the driver when reverse parking in a parking space that is › Switch on the indicator for the side on which you want to park.
transverse to the road. The auxiliary boxes for the opposite side will be hidden.
Parking manoeuvre › Stop the vehicle stop so that there are no obstructions in the gap between
› Select a suitable parking space. the auxiliary boxes 1 » Fig. 278 and the rear box does not extend over the
› Press the » Fig. 274 on page 223 button. side of the parking space 2 (e.g. kerb).
› At the selected parking space 1 » Fig. 277 slowly drive past and stop the ve- › Turn the steering wheel in the direction recommended 3 until the colour of
hicle. the trapezoidal frame 4 is green. Hold the steering wheel in this position.
› Engage reverse gear. › Once the arrow 5 appears on the screen, reverse (when reversing in the
› Adjust the steering wheel so that the lane lines lead into the parking space parking space the arrow will get shorter).
2. The screen shows the yellow lane lines 6 and the green line 7 .
› Carefully move backward and steer so that the yellow lines are still leading
into the parking space. If the steering angle is corrected while reversing then the red line 8 appears
(required roadway alignment).
224 Driving
› In this case, adjust the steering wheel so that the yellow lines 6 the red line C Line for approaching a trailer draw bar
8 fade into each other. D Trailer draw bar
› Carefully reverse until appears on the screen or the green line 7 is con-
The line C moves depending on the steering angle and indicate the roadway
gruent with the lateral boundary of the parking space (e.g. kerb) 2 .
on which the vehicle would take with the current steering wheel position.
› Stop the vehicle and steer opposite until the yellow lines 6 the red line 8
fade into each other (required roadway alignment). Hold the steering wheel Vehicles without towing hitch
in this position. If your vehicle is not factory equipped with a towing hitch, a red line for moni-
Orientation lines are displayed » Fig. 276 on page 223 on the screen. toring the distance to obstacles is displayed on the screen at a distance of 40
cm behind the vehicle.
› Carefully move backwards.
› Stop the vehicle when appears on the screen, or at a safe distance from Mode - monitor the area behind the vehicle
the obstacle situated behind the vehicle.
Read and observe and on page 222 first.
Note
The guidance in the parking space is cancelled due to the system when the In this mode, the area behind the vehicle is shown on the screen.
steering wheel is set for a period of time against the required road direction. The mode is suited for the entire view of the situation behind the vehicle.
The parking is to be started again.
Introduction
Fig. 279
Screen display Park Assist (following referred to system) helps drivers park in suitable parallel
and perpendicular parking places or also to manoeuvre out of parallel parking
spaces.
The system takes over the steering movements only when parking or leaving a
parking space. The driver operates the brake, accelerator or clutch pedal and
the shift / selector lever.
The state in which the steering wheel is operated by the system, is referred to
Read and observe and on page 222 first. as parking operation.
In this mode, the area behind the vehicle is shown at the top of the screen. The Park Assist is an extension of the parking aid » page 215 and operates on
the basis of data collected by the ultrasonic sensors.
Vehicles with towing hitch
If your vehicle is factory fitted with a tow-bar, this mode supports the driver For this reason, the chapter on the parking aid is to be read carefully and
when the vehicle approaches a trailer draw bar. the safety notes are to be observed.
CAUTION
The correct evaluation of the parking space and the parking procedure de- Read and observe and on page 226 first.
pends on the circumference of the wheels on the vehicle.
■ The system only works correctly if the vehicle is fitted with the wheel size The system support is provided in the following manner.
approved by ŠKODA AUTO. ▶ While the parking space search is going on, a measurement and evaluation of
■ Do not use the system if snow chains or an emergency wheel are fitted. the parking space size is completed.
■ If wheels other than those approved by ŠKODA AUTO are fitted, the result- ▶ The display of the instrument cluster (hereinafter only display) shows suita-
ing position of the vehicle in the parking space can differ slightly. This can be ble parking spaces and a parking mode is recommended.
avoided by readjusting the system at a specialist garage. ▶ The display shows instructions and information before the start and during
the parking.
CAUTION ▶ Based on the calculated road surface, the front wheels will be automatically
If other vehicles are parked behind or on the kerb, the system can drive your rotated during the parking.
vehicle over the kerb or up to the kerb - there is a risk of damage to the
Conditions for the system function
wheels. Intervene in good time if necessary.
The system can look for a parking space only if the following basic conditions
Note are met.
■ We recommend performing the parking at a safe speed to about 5 km/h. The system is activated.
■ The parking procedure can be stopped at any time by pressing the The vehicle is travelling at less than 40 km/h.
» Fig. 280 on page 226 button or by a steering intervention. The vehicle is travelling at less than 20 km/h.
The distance to a number of parked vehicles is approximately 0.5 - 1.5 m.
TCS is activated » page 214.
The system can only carry out the parking procedure if the following basic
conditions are met.
The vehicle is travelling at less than 7 km/h.
The parking procedure takes less than 6 minutes.
There is no driver intervention in the automatic steering operation.
TCS is activated » page 214.
226 Driving
The TCS does not engage. Switch to park mode
No trailer or other accessory is connected to the trailer socket.
Activation/deactivation
The system can be activated/deactivated by pressing the button» Fig. 280.
When the system is activated, the symbol illuminates in the button.
The system searches for a parking space in a number of parallel and transverse
parked vehicles on the passenger or driver's side. Fig. 281 Menus with the parking modes: Display
Process with the parking space search
Read and observe and on page 226 first.
› Slowly drive past a row of parked vehicles.
› Activate the system with the button» Fig. 280 on page 226. While the parking space search is going on and before the start of the parking,
The system will automatically search for a parking space on the passenger a menu may appear showing other suitable parking modes.
side. Parking modes » Fig. 281
If the system finds a parking space, the recommended parking mode is dis- To park backwards in a parallel parking space
played » Fig. 282 on page 228 or » Fig. 283 on page 228 - . To park backwards in a traverse parking space
Activate the turn signal on the driver's side if you wish to look for a parking To park forwards in a traverse parking space
space on this side of the road. The display changes and the system searches The parking mode can be changed by pressing the » Fig. 280 on page 226
for a parking space on the driver's side. button.
Note After switching through all parking modes offered, an additional press of the
If the symbol (km / h) is shown in the display while you are looking for a button deactivates the system.
parking space, the vehicle speed should be reduced below 40 km / hr (parallel If you want to return to the originally recommended parking mode, press the
parking) or below 20 km / hr (Transverse parking). button again.
Read and observe and on page 226 first. As soon as the parking procedure is complete, an audible signal sounds and the
following message appears in the display.
The system supports the driver when reverse parking in the parking space
found in a number of traverse and parallel parked vehicles.
Display view » Fig. 282 or » Fig. 283
Parking space recognised with the information to drive on
Parking space recognised with the information to reverse
Note to drive on to the parking space
Note to reverse to the parking space
Process for reverse parking
The parking space found is shown in the display » Fig. 282 - or » Fig. 283 -
.
228 Driving
Parking forwards The further procedure is analogous to that for reverse parking.
› Follow the system instructions shown in the display.
Fig. 284 As soon as the parking procedure is complete, an audible signal sounds and the
To park forwards in a traverse parking space: Display following message appears in the display.
If the parking space is too small, it is not possible to use the system to leave
the parking space. A corresponding message is shown in the information clus-
ter display.
Operation
Operation description
Fig. 286
Cruise control system controls
230 Driving
After the start of the regulation, the CCS regulates the vehicle to the current Function
speed and the warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster.
The automatic control interruption occurs if any of the following conditions
are met.
▶ The brake pedal is operated.
▶ When one of the brake assist systems (e.g. ESC) intervenes.
▶ Through an airbag deployment.
WARNING
■ Always deactivate the cruise control system after use to prevent the sys-
tem being switched on unintentionally.
■ The control does not resume if the set speed for the existing traffic con-
Fig. 287 Instrument cluster display: examples of speed limiter status
ditions is too high. displays
Fig. 288
Controls the speed limiter (var-
iant with CCS)
Read and observe on page 231 first. Fig. 289 Controls the speed limiter (variant with ACC)
Overview of the control elements of the speed limiter » Fig. 288 Read and observe on page 231 first.
A Activate CCS (required condition for the subsequent activation of
the speed limiter) Overview of the control elements of the speed limiter » Fig. 289
To activate the speed limiter, set the switch to position , then 1 Activate ACC (required condition for the subsequent activation
press D . of the speed limiter)
Interrupt control (sprung position) To activate the speed limiter, set the lever to position , then
press B to operate.
Speed Limiter disable (set limit delete)
2 Resume controla) / increase speed limit by 1 km/h at a time
B Take control again a)/ increase speed limit - press (in increments of
(sprung position)
1 km/h), hold (in increments of 10 km/h)
3 Interrupt control (sprung position)
C Start control/ reduce speed limit - press (in increments of 1 km/h),
hold (in increments of 10 km/h) 4 Disable speed Limiter (delete set limit )
D Switching between CCS and speed limiter 5 Increase speed limit by 10 km/h at a time
a)
6 Decrease speed limit by 10 km/h at a time
If no speed limit is set, the current speed is set as the speed limit.
A Start control / reduce speed limit in increments of 1 km/h
Note B Switching between ACC and speed limiter
By pressing the button D » Fig. 288 during the regulation this is cancelled and a) If no speed limit is set, the current speed is set as the speed limit.
the CCS is activated.
Introduction
The Adaptive Cruise Control (hereinafter referred to as ACC) maintains the set
speed and at the same time the distance to the vehicle ahead without the ac-
celerator or brake pedal being pressed.
232 Driving
The front of the vehicle and the distance to the vehicle ahead is monitored by Settings in Infotainment
a radar sensor » page 212.
The state in which the ACC maintains the speed or the proximity is described
Read and observe on page 233 first.
as control from here on. › In the infotainment system, in menu / tap on function surface → Driv-
er assistance.
WARNING
■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be ■ ACC (adaptive cruise control) - Setting for the ACC
observed » page 212, in section Introduction. ■ Driving progr.: - Adjustment of vehicle acceleration when ACC is activated
■ The driver must always be ready to take over the operation of the accel- (this setting is made for vehicles with driving mode selection » page 240)
erator and brake pedal. ■ Last distance selected - Last selected distance level on/off
■ The ACC does not react when approaching a stationary obstacle, such as ■ Distance - Set the distance to the vehicles ahead
traffic jams, vehicle breakdowns or vehicles waiting at a traffic light.
■ The ACC does not respond to crossing or oncoming objects. Operation
■ If the ACC does not decelerate fast enough, immediately apply the vehi-
cle's foot brake.
WARNING
For safety reasons, do not use the ACC under the following conditions.
■ When driving in turning lanes, motorway exits or construction sites, to
avoid an unwanted acceleration to the stored speed.
■ When visibility is poor, (e.g. fog, heavy rain, thick snowfall).
■ When road conditions are poor (e.g. ice, slippery road, gravel, dirt road).
■ Driving in “sharp” corners or in steep gradients / on steep inclines.
■ When driving through places where metal objects (such as metal build- Fig. 290 Instrument cluster display: Examples of ACC displays
ings, railway tracks, etc.) can be found.
■ When driving through very divided and enclosed spaces (such as large-
capacity garages, car ferries, tunnels and the like.).
Note
■ The ACC is designed primarily for use on motorways.
■ The ACC reduces the speed by automatically releasing the accelerator or by
means of a braking procedure as appropriate. If the brakes are used for an au-
tomatic speed reduction at any moments, then the brake light illuminates.
■ In case of failure of more than one brake light on the vehicle or on the con-
nected trailer, the ACC becomes unavailable.
■ The control automatically cancels the engagement of the brake supportive
assistance systems (e.g. ESC) or when the maximum permitted engine speed is
exceeded.
Note
Some ACC notifications in the display of the instrument cluster may be hidden
by notifications for other functions. An ACC notification automatically appears
Fig. 291 Instrument cluster display: Examples of ACC status displays
for a brief moment when there is a change in status of the ACC.
Read and observe on page 233 first.
Automatic stopping and starting
The ACC makes it possible to set a speed of 30-160 or 30-210 km/h (depend- Read and observe on page 233 first.
ing on equipment fitted) as well as the distance to preceding vehicles.
The ACC can detect a vehicle that is up to approx. 150 m ahead using the radar Vehicles with an automatic transmission can decelerate to a standstill and
sensor. start moving again using the ACC.
ACC status displays » Fig. 291 If the preceding vehicle starts moving again after a long break, then to contin-
ue the regulation press the accelerator pedal or lever to set the lever in
Regulation is inactive (in the colour display the digits of speed limits is
» page 235 position.
shown in grey).
Regulation active - no vehicle detected (in the colour display the digits of
the speed limits are highlighted).
Regulation deactivated - no speed stored.
Regulation active - vehicle detected (in the colour display the digits of the
speed limits are highlighted).
Note to reduce speed
If the delay of the ACC is insufficient in relation to the vehicle in front, the
warning light lights up in the instrument cluster and the display shows a
message to engage the brake pedal.
234 Driving
Operation overview Start control
Read and observe on page 233 first.
The desired speed can be set or changed using the control lever » Fig. 292 on The display of the instrument cluster shows line 2 » Fig. 290 on page 233,
page 235. which indicates the proximity.
Setting/changing the speed by increments of 10 km/h at a time () - re- › Using the switch on the lever, adjust the line 2 to the desired dis-
quirements tance.
The ACC is activated. Note
Increasing/reducing the speed by increments of 1 km/h at a time (/ ■ If the distance is changed in the Infotainment, the change will only come into
- requirements effect after a subsequent activation of the ACC.
■ The distance setting is stored (depending on Infotainment model) in active
The ACC is activated.
user account personalisation » page 53.
Vehicle control takes place.
Changing the speed by adopting the current speed () - requirements Special driving situations
The ACC is activated.
The vehicle is moving at a speed other than that which is stored.
Note
■ If during control the speed is increased by pressing the accelerator, control is
temporarily stopped. Upon releasing the accelerator, control is automatically
resumed.
■ If during control the speed is reduced by applying the brake, control is stop-
ped. Control needs to be restarted in order to resume » page 235.
■ If the vehicle is controlled by a lower speed than the stored speed, then
the current speed is stored by pressing the button again and the speed is
Fig. 293 Cornering / narrow vehicles or vehicles travelling side by side
reduced in increments of 1 km/h.
The ACC allows you to set five distance steps to the preceding vehicle.
The distance is adjustable in a range of 1 to 3.6 s.
Adjusting the distance in the Infotainment system
› Infotainment in the ACC menu, select the Distance: menu item and set the dis-
tance » page 233, Settings in Infotainment.
236 Driving
Overtaking and towing
Read and observe on page 233 first.
When overtaking
When your vehicle is being controlled at a speed that is lower than the set
speed and the turn signal is operated, ACC assesses this situation as meaning
that the driver wishes to overtake. The ACC automatically accelerates the ve-
hicle, thereby reducing the proximity to a vehicle ahead.
If your vehicle changes to the overtaking lane and no vehicle is detected
Fig. 294 Lane changes of other vehicles / stationary vehicles ahead, ACC accelerates until the set speed is reached and then keeps it con-
stant.
Read and observe on page 233 first.
Acceleration can be cancelled at any time by touch on the brake pedal or
The following (and similar) situations require special attention and possibly the pressing the button on the lever » Fig. 292 on page 235.
intervention of the driver (braking, accelerating etc.).
Towing a trailer
When cornering When towing, or if another accessory is connected to the trailer socket, ACC
When driving into or driving out of long corners, it could be that a vehicle is control is set with a lower rate. The manner of driving should therefore be
travelling in the adjacent lane and is scanned by the radar » Fig. 293 - . The adapted to this limitation.
host vehicle is then controlled according to this vehicle.
Malfunctions
Narrow vehicles or vehicles travelling side by side
A narrow or offset vehicle driving can only be recognized by the ACC if this is Read and observe on page 233 first.
located in the scanning range of the radar » Fig. 293 - .
If ACC is not available, the warning light appears in the display of the instru-
Other vehicles changing lanes ment cluster and an appropriate message is shown.
Vehicles that change onto the lane with a small distance » Fig. 294 - may not
be detected by ACC in good time. Sensor covered / dirty
If the sensor cover or the sensor is dirty or covered, a message appears on the
Stationary vehicles instrument cluster display stating there is no sensor view. Clean the sensor
The ACC does not detect stationary objects! When a vehicle detected by the cover or remove the obstacles » Fig. 262 on page 212.
ACC turns or sheers off and there is a stationary vehicle in front of this vehicle,
» Fig. 294 - the ACC does not respond to the stationary vehicle. If there is no sensor view in the winter, the snow on the sensor under the cov-
er could be the reason. The ACC is functional again after the snow melts away
Vehicles with special load or special body parts from the sensor.
Other vehicles with a load or with body parts protruding from the sides, back
or top of the vehicle contour may not be detected by the ACC. ACC not available
If the ACC is unavailable, a message concerning the unavailability appears.
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and then start it again. If ACC continues
to be unavailable, seek the assistance of a specialist garage.
238 Driving
Warning and automatic braking Automatic braking - a stationary obstacle
If the driver does not respond to the advance warning of the risk of a collision
with a stationary obstacle in a speed range of approximately 30 km/h to 60
Fig. 296
km/h, the system initiates automatic braking.
Instrument cluster display: Advance warning or
emergency braking at low speed Information on automatic braking
If an automatic brake intervention is triggered by the system, the pressure in
the brake system increases and the brake pedal cannot be operated with the
normal pedal stroke.
The automatic braking interventions can be cancelled by pressing the acceler-
ator pedal or by means of a steering intervention.
If the system is not available, an appropriate message appears in the display of mode Eco
the instrument cluster.
Sensor covered / dirty
Read and observe on page 240 first.
If the sensor cover or the sensor is dirty or covered, a message appears on the This mode is suitable for a relaxed style of driving and helps to save fuel.
instrument cluster display stating there is no sensor view. Clean the sensor
cover or remove the obstacles » Fig. 262 on page 212. Selecting this mode primarily affects the function of the following systems.
If there is no sensor view in the winter, the snow on the sensor under the cov- Drive
er could be the reason. The system is functional again after the snow melts Vehicle acceleration is more relaxed than in Normal mode.
away from the sensor. The recommended gear is controlled such to achieve the lowest possible fuel
System unavailable consumption » page 47.
If the system is unavailable, a message concerning the unavailability appears. If the START-STOP system is deactivated manually» page 203, this will be au-
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and then start it again. If the system tomatically activated.
still is not available, seek the assistance of a specialist garage.
The automatic gearbox is set automatically to mode E » page 208.
Select the driving mode (Driving Mode Selection) Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Acceleration occurs more relaxed than in Normal » page 232mode with distance
Introduction control.
Xenon headlight
By selecting the driving mode, the driving behaviour can be adapted to the de- The system is in economic mode » page 70. The headlamps are in basic setting
sired mode of operation. and do not adapt to the direction of travel.
the following modes Eco. Comfort. normal. Sports and individualare available. Air conditioning (Climatronic)
The Comfort mode is only available on vehicles with the adaptive chassis ( DCC). The air conditioning is controlled so as to save energy. For this reason, for ex-
ample, it may take longer to reach the desired interior temperature in mode
WARNING Normal.
Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance sys-
tems» page 212, in section Introduction. Note
The maximum vehicle acceleration (kick down function) is possible also in driv-
ing mode Eco.
Adaptive chassis (DCC)
Read and observe on page 240 first.
The adaptive chassis (hereafter known as DCC) provides the ability to adjust
the shock characteristics for the sporty, normal or comfortable driving when
the corresponding control mode is selected.
240 Driving
Mode Comfort Mode individual
Read and observe on page 240 first. Read and observe on page 240 first.
This mode is suitable for driving on roads with poorer surface or for long mo- In the mode Individual each system can be set independently » page 242, Set-
torway journeys. tings for individualmode.
Mode Sports
Read and observe on page 240 first.
Read and observe on page 240 first. sioned closely over the body.
▶ Opened electrically powered door windows are closed automatically up to a
In the Individual mode, the following menu items can be set. gap of about 5 cm from the edge.
▶ The sliding/tilting roof is closed.
■ DCC: - Set the shock characteristics
■ Steering: - Set the power steering characteristics Once the critical driving situation has passed, the tension on the seatbelts will
■ Drive: - Set the driving characteristics be released again.
■ ACC: - Set the vehicle acceleration when adaptive cruise control is activated
The system operates at two levels of protection.
■ Dynamic Cornering light: - Set the characteristics of the Xenon headlights
■ Air conditioning: - Set the Climatronic characteristics The first level of protection
■ Reset mode - Setting for all menu items in the Individual mode to Normal The system already intervenes in situations that may occur during dynamic
■ Cancel - Keep the current settings driving. As a result, this primarily helps to keep the driver and the passenger in
■ Reset - cancels all menu items in the Normal mode the correct seated position.
The first protection level can be deactivated in one of the following ways.
Proactive occupant protection (Crew Protect Assist) ▶ In the infotainment system, in menu / tap on function surface → Driv-
er assistance.
Introduction ▶ Deactivating the TCS» page 214.
▶ By selecting the driving mode Sport » page 241.
ProActive passenger protection (following known as system) increases pas-
Provided that the driving mode Sportis not selected, the system is activated
senger protection in the front seats in situations that could lead to vehicle im-
over the two levels of protection after switching the ignition off and on again.
pact or overturning.
The second level of protection
WARNING The system intervenes only if the situation is evaluated as critical, such as
Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance sys- when panic braking at high speeds.
tems » page 212, in section Introduction.
This level of protection cannot be deactivated.
Note Vehicles with the Front Assist system
■ The system component service life is monitored electronically. Further infor- Using this information, a system intervention may also occur when there is the
mation » page 41, Safety systems. danger of a collision with an obstacle detected in front of the vehicle.
■ If the front passenger front airbag is deactivated, the belt tensioning func-
tion for the front passenger seat is switched off.
242 Driving
Spurhalteassistent (Lane Assist) CAUTION
Do not attach any stickers or similar objects in front of the sensor on the wind-
Introduction screen to avoid impairing the functions of the system.
Note
Fig. 298
Sensor for Lane Assist ■ The system is designed for driving on motorways and roads with adequate
longitudinal markings.
■ The system can detect both continuous and broken lines.
Settings in Infotainment
Read and observe and on page 243 first.
WARNING
■ Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance
systems » page 212, in section Introduction.
■ Lane Assist can help you keep the vehicle within the lane. However, it
does not steer the vehicle for you. The driver retains full responsibility for
steering at all times.
■ Some objects or markings on the road can be recognised as the boundary
lines - an erroneous steering intervention may be the result.
Fig. 299 Monochromatic display of the instrument cluster: Examples of
WARNING
system indications
The system may not be able to recognise the boundary line, or recognise it
incorrectly, for example, in the following situations.
■ When visibility is poor, (e.g. fog, heavy rain, thick snowfall).
■ When driving in “sharp” bends.
■ The sensor is blinded by the sun or oncoming traffic.
■ The field of view of the sensor is limited by an obstacle or a preceding ve-
hicle.
244 Driving
Sensor covered / dirty The traffic jam assistant is an extension of the systems Lane Assist » page 243
If the windscreen is dirty, iced or misted up in the sensor area, a message ap- and ACC » page 232 and works by using the functions of these two systems.
pears indicating that there is no sensor view. Clean the windscreen or remove
For this reason, the chapters on System Lane Assist and ACC are to be
the obstacles from the sensor area.
read carefully and the safety notes are to be observed.
System unavailable
If the system is unavailable, a message concerning the unavailability appears. Operating conditions
Try to re-activate the machine. If the system still is not available, seek the as-
sistance of a specialist garage. Read and observe on page 245 first.
System fault The system activation occurs automatically whilst fulfilling the following
In the case of a system fault, an error message appears. Seek help from a spe- basic conditions.
cialist garage. Lane Assist with the adaptive tracking is enabled, the boundary lines on
both sides are recognized lane » page 243.
Request to take over steering
If the system detects that there are no hands are on the steering wheel, this ACC is activated and the regulation » page 232 follows.
will not work properly. You will be prompted to take over steering. Place your The vehicle speed is below 65 km/h.
hands on the steering wheel.
Assistant for emergencies
Traffic jam assistant
Introduction
Introduction
WARNING
WARNING ■ Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance
■ Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance systems » page 212, in section Introduction.
systems » page 212, in section Introduction. ■ The system is intended for emergency situations when the driver is sud-
■ The driver must always have hands on the steering wheel and be ready to denly unable to take over the steering task. Therefore, never try to test out
take over steering of the vehicle himself (accelerate or brake). the system - there is a risk of an accident!
Note Function
The system is designed primarily for use on motorways.
Read and observe on page 245 first.
Function The assistant for emergencies (following known as system) detects inactivity
Read and observe on page 245 first. of the driver, which for example can be caused by a sudden loss of conscious-
ness. The system then performs measures as safely as possible to decelerate
The traffic jam assistant (referred to as system) helps to keep the vehicle with- the vehicle to a stop.
in the lane at speeds below 65 km/h while keeping the distance to the vehicle The system is only available for vehicles with Automatic transmission.
ahead.
The system is only available for vehicles with Automatic transmission.
The traffic sign recognition (following known as system) shows certain traffic › In the infotainment system, in menu / tap on function surface → Driv-
signs (e.g. speed limits) on the display of the instrument cluster and if necessa- er assistance.
ry warns against excessive speeds. ■ Dynamic Road Sign Display - Settings for the Dynamic Road Sign Display
■ Show in instrument cluster - Activation/deactivation of the additional traffic
signs in the display of the instrument cluster
■ Speed warning: - Setting a warning when the speed limit is exceeded
■ Warning at over - Setting warning timing with the option to exceed the speed
limit in a range from 0 to 20 km / h
246 Driving
■ Trailer recognition The system can display the following (vertical) traffic signs where identified.
■ Show road signs relevant to trailers - Activating / deactivating the display of road ▶ Speed limit.
signs relevant to trailers ▶ Overtaking prohibited.
■ Use for route calculation - Activation / deactivation of taking the trailer into ac-
Additional signs, such as 'when wet' or signs which only apply for a limited time
count for route calculation in navigation
can also be displayed.
■ Maximum speed for trailer - Set the top speed for towing a trailer
The system displays only traffic signs that are in the “viewing area” of the sen-
Operation sor » Fig. 301.
Data from the sensor is supplemented by information from the Infotainment
Fig. 301 Navigation. This is the reason why traffic signs with maximum speeds can also
Sensor for Dynamic Road Sign be shown on sections of roads which do not have any traffic signs.
Display
Warning when exceeding the speed limit
The warning when exceeding the permissible speed (based on the detected
traffic sign) can be activated and set in Infotainment» page 246.
Mode when towing a trailer
For vehicles with a factory-fitted towing device, in the Infotainment it is possi-
ble to enable or disable the relevant traffic signs for trailer operation and the
top speed for towing a trailer » page 246, Settings in Infotainment.
Note
If, for example, you are on a motorway without speed limits, then a road sign
relating to the end of all limits is shown in the instrument cluster display.
Additional display
Read and observe on page 246 first.
If the menu item Road sign is currently not shown » Fig. 302 on page 247 - ,
Fig. 302 Instrument cluster display: Display examples the road sign with the speed limit will appear in the upper display area of the
instrument cluster » Fig. 302 on page 247 - , .
Read and observe on page 246 first.
If several traffic signs are detected simultaneously, in some cases the next
Description of indications and displayed traffic signs traffic sign will also be displayed in the colour display - » Fig. 302 on page 247 -
.
Display » Fig. 302
Display of detected traffic signs » page 49, Driving data (Multifunction All detected traffic signs can be displayed via the multifunction display in the
display) menu item Traffic Sign Recognition » Fig. 302 on page 247 - .
Additional display (monochromatic display) This additional function can be activated/deactivated in Infotainment
Additional display (colour display) » page 246.
WARNING
Malfunction and information messages
■ Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance
Read and observe on page 246 first. systems » page 212, in section Introduction.
■ For the driving ability is always the driver's responsibility. Never drive if
If the system is not available, an appropriate message appears in the display of you feel tired.
the instrument cluster. ■ The system may not detect all cases where a break is needed.
■ Therefore, take regular, sufficient breaks during long trips.
Sensor dirty/covered
■ There will be no system warning during the so-called micro-sleep.
If a note appears in relation to the cleaning of the windscreen, clean the wind-
screen or remove the obstruction from the sensor area.
Note
System fault ■ In some situations, the system can evaluate the steering behaviour incorrect-
If an error message appears, seek assistance from a specialist garage.
ly and therefore falsely display a break recommendation.
System limitation ■ The system is designed primarily for use on motorways.
The system displays a message about system limitation in the following cases.
▶ The map documents are not up to date.
Tyre pressure monitoring
▶ The vehicle is located in an area for which no map documents are present.
Introduction
Fatigue detection system
The tyre pressure monitoring function (following known as system) monitors
The fatigue detection system (hereinafter simply the system) advises the driv-
the tyre pressure while driving.
er to take a break from driving when driver fatigue can be detected based on
the driver's steering behaviour. If the tyre inflation pressure changes, the warning light lights up in the in-
strument cluster and an audible signal sounds» page 41.
The system evaluates the steering behaviour at speeds of 60-200 km/h.
The system can only function properly if the tyres have the prescribed inflation
Conditions under which a break from driving is detected by the system
▶ The vehicle is stopped and the ignition switched off.
pressure and these pressure values are stored in the system.
▶ The vehicle is stopped, the seat belt removed and the driver's door opened. Always save the tyre pressure values in the system if one of the following
▶ The vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes. events occurs.
▶ Change of tyre pressure values.
If none of these conditions are met or if the driving style is not changed, the ▶ Change one or more wheels.
system recommends a driving break again after 15 minutes. ▶ Change in position of a wheel on the vehicle.
The system can be activated/deactivated in menu / → → Driver assis- ▶ The warning light in the instrument cluster.
tance.
248 Driving
WARNING Note
■ Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance When the warning light appears in the instrument cluster, the affected tyre
systems » page 212, in section Introduction. can be displayed on the infotainment system » Fig. 303.
■ Having the correct tyre inflation pressure is always the driver's responsi-
bility. Tyre pressure should be checked regularly » page 272.
■ The system cannot warn in case of very rapid tyre inflation pressure loss,
e.g. in case of sudden tyre damage.
■ Before storing the pressures, the tyres must be inflated to the specified
inflation pressure » page 272. If the wrong pressure valuesare stored, the
system may not issue any warnings, even if the tyre pressure is too low.
CAUTION
To ensure proper system function, the tire pressure values must be stored ev-
ery 10 000 km or 1x a year.
Fig. 303
Button for storage/example of
the screen: a change in the front
left tyre pressure is indicated
WARNING
■ Take care with the towing device - it may cause injury.
■ When swinging out the ball rod away from the central area of the rear
bumper, there is a danger of injury to the legs.
■ Do not manipulate the release lever as long as a trailer or another acces-
sory is coupled to the tow bar. The tow bar could come loose - risk of acci-
dent and injury.
■ If the warning light does not turn green, or the tow bar cannot engage,
then do not use the tow bar. Seek help from a specialist garage.
Fig. 304 Ball rod: Swivel out/in
Note
Read and observe on page 250 first. When not using the towing device, always swing the tow bar under the bump-
er.
The pivotable tow bar cannot be removed. Its correct latching in both posi-
tions is indicated by a warning light.
Vertical load with mounted accessories
Swing out the tow bar
› Pull the release lever A in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 304 » . The tow Read and observe on page 250 first.
bar pivots in the direction of arrow 2 and the warning light beside the han- When using the accessories (e.g. bicycle carrier), the maximum length and the
dle flashes red. permissible total weight including load must be considered.
250 Driving
The maximum length of the mounted accessories (from the ball of the towing › Open the socket cap and insert the plug of the trailer (accessories) into the
device) is 70 cm . 13-pin socket A » Fig. 305. (If the trailer / accessories have a 7-pin connec-
tor, use a corresponding reduction piece from the ŠKODA Original Accesso-
The permissible total weight of the installed accessories, including load, cor-
ries).
responds to the maximum trailer load on trailers, but must not exceed 75 kg.
This also applies if the maximum trailer load on trailers is 90 kg. › Suspend the breakaway cable of the trailer at the safety eyelet B (the
breakaway cable must sag in all trailer settings in view of the vehicle).
This value applies when the centre of gravity of the load is a maximum of 30
Uncoupling takes place in reverse order.
cm from the ball head of the tow bar.
As the distance of the centre gravity of the load from the ball head of the Exterior mirrors
towing device increases, the permissible total weight of the accessory, in- You should have additional exterior mirrors fitted if you are not able to see the
cluding the load, decreases (e.g. at a distance of 60 cm from the ball head, traffic behind the trailer using the standard rear-view mirrors.
the permissible weight decreases approximately by half). Headlights
The front of the vehicle may lift up when a trailer (accessory) is being towed
CAUTION
and the headlights may dazzle other road users. Set the range of the headlights
Never exceed the permissible total weight of the accessories incl. load and » page 68, Operating the lights1).
maximum length of the accessories – There is a risk of damage to the towing
device. Power supply of the trailer / accessory power system
In the electrical connection between the vehicle and trailer (accessory), the
Note trailer (accessories) is supplied with power from the vehicle (with ignition
We recommend that you use accessories from ŠKODA Original Accessories. switched on and off).
With the engine switched off, the vehicle battery is discharged by the connec-
Using hitch ted consumers.
Trailer (accessory) connect and disconnect At low charge state of the vehicle battery, the power supply to the trailer (ac-
cessories) is interrupted.
Fig. 305 WARNING
Housing of the 13 pin socket, ■ An improperly connected electrical installation of the trailer (accessories)
safety eyelet may result in an accident or serious injury from electrical shock.
■ Do not make any adjustments to the electrical installation of the vehicle
and the trailer (accessories) - risk of an accident or serious injury from elec-
trical shock.
■ After the electrical connection between the vehicle and trailer (accesso-
ry) the trailer / accessory lights should be checked for function.
■ Never use the securing eye to tow - risk of accident!
Connect / disconnect
› Swing out the tow bar » page 250.
› Place the trailer (the accessory) onto the ball head.
Trailer
The permissible trailer load must not be exceeded under any circumstances.
Permissible trailer load - Superb
Permissible trailer weight, braked (kg)
Engine Gearbox Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg)
with gradients up to 12%.
1.4 ltr./92 kW TSI MG 1600 700
MG 1600 710
1.4 l/110 kW TSI ACT MG 4x4 1800 750
DSG 1600 720
MG 1600 710
1.4 ltr./110 kW TSI
DSG 1600 710
MG 1800 740
1.8 ltr./132 kW TSI
DSG 1800 740
2.0 ltr./162 kW TSI DSG 2000 750
2.0 ltr./206 kW TSI DSG 4x4 2200 750
MG 1500 750
1.6 ltr./88 kW TDI CR MG (Green Line) 1500 750
DSG 1500 750
252 Driving
Permissible trailer weight, braked (kg)
Engine Gearbox Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg)
with gradients up to 12%.
MG 2000 750
2.0 ltr./110 kW TDI CR MG 4x4 2200 750
DSG 2000 750
2.0 ltr./130 kW TDI CR DSG 2000 750
MG 2000 750
2.0 ltr./140 kW TDI CR DSG 2000 750
DSG 4x4 2200 750
Permissible trailer load - Superb Estate
Permissible trailer weight, braked (kg)
Engine Gearbox Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg)
with gradients up to 12%.
1.4 ltr./92 kW TSI MG 1600 720
MG 1600 730
1.4 l/110 kW TSI ACT MG 4x4 1800 750
DSG 1600 730
MG 1600 720
1.4 ltr./110 kW TSI
DSG 1600 730
MG 1800 750
1.8 ltr./132 kW TSI
DSG 1800 750
2.0 ltr./162 kW TSI DSG 2000 750
2.0 ltr./206 kW TSI DSG 4x4 2200 750
MG 1500 750
1.6 ltr./88 kW TDI CR MG (Green Line) 1500 750
DSG 1500 750
MG 2000 750
2.0 l/110 kW TDI CR MG 4x4 2200 750
DSG 2000 750
2.0 ltr./130 kW TDI CR DSG 2000 750
MG 2000 750
2.0 ltr./140 kW TDI CR DSG 2000 750
DSG 4x4 2200 750
WARNING
Always drive particularly carefully with the trailer.
CAUTION
With frequent towing, the vehicle is excessively loaded so this must also be
checked between service intervals.
254 Driving
General Maintenance ŠKODA Service Partner
Read and observe on page 255 first.
Care and maintenance
All ŠKODA Service Partners operate according to the most recent guidelines
Service work, adjustments and technical alterations and instructions from ŠKODA AUTO . All service and repair work is therefore
carried out on time and at the appropriate quality. Adhering to these instruc-
Introduction tions and guidelines helps ensure road safety and helps keep your vehicle in a
good technical condition.
The instructions and guidelines from ŠKODA AUTO must be observed when
carrying out any modifications, repairs or technical alterations to your vehicle. We therefore advise you to have all modifications, repairs and technical altera-
tions to your vehicle carried out by a ŠKODA Service Partner.
Adhering to these instructions and guidelines helps ensure road safety and
helps keep your vehicle in a good technical condition. ŠKODA Original parts
WARNING Read and observe on page 255 first.
■ Adjustments, repairs and technical changes to the vehicle are to be car-
ried out only by a specialist garage. Improperly conducted work (including We recommend the use of ŠKODA Original Parts for your vehicle, as these
work on the electronic components and their software) can cause faults - parts are approved by ŠKODA AUTO. These parts correspond exactly to the
there is a risk of accidents and increased wear on parts! ŠKODA AUTO regulations and are identical to the parts used in series produc-
■ We advise you only to use ŠKODA Original Accessories and ŠKODA Orig- tion.
inal Parts which have been expressly approved for use on your vehicle. Reli- ŠKODA AUTO is able to warrant the safety, suitability, and long life of these
ability, safety and suitability for your vehicle are guaranteed with these. products.
■ ŠKODA AUTO cannot assume any liability for products which have not
been approved by ŠKODA even though these may be products with a type ŠKODA Service Partners are liable for any defects of ŠKODA Genuine Parts for
approval or have been approved by a nationally recognised testing labora- a period of 2 years after sale in accordance with the materials defect liability,
tory. unless agreed otherwise in the purchase agreement.
WARNING
Component protection The airbag system operates using pressure sensors located in the front
Read and observe on page 255 first. doors. For this reason, no adjustments may be carried out to the doors or
door panels (e.g. installation of additional loudspeakers). The resulting dam-
Some electronic vehicle components (such as the instrument cluster) are fac- age can negatively affect the function of the airbag system - there is a risk
tory-equipped with component protection. This ensures the functional limita- of accidents and fatal injuries! The following guidelines must be observed.
tion of these components in a non-legitimate installation in another vehicle ■ Any work on the front doors and their door panels must be carried out by
(e.g. after a theft) or operation outside the vehicle. a specialist garage.
■ Never drive with removed inner door panels or openings in the panels.
Introduction
It is essential to also thoroughly clean the underside of the vehicle at the end of damage.
of the winter.
CAUTION
Washing by hand Washing the vehicle using pressure washers
Wash the vehicle from top to bottom, if necessary, wash using a soft sponge ■ Do not wash the foils using pressure washers - there is a risk of damage.
or washing mitt and plenty of water with appropriate detergents. Wash out ■ Do not aim the water jet directly at the lock cylinders or the door or opening
the sponge or washing glove thoroughly at short intervals. joints when washing the vehicle in the winter – there is a risk of freezing.
Use a different sponge for the wheels, door sills and lower vehicle areas.
Fuel
Introduction
Fig. 307
Stickers with prescribed fuel
Fig. 308 Open fuel filler flap / unscrew tank cap / place the tank cap on
the fuel filler flap
The correct fuel for your vehicle is specified on the inside of the fuel filler flap Fig. 309
» Fig. 307. Fuel filler tube on vehicles with
diesel engines
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 66 litres, including a reserve of approx.
6 litres.
WARNING
Fuel vapours are explosive - can be fatal!
CAUTION
■ Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty! The irregular supply of Read and observe and on page 261 first.
fuel can cause misfiring, which can result in damage to parts of the engine and Perform the refuelling under the following conditions.
the exhaust system.
■ Immediately remove any fuel that has spilled onto the vehicle's paintwork –
The vehicle is unlocked.
risk of paint damage. The ignition is switched off.
■ If you would like to operate your vehicle in countries other than those with The auxiliary heating and ventilation is switched off.
the intended weather conditions, please contact a ŠKODA partner. They will › Press the fuel filler flap in direction of arrow1 and fold in the direction of
tell you whether the fuel specified by the manufacturer is offered in the ac- arrow 2 » Fig. 308.
companying country or whether it is permissible to operate the vehicle with › Unscrew the tank cap in the direction of arrow 3 .
another fuel. › Remove the tank cap and place in the recess on top of the fuel filler flap in
the direction of arrow 4 .
› Insert the pump nozzle into the fuel filler neck as far as it will go, and refuel.
The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first
time. Not continue refuelling.
Read and observe and on page 261 first. standards (e.g. leaded petrol) is put in the tank by mistake, do not start the en-
gine or switch on the ignition.
The correct fuel for the vehicle is specified on the inside of the fuel filler flap
CAUTION
» Fig. 307 on page 261.
Petrol additives (additives)
The vehicle can only be operated with unleaded petrol containing maximum ■ The unleaded petrol in accordance with the prescribed standards meets all
10% bioethanol (E10). the conditions for a smooth running engine. Therefore, we recommend that
Unleaded petrol must correspond to the European Standard EN 228 (in Ger- you do not add any fuel additives to the petrol - there is a risk of engine dam-
many DIN 51626-1 or E10 for unleaded petrol with octane number 95 and 91 age or damage to the exhaust system.
or DIN 51626-2 or E5 for unleaded petrol with octane number 95 and 98). ■ The following additives and auxiliary products may not be used - there is a
risk of engine damage or damage to the exhaust system!
Prescribed fuel 95/min. 92 and 93 RON ■ Additives with metal components (metallic additives), in particular with
We recommend using petrol 95 RON. manganese and iron content.
Optionally, the petrol 92 or. 93 RON can be used (slight power loss, a slightly ■ Fuels with metallic content (e.g. LRP - lead replacement petrol).
increased fuel consumption).
Note
In an emergency petrol 91 RON can be used (slight power loss, slightly in- ■ Unleaded petrol that has a higher octane number than that required by the
creased fuel consumption) » . engine can be used without limitations.
Unleaded petrol min. 95 RON / ROZ ■ The use of petrol with an octane rating higher than 95 RON in does not result
Use at least 95 ROZ petrol. in either a noticeable increase in power nor lower fuel consumption in vehicles
for which unleaded petrol 95/min 92 or 93 RON is specified.
In an emergency petrol 91, 92 or 93 RON can be used (slight loss, a slightly ■ On vehicles using prescribed petrol of min. 95 RON, the use of petrol with a
increased fuel consumption) » . higher octane number than 95 RON can increase the power and reduce fuel
consumption.
AdBlue® and its refilling If the available travel distance that can be completed with the remaining AdBl-
ue® tank capacity drops to about 2400 km, the warning appears on the in-
Introduction strument cluster and a request for replenishment of AdBlue® appears.
An indication also appears in the instrument cluster showing the maximum and
In order to reduce pollutant emissions from vehicles with diesel engines and minimum AdBlue® tank capacity.
the SCR catalyst, a urea - AdBlue® solution is injected into the exhaust system.
Engine compartment
Fig. 310 Open fuel filler flap / unscrew tank cap / place the tank cap on
Introduction
the fuel filler flap
WARNING
Read and observe and on page 263 first. Never cover the engine with additional insulation material (e.g. with a cov-
er) – risk of fire!
AdBlue® You can even top up using a fuel nozzle at a petrol station or a refill
bottle, if necessary at a specialist garage.
WARNING
We recommend when refilling using refill bottles that you use refill bottles When working in the engine compartment, the following instructions must
from ŠKODA Original Accessories. be observed - risk of injury or fire. The engine compartment of your car is a
When adding AdBlue® take note of the minimum and maximum AdBlue®tank hazardous area!
capacity shown in the display of the instrument cluster together with warning
light . WARNING
Refill AdBlue® under the following conditions. Instructions before beginning work in the engine compartment
■ Stop the engine and remove the ignition key, on vehicles with the KESSY
The vehicle is on a horizontal surface.
system, open the driver's door.
The ignition is switched off. ■ Switch on the parking brake.
Refilling ■ For vehicles with manual transmission the lever into the neutral position.
› Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow 1 and open it in the direc- On vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in the P
tion of arrow 2 » Fig. 310. position.
WARNING
Information for working in the engine room
■ Keep everyone away from the engine compartment.
■ Do not touch any hot engine parts – risk of burns!
■ Never touch the radiator fan. The radiator fan suddenly switch on approx.
10 minutes after switching off the ignition! Fig. 311 Opening the bonnet
■ Do not smoke or use open flames in the vicinity of the engine.
■ Do not leave any items (e.g. cloths or tools) in the engine compartment. Read and observe and on page 264 first.
This presents a fire hazard and the risk of engine damage.
■ Read and observe the information and warning instructions on the fluid Open flap
containers. › Make sure that the windscreen wiper arms are not folded away from the
windscreen - there is a risk of damage to the bonnet.
WARNING › Open the driver's door and pull the unlocking lever below the dashboard in
the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 311.
Information for working in the engine compartment with the engine run-
ning
› Press the release lever in the direction of the arrow 2 and the bonnet is un-
locked.
■ If it is necessary to work on the engine compartment with the engine run-
ning, then observe the rotating engine parts and electrical plants - it can
› Hold the bonnet and lift up until it is held open by the pressurised gas spring.
be fatal! Close the bonnet lid
■ Never touch the electric wiring on the ignition system. › Pull the bonnet lid down far enough to overcome the force of the pressur-
■ Avoid short circuits in the electrical system, particularly on the vehicle's ised gas spring.
battery. › From around 20 cm, lightly push the bonnet lid closed until it securely engag-
es.
CAUTION If the bonnet lid is not properly closed, the display of the instrument cluster
Refill only operating fluids of the correct specification - danger of damaging will show this.
the vehicle!
WARNING
Note ■ Never drive if the bonnet is open - could cause an accident!
■ Fluids with the proper specifications can be purchased from the ŠKODA ■ Make sure that when closing the engine compartment lid, no body parts
Original Accessories or from the ŠKODA Genuine Parts ranges. are crushed - there is danger of injury!
■ We recommend you have the battery replaced by a specialist garage.
CAUTION
When closing the bonnet “do not press down” - there is a risk of damaging the
bonnet.
The installation location of the container support can differ depending on the
type of engine » Fig. 313.
The capacity of the reservoir A is about 3.1 litres or about 4.7 litres on vehi-
cles that have a headlight cleaning system. The contents of the container B
are approximately 3.7 litres.
Use a suitable windscreen washer fluid in accordance with the current or ex-
pected weather conditions. We recommend that you use accessories from
ŠKODA Original Accessories.
CAUTION
■ If the vehicle is equipped with a headlight cleaning system, then only use
windscreen washer fluid types that do not attack the polycarbonate coating of
Fig. 312 Arrangement example in the engine compartment the headlights - otherwise there is a risk of damage to headlights.
■ Do not remove the filter from the windscreen washer fluid reservoir when
Read and observe and on page 264 first. replenishing it with liquid otherwise the liquid transportation system can be-
come contaminated, which can cause the windscreen washer system to mal-
A Coolant expansion reservoir 268 function.
B Engine oil dipstick 267
C Engine oil filler opening 267 Engine oil
D Brake fluid reservoir 269
E Vehicle battery 269 Specification
F Windscreen washer fluid reservoir 266 To find out which type of engine oil you can use for your vehicle, contact a
specialist garage.
Windscreen washer fluid If this oil is not available, other oils can also be refilled. To prevent engine dam-
age, a maximum of 0.5 l of engine oil with the following specifications may be
used until the next oil change:
▶ Petrol engines: VW 504 00, VW 502 00, VW 508 00, ACEA A3/ACEA B4 or
API SN, (API SM);
▶ Diesel engines: VW 507 00, ACEA C3 or API CJ-4.
Engine oil VW 505 01 can optionally be used in diesel engines without a DPF.
CAUTION
■ The oil level must never fall outside range A » Fig. 314 - otherwise there is a
risk of damaging the engine and the exhaust system.
■ If a top up with oil is not possible or the oil level is above range A , stop
driving! Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage.
■ Do not add additives to the engine oil - risk of engine damage.
Note
Fig. 314 Dipstick variants
■ Too low engine oil level is shown in the instrument cluster by the warning
Depending on the driving style and operating conditions, the engine uses some light illuminating and also indicated by the message » page 44. Nevertheless,
oil (up to 0.5 l / 1 000 km). Consumption may be slightly higher than this dur- we recommend to check the oil level on a regular basis with the dipstick.
ing the first 5 000 km. ■ We recommend that you use oils from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Have the oil change carried out by a specialist garage during the inspection.
Coolant
Check the oil under the following conditions and refill.
The vehicle is standing on a horizontal surface. Introduction
The engine operating temperature is reached.
The engine is turned off. The coolant cools the engine and consists of water and coolant additive (with
additives that protect the cooling system against corrosion and prevents fur-
Checking the level ring).
› Wait a few minutes until the engine oil flows back into the oil trough.
› Remove the dipstick and wipe with a clean cloth. The coolant additive proportion in the coolant must be between 40 and 60 %.
› Push the dipstick to the stop and pull out again. The correct mixing ratio of water and coolant additive should be checked if
› Read the oil level and push in the dipstick. necessary by a specialist garage or corrected if necessary.
The oil level must be in range A » Fig. 314. If the oil level is below the range
WARNING
A , refill the oil.
■ The following warning instructions must be followed at all times when
Refilling working in the engine compartment » page 264.
› Unscrew the cap of the engine oil filler opening C » Fig. 312 on page 266. ■ Never open the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir while the
› Add oil of the correct specification in increments of 0.5 litres » page 266. engine is still warm. The cooling system is pressurized - risk of scalding or
› Check the oil level . injury from being splashed with coolant!
› Screw the lid of the engine oil filler closed carefully.
Read and observe and on page 267 first. of engine damage. Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist
garage.
Check the coolant under the following conditions and refill.
Note
The vehicle is on a horizontal surface.
A coolant level which is too low is indicated in the instrument cluster by the
The engine is not warm (if the engine is warm, the test results could be in-
warning light and shown by the relevant message » page 43. We still recom-
accurate).
mend inspecting the coolant level directly at the reservoir from time to time.
The engine is turned off.
Check the coolant level - the coolant level must be between the marks A
and B » Fig. 315. If the coolant level is below the mark B , refill the coolant.
Refilling
The coolant expansion tank must always contain a small amount of coolant
» .
› Place a cloth over the cap of the coolant expansion tank and unscrew the cap
carefully.
The brake fluid change is carried out during the inspection. Battery acid is severely caustic. Always wear gloves and eye pro-
tection.
WARNING Keep fire, sparks, open flames and lit cigarettes well clear of the
■ If the date of the brake fluid change is exceeded, steam bubbles could vehicle battery.
form in the brake system during heavy braking. This can impair the efficien- When charging the vehicle battery, a highly explosive gas mixture
cy of the brakes – risk of accident!
■ The following warning instructions must be followed at all times when
is produced.
fluid level drops significantly within a short time or if it drops below the WARNING
“MIN” » Fig. 316 marking. Stop driving – There is a risk of an accident! Battery acid is highly corrosive - risk of injury, irritation or poisoning! Corro-
Seek help from a specialist garage. sive vapours in the air irritate and damage the respiratory tract and the
eyes. The following guidelines must be observed.
Note ■ Always wear protective gloves, eye and skin protection when handling
A low brake fluid level which is too low is indicated by the warning light be- the vehicle battery.
ing shown on the display of the instrument cluster as well as the correspond- ■ If your eyes or skin come into contact with the electrolyte fluid, immedi-
ing message» page 39. We therefore recommend that you check the coolant ately wash the affected area for a few minutes with plenty of water. Seek
level directly at the reservoir from time to time. medical assistance if required.
Only charge the vehicle battery when the ignition and all consumers are
switched off.
Refer to the instructions of the charger manufacturer.
Charging
› For vehicles with START-STOP system or auxiliary heating, connect the
terminal of the charger on the pole of the battery, the terminal of the
charger to the earth point of the engine » page 283.
› For vehicles without START-STOP system or auxiliary heating, connect the
Fig. 317 Vehicle battery: Open the cover / acid level indicator terminals of the charger to the corresponding battery poles ( at . at
).
The new vehicle battery must have the same capacity, voltage, current and the
same size as the original Battery.
We recommend you have the battery replaced by a specialist garage.
› To disconnect the battery, switch off the ignition and disconnect first the
negative terminal , and only after this the positive .
› To connect the battery, first connect the positive terminal , and only after
this the negative terminal .
After disconnecting and re-connecting the vehicle battery, the following func-
tions or devices are partially or completely inoperative.
Function / device Operating measure
Power windows » page 65
Panorama sliding/tilting roof » page 67
Sun screen » page 67
Time setting » page 47
WARNING For uniform wear on all tyres, we recommend that you change the wheels ev-
ery 10,000 km according to the schedule » Fig. 319 - .
■Do not drive with an incorrect tyre pressure - risk of accident.
■In the event of very fast pressure loss, e.g. in the event of sudden tyre WARNING
damage, an attempt should be made to bring the vehicle carefully to a stop ■ Change when they are worn down to the wear indicators at the latest -
without sudden steering movements and without any hard braking.
risk of accident.
■ Improper wheel alignment affects the driving behaviour - there is an acci-
Note dent.
The declaration of conformity (the so-called. COC document) can be obtained ■ Unusual vibrations or “pulling” of the vehicle to one side could be a sign of
from a ŠKODA Partner (only valid for some countries and some models). tyre damage. Reduce speed and stop! If no tyre damage is evident, seek the
assistance of a specialist garage.
Spare wheel
A full spare wheel is identical to the wheels mounted on the vehicle.
Wheels 273
A temporary spare wheel is provided with a warning label on the rim. Only use 16 Diameter of wheel in inches
this temporary spare wheel to reach the nearest specialist garage since it is
95 load index
not intended for permanent use.
V Speed symbol
Instructions for using a temporary spare wheel
▶ Do not cover the signs. Load index - indicates the maximum permissible load for each individual
▶ Be particularly observant when driving. tyre
Inflate the spare wheel to the maximum prescribed inflation pressure load index
91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99
» page 272.
Load
WARNING 615 630 650 670 690 710 730 750 775
(In kg)
A temporary spare wheel can only be used for a short time in the event of a
breakdown and with a correspondingly careful driving method. Speed symbol - indicates the maximum permissible speed for a vehicle fit-
ted with tyres in the category concerned
Snow chains
The snow chains improve driving in wintry road conditions.
Before fitting the snow chains, remove the full wheel trims.
Snow chains must only be mounted on the front wheels and are applicable on-
ly for the following wheel / tyre combinations.
Applies for 2.0 l/162, 206 kW TSI
Rim size Impression depth D Tyre size
6.5J x 17 41 mm 215/55 R17
Applies to the other engines
Rim size Impression depth D Tyre size
6.5J x 16 41 mm 215/60 R16
6.5J x 17 41 mm 215/55 R17
Only fit snow chains with links and locks no larger than 12 mm.
WARNING
Do not use chains on snow- and ice-free routes - the driving behaviour may
be affected and there is a risk of a puncture.
Wheels 275
Placing of the warning triangle - variant 1
Do-it-yourself The warning triangle can be inserted into the recess under the loading edge
and secured with the fastener tape» Fig. 320 .
Emergency equipment and self-help
› To release, press the clasp on the tape in the direction of arrow
1 fold open
Emergency equipment the belt A in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 320.
› To secure, fold up the belt A against the arrow direction 2 until it locks in-
Placement of the first aid kit and warning triangle to place.
Placing of the warning triangle - variant 2
The warning triangle can be stored in the recess under the loading edge
» Fig. 321. Before it is taken out, the floor covering of the luggage compart-
ment must be raised.
WARNING
Properly secure the first aid kit and the warning triangle, or there is a risk of
injury in the event of sudden braking or a vehicle collision.
The reflective vest can be stowed in the stowage compartment A inside the
storage compartment of the front door » Fig. 322.
The following information applies for the first aid kit and warning triangle from It is possible to store the reflective vests for the passengers on the rear seat in
the ŠKODA Original Accessories. the storage compartment in the rear doors.
Placing the first-aid kit
The first-aid kit can be attached by a strap to the right-hand side of the boot
» Fig. 320 or » Fig. 321.
Depending on the equipment fitted, in the same place a storage compartment
may be located in which the first aid kit can be stowed.
276 Do-it-yourself
Fire extinguisher Vehicle tool kit
Fig. 323
Release the fire extinguisher
The fire extinguisher is attached by two straps in a bracket under the front
passenger's seat.
› To remove the fire extinguisher, release the safety catches on the two belts Fig. 324 Vehicle tool kit
in the direction of arrow » Fig. 323 and remove the fire extinguisher.
› To secure, place the fire extinguisher back in the mount and secure with the The box containing the vehicle tool kit is located in the stowage compartment
belts.
for the spare wheel, and can be secured with a tape depending on the equip-
The Owner´s Manual is fitted next to the fire extinguisher. ment fitted.
Pay attention to the expiration date of the fire extinguisher. After this date, the Depending on the vehicle configuration, it may not contain all the compo-
correct function of the device is not guaranteed. nents listed in the on-board tool kit.
WARNING 1 Screwdriver
2 Adapter for anti-theft wheel bolts
Always properly secure the fire extinguisher, there is a risk of injury in the
event of sudden braking or a vehicle collision. 3 Towing eye
4 Clamps for removing the wheel trims
5 Jack with sign
6 Crank for the jack
7 Wheel wrench
8 Extraction pliers for the wheel bolt caps
9 Breakdown kit
Changing a wheel
› Remove the spare wheel » page 279.
› Remove the full wheel trim » page 279 or caps » page 279.
› Loosen the wheel bolts » page 280 » .
278 Do-it-yourself
WARNING › Push the wheel wrench through the clamp, support on the tyre and pull off
A tightening torque which is too high can damage the bolts and threads the wheel trim.
and this can result in permanent deformation of the contact surfaces on Installing the trim
the rim. Too low tightening torque, the wheels may fall off while driving - › Press the wheel trim onto the wheel rim at the designated valve opening.
risk of an accident. Therefore, drive cautiously and only at a moderate › Then press the trim into the wheel rim until its entire circumference locks
speed until the tightening torque has been checked. correctly in place.
The back of the wheel trim supplied by the factory or from the ŠKODA Origi-
Removing /stowing the spare wheel nal Accessories shows the position for the anti-theft wheel bolt. When using
the anti-theft wheel bolt, this is to be fitted in this point » .
Fig. 325
Take out wheel WARNING
We recommend that you use hub caps from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
A sufficient air supply may not be able to be guaranteed with other wheel
trims to cool the braking system – Otherwise there is a risk of an accident.
CAUTION
■ If the wheel trim is set outside the position marked for the anti-theft wheel
bolt, there is a risk of damaging the wheel trim.
The spare wheel is located in a well under the floor covering in the luggage ■ Use only manual pressure and do not hit the full wheel trim – otherwise there
compartment and is fixed in place with a fastening screw » Fig. 325. is a risk of damaging the trim.
Take out wheel Note
› Lift up the floor in the luggage compartment. We recommend that you use hub caps from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
› Loosen the retaining belt and take out the box with the tool kit.
› Unscrew the locking screw in the direction of arrow » Fig. 325 and the re- Wheel bolts
move the wheel.
Store wheel away Fig. 326
› Place the wheel into the wheel well with the wheel rim pointing downward. Remove the cap
› Pull the fixing band through the opposite holes in the wheel rim.
› Screw the locking screw against the direction of arrow until it stops
» Fig. 325.
› Replace the box with the tool kit into the wheel and secure it with the tape.
› Fold back the floor in the luggage compartment.
Full wheel trim
Removing the trim › To remove the cap, insert the extraction pliers up to the stop on the cap and
› Hang the clamps for removing the full wheel trims at the edge of one of the pull this in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 326.
ventilation openings in the full wheel trim. › To install, insert the cap up to the stop on the wheel bolt.
The anti-theft wheel bolts protect the wheels from theft. The upper section
B » Fig. 327 must be used to loosen/tighten these. Raising the vehicle
› Insert the upper section B on the anti-theft wheel bolt A until it stops. Fig. 329
› Insert the wrench on the attachment B until it stops and loose/tighten the Jacking points for the jack
wheel bolt.
› Removing the upper section.
The attachment for the anti-theft wheel bolts must always be kept in the
vehicle in case of a possible wheel change!
For wheel trims supplied ex-factory or from ŠKODA Original Accessories, the
anti-theft wheel bolt should be installed in the position marked on the back of
the wheel trim.
Note
We recommend that you retain the label with the code number. A replacement
upper section can be acquired from ŠKODA original parts based on this.
Fig. 328
Loosening the wheel bolts
Fig. 330 Attach lifting jack
280 Do-it-yourself
The jacking points are located on the lower sill » Fig. 329. Do not remove foreign bodies which have penetrated into the tyre (e.g. nails
etc.).
› Insert the crank 6 into the mount on the jack 5 » page 277.
› Support the base plate of the jack with its full area resting on level ground Do not use the puncture repair kit in the following instances.
and ensure that the jack is located in a vertical position at the jacking point ▶ The rim is damaged.
» Fig. 330 - . ▶ The outdoor temperature is below the minimum temperature indicated in
› Use the crank to raise the jack until its claw encloses the bar » Fig. 330 - . the instruction manual of the tyre filling bottle with sealant.
› Continue to lift the vehicle until the wheel is just off the floor. ▶ Tyre punctures of more than 4 mm.
▶ There is damage to the tyre wall.
WARNING ▶ The expiration date (see inflation bottle) has passed.
Observe the following instructions, otherwise there is risk of injury.
■ Secure the vehicle from unexpectedly rolling away. WARNING
■ Always ensure the base plate of the lifting jack cannot slip. ■ If the sealant comes into contact with skin, wash the affected area imme-
■ Provide a wide and stable base under the jack on loose surfaces (e.g. diately.
such as gravel). ■ Observe the instructions provided in the puncture repair kit manufactur-
■ Create a non-slip base (e.g. a rubber floor mat) under the jack on a er's instructions for use.
smooth surface (e.g. cobblestones).
■ Always raise the vehicle with the doors closed.
■ Never position any body parts, such as arms or legs, under the vehicle, Description of puncture repair kit
while the vehicle is raised with a lifting jack.
■ When the vehicle is raised, never start the engine.
CAUTION
It is important to ensure that the jack is correctly attached to the bar of the
lower beam – otherwise there is a risk of damage to the vehicle.
Introduction
282 Do-it-yourself
Once a tyre inflation pressure of 2.0 – 2.5 bar is achieved, continue the journey Jump-starting
at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph).
WARNING Introduction
■ If the tyre does not inflate to at least 2.0 bar, the damage is too great. The
sealing agent cannot be used to seal the tyre. Do not drive the vehicle. WARNING
Seek help from a specialist garage. ■ The following instructions must be followed at all times when working on
■ The tyre inflation hose and air compressor may get hot as the tyre is be- the engine compartment » page 264.
ing inflated – risk of burning. ■ When handling the vehicle battery, the following warnings must be ob-
served » page 269.
■ A discharged vehicle battery may already freeze at temperatures just be-
CAUTION
low 0 °C. If the battery is frozen, do not carry out a jump start with the bat-
Switch off the air compressor at the latest after the running time according to
tery of another vehicle – risk of explosion!
the instructions of the repair kit manufacturer has elapsed – otherwise there is
■ Never jump-start vehicle batteries with an acid level that is too low – risk
the risk of compressor damage! Allow the air compressor to cool a few mi-
of explosion and caustic burns!
nutes before switching it on again.
Information for driving with repaired tyres Start using the battery from another vehicle
Read and observe on page 281 first.
The inflation pressure of the repaired tyre must be checked after driving for 10
minutes.
If the tyre inflation pressure is 1.3 bar or less
› The tyre cannot be properly sealed with the breakdown kit. Do not drive
the vehicle! Seek help from a specialist garage.
If the tyre inflation pressure is 1.3 bar or more
› Set the tyre pressure back to the correct value » page 272.
› Continue driving carefully to the nearest specialist garage at a maximum Fig. 332 Jump-starting: - Discharged battery, - power-supplying
speed of 80 km/h (50 mph). battery/ground point of the engine for the START-STOP system
284 Do-it-yourself
Driver of the towed vehicle Remove/insert cap
› If possible, the vehicle should be towed with the engine running. Operate the › To remove, press on the cap in the direction of the arrow 1 and remove this
brake booster and power steering only if the engine is running, otherwise the in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 334.
brake pedal must be depressed more strongly and more power has to be › To insert, insert the cap in arrow range 1 and then press on the opposite
directed to the steering. edge of the cap. The cap must engage firmly.
› If it is not possible to start the engine, switch on the ignition so that the Removing/installing the towing eye
steering wheel is not locked and so that the turn signal lights, windscreen
wipers and windscreen washer system can be used. › To install, screw in the towing eye by hand in the direction of arrow 3
» Fig. 334 until the stop» .
› Take the vehicle out of gear or move the selector lever into position N if the › Tighten the towing eye using a wheel wrench or similar object. To do this, in-
vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox.
sert the wheel wrench through the eye.
› Always keep the tow rope taut during the towing procedure. › To remove, unscrew the towing against the direction of arrow 3 .
WARNING
WARNING
■ Wound tow ropes must not be used for towing » Fig. 333- , the towing
The towing eye must always be tightened, otherwise the towing eye may
eye may unscrew out of the vehicle - risk of accident.
■ Ensure tow rope is not twisted - risk of accident.
break during the towing.
Note
We recommend that you use the tow rope from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Remove/insert cap
› To remove, press on the cap in the direction of the arrow 1 and remove this
in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 335.
› To insert, insert the cap in arrow range 1 and then press on the opposite
edge of the cap. The cap must engage firmly.
Removing/installing the towing eye
› To install, screw in the towing eye by hand in the direction of arrow 3
Fig. 334 Remove cap / install towing eye » Fig. 335 until the stop» .
WARNING
The towing eye must always be tightened, otherwise the towing eye may
break during the towing.
Fig. 336 Open the cover/remove the battery
Remote control and removable light - changing the battery
Read and observe on page 286 first.
Introduction
› Fold out the key bit.
CAUTION
› Press off the battery cover A » Fig. 336 with your thumb or by using a flat
screwdriver in region B .
■ The replacement battery/batteries must comply with the original specifica-
› Open the battery in the direction of the arrow 1 .
tion. › Remove the discharged battery in the direction of arrow 2 and install a new
■ Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the rechargeable batter- battery.
ies. › Insert the battery cover A and press it down until it clicks audibly into place.
Note The key has to be synchronised if the vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked
■ We recommend having the faulty battery/batteries replaced by a specialist with the key after replacing the battery » page 59.
garage.
■ If a key has an affixed decorative cover, this will be destroyed when the bat- KESSY key
tery is replaced. A replacement cover can be purchased from a ŠKODA Part-
ner.
286 Do-it-yourself
Read and observe on page 286 first.
› Use a thin screwdriver to remove the cover A in the area B » Fig. 339.
› Open the cover in the direction of arrow 1 and push out in the direction of
arrow 2 .
› Use the screwdriver to remove and replace the battery in the area C .
› Insert the battery cover in the opposite direction to arrow 2 until it audibly
clicks into place.
Removable light
Fig. 338 Open the cover/remove the battery
Fig. 340
Read and observe on page 286 first. Locking clip on the battery cov-
er
› Unlock the locking lug A in the direction of arrow 1 and remove the emer-
gency key B in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 337.
› Insert a narrow screwdriver (3 mm wide) approximately 12 mm into the
opening in the direction of arrow 3 » Fig. 338.
› Turn the screwdriver in the direction of arrow 4 until the battery cover is
released.
› Push the battery cover C in the direction of arrow 5 . Read and observe on page 286 first.
› Remove the discharged battery in the direction of arrow 6 and install a new
battery. › Lever off the cover for the rechargeable batteries with a narrow and pointed
› Insert the battery cover C and press it down until it clicks audibly into place. object from the area of the lock clips A » Fig. 340.
The key has to be synchronised if the vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked › Replace the batteries.
with the key after replacing the battery » page 59. › Insert the cover for the rechargeable batteries and press it down until it
clicks into place.
Remote control of the auxiliary heating CAUTION
If an incorrect battery type is used or a non-rechargeable battery, there is a
risk of damaging the light and the vehicle's electrical system.
Fig. 341 Handle on the driver's door: Open/unlock and lock cover
The driver's door can be emergency unlocked / emergency locked using the After closing, the door is locked.
key via the lock cylinder.
› Pull on the door handle and hold.
› Insert the key into the recess on the lower side of the cover and fold up the
cover in the direction of arrow » Fig. 341.
› Release the door handle.
› For vehicles with LHD, insert the key with the fold-out key bit with the but-
tons facing upwards » Fig. 342 - into the lock cylinder and unlock/lock
the vehicle.
› For vehicles with RHD, insert the key with the fold-out key bit with the but-
tons facing downwards into the lock and unlock/lock the vehicle.
288 Do-it-yourself
Unlock the boot lid If the selector lever is moved again to position P, it is once again blocked.
CAUTION
Make sure when lifting not to damage cover parts by the screwdriver in the
shift lever environment.
Introduction
WARNING
Fig. 344 Unlock lid: version 1/version 2 Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for safety rea-
sons.
The boot lid can be unlocked manually from inside.
› Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the recess or the opening in the Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
trim» Fig. 344 as far as the stop.
› Unlock the lid by moving it in the direction of the arrow. Fig. 346
Setting the service position for
Selector lever emergency unlocking the wiper arms
Read and observe on page 289 first. Fig. 348 Replace the rear window wiper blade
Before replacing the windscreen wiper blade, put the windscreen wiper arms Read and observe on page 289 first.
into the service position.
Removing the wiper blade
Setting the service position › Lift the wiper arm from the window in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 348.
› Switch the ignition on and off again. › Tilt the wiper blade to the stop in the same direction.
› Within 10 seconds, push the lever in the direction of arrow » Fig. 346 and › Hold the wiper arm and press the safety catch A in the direction of arrow
hold for approximately 2 seconds. 2.
Removing the wiper blade › Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow 3 .
› Lift the wiper arm from the window in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 347. Attaching the windscreen wiper blade
› Tilt the wiper blade to the stop in the same direction. › Push the windscreen wiper blade in the opposite direction of the arrow 3
› Hold the wiper arm and press the safety catch A in the direction of arrow until it locks into place. Check that the windscreen wiper blade is correctly
2. attached.
› Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow 3 . › Fold the windscreen wiper arm back to the windscreen.
Attaching the windscreen wiper blade
› Push the windscreen wiper blade in the opposite direction of the arrow 3
until it locks into place. Check that the windscreen wiper blade is correctly
attached.
› Fold the windscreen wiper arm back to the windscreen.
› Turn on the ignition and press the lever into the direction of the arrow
» Fig. 346.
Move the windscreen wiper arms into the home position.
290 Do-it-yourself
Fuses and light bulbs Fuses in the dashboard- LHD
Fig. 349
Blown fuse
The fuse box is located behind the storage compartment on the driver's side.
Replacing fuses
Individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses. A blown fuse is recognisa- › Remove the ignition key, turn off the lights and all electrical consumers.
ble by the molten metal strip » Fig. 349 /. › Open the storage box on the driver side.
WARNING › Hold the stacker laterally in the region A and open by pulling in the direction
of arrow 1 (A greater force is required to open) » Fig. 350.
Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the
engine compartment » page 264.
› Remove the plastic clip under the cover of the fuse box in the engine com-
partment » Fig. 354 on page 294.
› Use the clip to pull the fuse out, then insert a new fuse.
CAUTION › Stow the clamp back in the original position.
■ Replace the faulty fuse with a new one of the same amperage. › Close the compartment by pressing in arrow direction 2 until you hear it
■ If a newly inserted fuse blows after a short time, then seek the assistance of click.
a specialist garage.
■ Do “not repair” the fuses and do not replace them with stronger ones - it can
cause a fire and could damage parts of the electrical system.
Note
■We recommend always carrying replacement fuses in the vehicle.
■There can be several power consuming devices for one fuse. Multiple fuses
may exist for a single power consuming device.
Fig. 352
Fuses
The fuse box is located behind the storage compartment on the front passen-
ger side.
Fold down the storage compartment and replace the fuse
› Remove the ignition key, turn off the lights and all electrical consumers.
› Open the storage compartment on the front passenger side.
› Unlock the brake rod in the direction of arrow 1 and remove in the direction
of arrow 2 » Fig. 351.
› Press the detents A in the direction of arrow 3 and the compartment folds
down in the direction of arrow 4 .
› Remove the plastic clip under the cover of the fuse box in the engine com-
partment » Fig. 354 on page 294.
› Use the clip to pull out the faulty fuse and then insert a new fuse.
› Stow the clip back in the original position. Fig. 353 Fuses for the USB charging function and for the multi-function
Fold back the storage compartment unit (taxi): RHD
› Raise the tray in the opposite direction of arrow 4 .
› Overcome the resistance of the detents A . Read and observe and on page 291 first.
› Insert the brake rod against the direction of arrow 2 and lock against the
direction of arrow 1 . No. Consumer
› Close the storage compartment. 1 Not assigned
2 Not assigned
3 Voltage stabilizer for taxi vehicles
4 Heated steering wheel
292 Do-it-yourself
No. Consumer No. Consumer
5 Databus TCS, ESC, tyre pressure monitoring, air conditioning, reversing light
6 Automatic gearbox 34 switch, mirror with automatic dimming, START-STOP, heated rear
seats, parking brake, light switch
Air conditioning, heating, receiver for the remote control for the
7 Diagnostic connector, camera, radar sensor, voltage stabilizer for
auxiliary heating, heated rear window, heated windscreen, clock 35
taxi vehicles
Light switch, rain sensor, diagnostic connection, parking brake, am-
8 36 Headlight right
bient lighting, sensor of the alarm system, headlight
9 USB sockets 37 Headlight left
10 Infotainment screen 38 Towing hitch
11 Light - left Central locking - front passenger door and right rear door, front
39 passenger side mirrors - heating, fold-in function, setting the mirror
12 Infotainment
surface
13 Left side belt tensioner
40 12-volt power outlets
14 Air blower for air conditioning,heating
41 Right side belt tensioner
15 Electric steering lock
42 Boot lid, headlight washers, windscreen washer system
16 Phonebox
43 Music amplifier
17 Instrument cluster, emergency call
44 Towing hitch
18 Reversing camera
45 Electrically adjustable seats
19 KESSY system
46 230-Volt power socket
20 SCR (AdBlue®)
47 Rear window wiper
21 All-wheel drive, air compressor (Green Line)
48 Blind spot detection
22 Towing hitch
49 Engine starting, clutch pedal switch
23 Panoramic tilting / sliding sunroof
50 Opening the boot lid
24 Light - right
51 Heated rear seats, rear display, rear air conditioning
Central locking - driver's door and rear left door, exterior mirror
25 52 Heated front seats
driver's side - heating, fold-in function, setting the mirror surface
53 Heated rear window
26 Heated front seats
A
27 Xenon headlights, interior lights
» Fig. 35 Multifunctional unit for taxi vehicles - LHD
28 Towing hitch 2
29 Operating lever underneath the steering wheel B
30 Shock absorber setting » Fig. 35 USB charging - LHD
31 Not assigned 2
32 Parking aid (Park Assist)
33 Airbag switch for hazard warning lights
No. Consumer
1 ESC, parking brake
2 ESC
Fig. 354 Fuse box cover: remove the cover/plastic clip for fuses
3 Engine control system
Read and observe and on page 291 first. Radiator fan, control valve for fuel pressure, electric auxiliary heat-
4
ing, engine components
Replacing fuses
5 Ignition, engine components
› Remove the ignition key, turn off the lights and all electrical consumers.
› Simultaneously press the lock buttons of the cover together in the direction 6 Brake sensor
of arrow 1 and remove the cover in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 354. 7 Radiator shutters, coolant pump, engine components
› Remove the plastic clip under the cover of the fuse box » Fig. 354. 8 Lambda sensor, NOx sensor
› Use the clip to pull the fuse out, then insert a new fuse. Coolant pump, ignition, preheating unit, air flow meter, engine com-
› Stow the clamp back in the original position. 9
ponents
› Replace the cover, push the lock buttons of the cover together and lock.
10 Fuel pump
CAUTION
11 Electrical auxiliary heating system
The cover of the fuse box in the engine compartment must always be used
12 Electrical auxiliary heating system
correctly, otherwise water may penetrate into the fuse box – there is a danger
of damage to the vehicle! 13 Automatic gearbox
14 Heated windscreen
15 Horn
16 Ignition
294 Do-it-yourself
No. Consumer WARNING
17 ESC, engine control unit, main relay coil ■ Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the
engine compartment » page 264.
18 Databus, battery data module
■ Accidents can be caused if the road in front of the vehicle is not suffi-
19 Windscreen wipers ciently illuminated and the vehicle cannot or can only be seen with difficulty
20 Anti-theft alarm by other road users.
21 Not assigned ■ H7 and H8 bulbs are pressurised and may burst when changing the bulb -
risk of injury! We therefore recommended wearing gloves and safety
22 Engine control system, voltage stabilizer for taxi vehicles
glasses when changing a bulb.
23 Starter ■ Do not carry out any work on the xenon gas discharge lamps - risk of
24 Electrical auxiliary heating system death!
31 Not assigned
32 Not assigned CAUTION
33 Oil pump for automatic gearbox
■ Do not take hold of the glass bulb with naked fingers (even the smallest
amount of dirt reduces the working life of the light bulb). Use a clean cloth,
34 Not assigned napkin, or similar.
35 Not assigned ■ The cap of the filament bulb must always be seated correctly in the head-
36 SCR (AdBlue®) light, otherwise this may allow water and debris to enter the headlight - risk of
37 Aux. heating damage to the headlights.
38 Not assigned Note
We recommend that a box of replacement bulbs always be carried in the vehi-
Bulbs cle.
Introduction
This Owner's Manual only describes the replacement of bulbs where it is possi-
ble to replace the bulbs on your own without any complications arising. Other
bulbs, Xenon gas-discharge lamps or LED lights must be replaced by a special-
ist garage.
For this reason, we recommend having bulbs replaced by a specialist garage or
seeking other expert help in the event of any uncertainties.
▶ Switch off the ignition and all of the lights before replacing a bulb.
▶ Faulty bulbs must only be replaced with the same type of bulbs. The designa-
tion is located on the light socket or the glass bulb.
We recommend having the headlight settings checked by a specialist garage
after replacing a bulb in the low, high or fog beam.
Changing the bulb for the front turn signal light › Remove the protective caps B and C » Fig. 356 on page 296.
› Turn the holder with the bulb in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 358.
› Remove the holder with the bulb in the direction of arrow 2 .
› Remove the bulb from the holder in the direction of the arrow 3 .
› Insert a new bulb into the connector so that the lug A on the connector
snaps into the groove on the bulb.
› Insert the connector with the new bulb into the headlight in the opposite di-
rection to the arrow 2 .
› Turn the connector with the new bulb in the opposite direction to the arrow
1 until it stops.
› Use the protective caps B and C » Fig. 356 on page 296.
Fig. 357 Changing the bulb for the front turn signal light
296 Do-it-yourself
Changing light bulbs for fog lights Refit the headlight and grille
› Replace the fog light by inserting it in the opposite direction of the arrow 2
» Fig. 359 and tighten.
› Insert the guard and push it gently until it locks into place.
Removing/installing tail light
Fig. 359 Remove the number plate light / replace the bulb
› Turn the holder with the bulb A or B » Fig. 361 in the direction of the arrow
1 .
› Remove the socket with the bulb from the lamp housing in the direction of
arrow 2 .
› Push the faulty bulb into the holder, turn in anti -clockwise direction up to
the stop and remove.
› Insert a new bulb into the holder and turn in a clockwise direction to the
stop.
298 Do-it-yourself
Technical data Vehicle data
Introduction
The details given in the vehicle's technical documentation always take prece-
dence over the details in the Owner's Manual.
The listed performance values were determined without performance-reduc-
ing equipment, e.g. air conditioning system. Type plate
The rating plate » Fig. 362 is located at the bottom of the B-column on the
The values given have been determined in accordance with the rules and con- right-hand driver's side.
ditions specified in statutory or technical regulations for determining opera-
tional and technical data for motor vehicles. The type plate contains the following data.
1 Vehicle manufacturers
The values listed are for the basic model without any optional equipment.
2 Vehicle identification number (VIN)
Abbreviations used 3 Maximum permissible gross weight
Abbreviation Meaning 4 Maximum permissible towed weight (towing vehicle and trailer)
ACT active cylinder management 5 Maximum permissible front axle load
AG Automatic gearbox 6 Maximum permissible rear axle load
DSG Automatic double clutch gearbox Vehicle identification number (VIN)
MG Manual gearbox The vehicle identification number - VIN (vehicle body number) is stamped into
MPI Gasoline engine with a multi-point fuel injection the engine compartment on the right hand suspension strut dome. This num-
ber is also located on a sign on the lower left hand edge below the windscreen
Diesel engine with turbo-charging and common rail
TDI CR (together with a VIN bar code), and on the type plate.
injection system
Petrol engine with turbo charging and direct injec- The VIN can also be displayed in the / → → Service.
TSI
tion Engine number
The engine number is embossed in the engine block.
Supplementary Information (applies to Russia)
The full type approval number of the means of transport is indicated in the
registration documents, field 17.
Maximum permissible towed weight
The listed maximum allowable trailer weight is only valid for altitudes up to
1000 m above sea level.
The vehicle dimensions given in the vehicle's technical documentation always take precedence over the details in the Owner's Manual.
The dimensions listed below are for the basic model without any optional equipment.
Vehicle dimensions for operating weight without driver (in mm)
» Fig. 363 Specification Value
A Height 1468
Basic dimension 1584
B Front track
Vehicles with the 2.0 ltr./162 kW TSI and 2.0 ltr./206 kW TSI engine 1586
C Width 1864
Basic dimension 1572
D Rear track
Vehicles with the 2.0 ltr./162 kW TSI and 2.0 ltr./206 kW TSI engine 1574
E Width including exterior mirror 2031
F Clearance 149/148a)
G Wheel base 2841
H Length 4861
a) Applies to Superb 4x4 vehicles.
The vehicle dimensions given in the vehicle's technical documentation always take precedence over the details in the Owner's Manual.
The dimensions listed below are for the basic model without any optional equipment.
Vehicle dimensions for operating weight without driver (in mm)
» Fig. 364 Specification Value
A Height 1477
Basic dimension 1584
B Front track
Vehicles with the 2.0 ltr./162 kW TSI and 2.0 ltr./206 kW TSI engine 1586
C Width 1864
Basic dimension 1572
D Rear track
Vehicles with the 2.0 ltr./162 kW TSI and 2.0 ltr./206 kW TSI engine 1574
E Width including exterior mirror 2031
F Clearance 149/148a)
G Wheel base 2841
H Length 4856
a) Does not apply to Superb Estate 4x4 vehicles.
Introduction
The values given have been determined in accordance with the rules and conditions specified in statutory or technical regulations for determining operational
and technical data for motor vehicles.
The exhaust gas standard is specified in the vehicle's technical documentation, as well as in the declaration of conformity (in so-called COC document). The
declaration of conformity (the so-called. COC document) can be obtained from a ŠKODA Partner (only valid for some countries and some models).
Index 309
Release gear selector lever 208 Updates 142 Buttons on the driver door
Selector lever emergency unlocking 289 Visibility 134, 142 Electric windows 64
Selector lever lock 208 Bluetooth Player 151
Start and run 209 Bluetooth® update 160 C
Tiptronic 209 Bolero Call list
Warning light 43 external module 124 Call list 166
Automatic switch-off of Infotainment 127 Infotainment description 123 CAR 199
Automatic transmission 207 Bonnet 265 Car battery
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventila- Boot automatic consumer shutdown 269
tion) 119 Class N1 vehicles 110 Check condition 270
In infotainment 120 Boot lid 61 Cover 270
Radio remote control 121 Automatic locking 61 Disconnecting and reconnecting 271
set to 120 Open/close 60, 62 Replacing 271
Avoiding damage to your vehicle 211 See boot lid 60 Winter operation 270
Brake Assist (HBA) 215 Car care 256
B Interior 260
Brake booster 204
Bass tones 133 Brake fluid 269 Car computer
Battery Check 269 see multifunction display 49
Changing batteries for the removable light 287 specification 269 Care and maintenance 255
Changing in key 286 Brake linings Care Connect 16
Replace the battery in the remote control in Warning light 42 Cargo element 107
the auxiliary heating 287 Brake pads Car park 182
Belts 22 new 204 Carrier 113
Belt tensioners 24 Brake pedal (automatic gearbox) CarStick 169
reversible 24 Warning light 43 Car wash 256
Blind spot monitoring assistant Brakes CD 149
Activation / deactivation 221 Brake booster 204 cellphone
Bluetooth Brake fluid 269 Disclaimer 122
A2DP / AVRCP 134 Braking and stabilisation systems 213 Central locking 55
Name 134 Information on braking 204 Problems 59
on / off 134 Parking brake 204
Paired external devices 134 Central locking button 57
Running in 210
Profiles 162 Warning light 39 Changing
rSAP 160 Batteries for the removable light 287
Brake system 213
Set 142 Battery 286
Breakdown call 164 Wheels 278
set to 134, 137
Broadcasting 144 Windscreen wiper blades 290
Set to 134
Bulbs Changing a wheel 278
Switch on/off 142
Replacing 295
Update 132, 135
310 Index
Changing gear Comfort indicating 69 Data connection
Selector lever 208 COMING HOME 71 Amundsen 169
Tiptronic 209 compartments 88 CarStick 169
Charging a vehicle battery 270 Compatible sources Internet 169
Check Pictures 154 rSAP 170
Brake fluid 269 Video DVD 156 Data Connection
Engine oil 267 Component protection 256 Columbus 169
Oil level 267 SIM card 170
Computer
Checking see multifunction display 49 Data roaming 135
Battery status 270 Conditions for pairing 160 Data transfer of external devices 129
Coolant 268 Date 133, 141
Conference call 166
Children and safety 29 DAY LIGHT
Configuration wizard 129
Child safety lock 58 see Daytime running lights 68
Connect external device to the Infotainment
Child seat 29 hotspot 171 Daytime running lights 68
Classification 31 DCC 46, 240
Connect Infotainment to the hotspot of the ex-
I-Size 33 De-icing the windscreen and rear window 75
ternal device 171
Installation location 31, 33 Deactivation
Convenience operation
ISOFIX 32 Airbag 27
Tilting / sliding sunroof 66
on the front passenger seat 29, 30
Coolant 267 default settings 199
Place of installation 32
Checking 268 Default settings 134
TOP TETHER 33
Refilling 268 Delayed locking of the boot lid
Cigarette lighter 100
Temperature display 36 See boot lid 61
Cleaning the vehicle
Warning light 43 Delete destination 190
Interior 260
CORNER Demo mode 140, 191
Outside 258
See Fog lights with CORNER function 70 Destination
Washing 257
Correct routing of seat belt Enter destination using the address 181
Climatronic 114
22 enter in map 182
air distribution control 118
Automatic operation 117 Correct seating position 19, 21 Favourite 190
Operate in Infotainment 117 Crew Protect Assist 242 final destinations 183
Operating elements 115 Cruise Control System 230 Home address 184
Cup holders 91 Image with GPS 187
Clock
Map point 182
Change display 127
D Memory 190
Clothes hook 95
Types of destination search/destination en-
Cockpit 35 DAB 144 try 180
Lighting 73 additional information 144
Destination details 190
Columbus Radio Text and images presentation 144
external module 124 Set 136, 143
infotainment Description 122 DAB Slideshow 144
Index 311
Destination management DriveGreen 210 EDS 214
Destination details 190 Driver information system 47 Electrical boot lid
Favourite 190 Driving set the top position of the lid 62
Storage 190 Emissions 301 Electrical power windows 65
Diesel 263 Fuel consumption 301 Electric boot lid
Diesel fuel 263 Maximum speed 305 Force limiter 61
Diesel particle filter (DPF) 45 through water 212 Manual operation 61
Digital clock 47 Driving mode 240 Open/close 62
Digital service schedule 52 Adaptive chassis (DCC) 240 Electric parking brake 204
Dipped beam 68 Comfort 241 Electric power windows 63
Eco 240 Malfunctions 65
Dipstick 267
Individual 241 Electric tail gate
Directive 2014/53/EU 9
Mode selection and Infotainment display 241 Malfunctions 63
Disclaimer Normal 241
applications 122 Electric windows
Settings for individual mode 242
external devices 122 Buttons on the driver door 64
Sports 241
Mobile phones 122 Electronic Differential Lock (EDL, XDS) 214
Driving Mode Selection 240
Display Electronic immobilizer 200
DSG 299
Coolant temperature 36 Elevation 177
DSR 214
Fuel level 37 emergency
Gear changes 47 DVD 149
Jump-starting 283
In the instrument cluster 47 DVD-Video Starting the engine / stopping the push of a
Rear centre console 37 Select video source 155 button 202
Display information on sporty driving in Info- Set to 137
Emergency
tainment 48 Dynamic Light Assist 72 Changing a wheel 278
Display of a low temperature 45 Dynamic Road Sign Display Hazard warning light system 71
Display of the instrument cluster Additional display 247 Jump-starting 283
Menus in the display of the instrument cluster 51 Information messages 248 Selector lever release 289
Malfunctions 248 Starting the engine / stopping the engine at
Display POIs in the map 182
Operation 247 the push of a button 201
Distance warning 238
Settings in Infotainment 246 Towing the using the tow hitch 286
Diverting calls 137
Dynamic route 198 Towing the vehicle 284
Door
Tyre repair 281
Child safety lock 58 E Unlocking/locking the door 288
Emergency locking 288
Economical driving 210 Unlocking / locking the door 288
Emergency locking of the driver's door 288
Economy mode Emergency call 15, 164
Open / Close 58
Warning light 46 Emergency equipment
Door alarm 47
Edit route 192 Fire extinguisher 277
Drive
EDR 8 First aid kit 276
Driving through water 212
Jack 277
312 Index
Reflective vest 276 External module 124 Foils 258
Vehicle tool kit 277 CD / DVD 149 Force limiter
Warning triangle 276 SD card 150 Electric boot lid 61
Emission control system 40 SIM card 163 Sliding/tilting sunroof 66
Emissions 301 Video DVD 155 Tilting / sliding sunroof 66
Engine Window 65
Information messages 43
F Front assist
Running in 210 Factory settings 142 Warning light 46
Engine compartment 264 Familiarizing yourself with the vehicle 2 Front Assist 238
Brake fluid 269 Fastening elements 102 Disable/enable 239
Coolant 267 Fatigue detection Distance warning 238
Engine oil 266 Fatigue detection system 248 Malfunctions 240
Overview 266 Fatigue detection system 248 Operation 238
Vehicle battery 269 Radar sensor 212
Favourite 183, 190
Windscreen washer fluid 266 Settings in Infotainment 238
File formats Warning and automatic braking 239
Engine drag torque control (MSR) 214 Media 152
Engine number 299 Warning light 46
Pictures 154
Engine oil 266 Front head restraints
Requirements and Restrictions 152
Check 267 Adjust height 85
Video DVD 156
Oil changing 266 Front seats 80
Find
Refilling 267 Car park 182 Fuel 261
specification 266 Petrol station 182 Diesel 263
Warning light 44 Restaurant 182 Fuel gauge 37
Engine revolutions counter 36 refer to Fuel 261
Finish route guidance 192
Enter destination 181, 182 Refuelling 261
Fire extinguisher 277 Unleaded petrol 262
EPC 41 First aid kit 276 Warning light 42
equalizer 133 Flagged destination 183 Fuel consumption 301
ESC Flashing 69 Fuel filter 46
ESC Sport 213 Floor covering in the luggage compartment 104
Operation 213 Fuel reserve 42
Flooring in the luggage compartment 104 Functional surfaces 125
Event Data Recorder 8
Floor mats 207 Fuses 291
External device data transfer 134, 141 See Floor mats 207 in the dashboard 291, 292
External devices FM 144 in the engine compartment 294
Disclaimer 122 Set 136, 142 Plastic clip 294
Fog lights 70
Warning light 42 G
Fog lights/rear fog light 70 Gearbox
Fog lights with CORNER function 70 Information messages 43
Index 313
Gear change I Infotainment menus
Gear recommendation 47 Grid display 128
Information on the selected gear 47 I-PAD holder 100 Horizontal display 128
Gear changing I-Size 33 Infotainment Online 17
lever 207 Ignition lock 201 Infotainment operation 125
Genuine parts 255 Images Infotainment screen 125
Glasses storage box 93 Display 137 Infotainment operation using an application in
Google Earth™ 179 main menu 153 the external device 129
safe removal of the data source 134 Infotainment Overview 122
Google Earth ™ 187
Select Image Source 153
GPS 177 Infotainment restart 127
service 154
Graphical driving recommendations 191 Infotainment screen 133, 141
Set to 137
Areas 125
Image viewer 153
H Important information 124
Immobilizer 200 keyboard 126
hand gestures 127 import Maintenance 124
Hazard warning light system 71 Destinations (online) 186 Operation 125
HBA 215 Objectives (vCard) 185 Infotainment system 122
Headlight assistant 72 POI categories 185
Input screen
Warning light 45 POI categories (online) 178, 186
Language characters 141
Headrests 85 Routes (online) 194
Input screen with keyboard 126
Heating 114, 115 Import contacts 137
Instrument cluster 36
Air distribution control 118 In-car communication
Vehicle condition 48
Mirrors 79 See Electronic voice amplification 128
Warning lights 37
Seats 86 Inertia reels 24
Steering wheel 87 Interior light 74
Information about the towing process 284
Windscreen and rear window 75 Interior lighting 73
Information call 164
Hill Start Assist 215 Interior lights
Information system 47 Ambient lighting 74
hitch 251 Gear recommendation 47
Hitch 250 Interior monitor 60
Menus in the display of the instrument cluster 51
Home address 139, 184 Intermediate target 189
Multifunction display 49
HOME button 129 Service interval display 52 Internet 169
Amundsen 169
HOME main screen 129 infotainment Description
CarStick 169
Hook 103 Columbus 122
Columbus 169
Horn 35 Infotainment description
rSAP 170
Hotspot Amundsen 123
SIM card 170
Connect 171 Bolero 123
ISOFIX 32
Set 171 Swing 124
Infotainment gesture control 127
Infotainment language 134, 141
314 Index
J Latitude 177 List
LEAVING HOME 71 of available stations 145
Jack 277 of telephone contacts 164
Lever
- fit 280 With folder / track list 148
ACC 235
Journey 50 Cruise control 230 List of available hotspots 171
Jukebox 151 Operation of the information system 49 List of paired external devices 162
Jump-starting 283 Speed limiter with ACC 232 List of traffic reports 197
Speed limiter with GRA 232 Load 301
K Turn signal/main beam 69 Localisation services 15
KESSY Windscreen wipers 77
Lock
deactivating 56 Liability for defects 6 Individual settings 57
Starting engine / Stopping 201 Light 68 KESSY 56
Switching the ignition on/off 201 Cockpit 73 Locking
Unlock / lock 56 COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME 71 Central locking button 57
key Daytime running lights 68 in case of emergency 288
Starting engine / Stopping 201 Flash 69 Remote control 55
Key Fog lights/rear fog light 70
Lock steering lock 200
Changing battery 286 Fog lights with CORNER function 70
Long cargo channel 96
Switching the ignition on/off 201 Hazard warning light system 71
Headlight assistant 72 Longitude 177
Take out emergency key 56
Headlight cleaning system 78 Luggage compartment 102
keyboard 126
Parking light 71 Cover 104
key CAR 199 Fastening elements 102
Replacing bulbs 295
Turn signal/main beam 69 Fastening the flooring 104
L
Xenon headlight 70 Fixing nets 103
L-band 137 Floor covering on both sides 104
Light Assist 72
Lamp failure 45 foldable hook 103
Lighting
Lamps Lighting 102
Ambient lighting 74
Warning light 45 Net on the luggage compartment cover 104
Entry space 71
Lan Departure Warning Net partition 112
Interior lighting 73
Activation / deactivation 244 Removable light 110
Luggage compartment 102
Lane Assist 42, 243 Roll-up cover 105
Lights
Malfunctions 244 Side pockets 107
Automatic driving light control 69
Settings in Infotainment 243 Storage compartments under the floor cover-
Dipped beam 68
ing 108
Lane Departure Warning Driving abroad 72
tray with cargo element 107
Operation 243 Headlight range control 68
unlock manually 289
Lane recommendation 191 Parking lights 68
Unlock the boot lid 289
Language characters 134 Switching on and off 68
Variable loading floor 111
Last destinations 183 Warning lights 37
Index 315
Luggage compartment cover 104 Manual air conditioning Main menu 147
Roll-up cover 105 Air distribution control 118 Multimedia database 148
Luggage storage Controls 115 Playback control 147
Multi-function pocket 109 Manual gear changing Requirements and Restrictions 152
See Gear changing 207 safe removal of the data source 134
M map Safe removal of the data source 141
Main beam 69 display options 187 SD card 150
Warning light 43 Google Earth ™ 187 Setting 137
Map Set to 143
main menu
automatic scale 187 Voice control 130
Android car 174
Display 179 WLAN 151
Apple carplay 174
Images 153 Display of road signs 139 Media Command
MirrorLink® 175 Display options in the split screen 189 Control 157
radio 144 Display POIs 182 Main menu 157
Fast Map 187 Supported formats 157
Main menu
Media 147 Google Earth™ 179 Memory 51
Media Command 157 Lane recommendation 139 Memory Function for the seat 82
Navigation 178 Main menu 179 Menus in the display of the instrument cluster 51
SmartLink 173 Manual scale 187 Apple CarPlay 52
SMS 167 Map alignment 189 audio menu item 51
Video DVD 155 Operation 179 Main menu 51
Waypoint mode 195 POI display 139 navigation menu item 51
WLAN 170 Road Signs 189 Operation 49
Make up mirror 75 |Alignment 188 phone Menu item 52
Manage favourites 143 Massage function of the driver's seat 81 wizard menu item 52
Manage Favourites 137 Maximum speed 305 MG 299
Manage memory 139 MCB 215 Mirror 75, 78
Management of online services 15 media MirrorLink® 175
serve 147 MODE button
Management of online services ŠKODA Con-
USB 91, 150 See driving mode 240
nect 142
Media Modes of the automatic transmission 208
Management of ŠKODA Connect Online Serv-
Audio source 149 Modifications and technical alterations 255
ices 135
Bluetooth Audio 151 Most common routes 192
Managing paired devices 162 Browser 148
Managing saved routes 194 MPI 299
CD / DVD 149
Manoeuvre MSR 214
Compatible sources 152
Graphical driving recommendations 191 File formats 152 Multi-function pocket 109
Nav. announcements 192 Jukebox 151 Multicollision brake (MCB) 215
List 148 Multifunctional steering wheel 49
316 Index
Multifunction display Finish route guidance 192 navigation data 178
Functions 49 Foreword 177 Navigation data 177
Information Overview 49 GPS 177 Navigation data update 177
Memory 51 Graphical driving recommendations 191 Nav. announcements 140, 192
multimedia Home address 184
Net partition 112
see media 147 Image with GPS 187
Nets 103, 104
Multimedia database 148 Imported destinations 139
Intermediate target 189 Network
Mute 128 Data connection 135
Main menu 178
MyŠKODA App application 11 Data roaming 135
Manage memory 139
Map 139 setting 135
N set to 137
Map alignment 189
N1 110 Map scale 187 Values of the downloaded data 135
navigation Most common routes 192 New route 194
additional window 179 Navigation data 177 Notes 12
Contacts 183 Navigation data update 177
destination search 180 Nav. announcements 140, 192 O
Favourites 183 Options for map display in the split screen 189 obstruction of traffic 198
Map orientation 188 Preferred route type 139 oil
obstruction of traffic 198 Route 189 see Engine oil 267
Options for map display 187 Route calculation 190 Oil changing
route display 187 Route change 193 Engine oil 266
route list 194 Route display in the split screen 189
target import 185 On-board computer
Route guidance 189
target memory 183 see multifunction display 49
Route information 192
target representation 187 On-line
Route options 139
Update navigation data online 178 destination search 180
Route schedule 192
Working with the navigation 177 Detail of the traffic report 198
Set to 139
Navigation Import POI categories 178, 186
Start the route guidance 190
Abort route guidance 192 route import 194
Status line 140
Advanced settings 140 target import 183, 186
Tank options 140
Alternative route 139 Update navigation data 178
Top speeds 140
Demo mode 140, 191 Trailer towing 191 Online
Destination address 181 Transit point 193 Destinationdetails 190
Destination details 190 Types of destination search/destination en- Find car park 182
Destination in map 182 try 180 Find petrol station 182
Destination presentation in the split screen 189 Update the navigation data 140 List of traffic reports 197
Dynamic route 139 Version information 140 Navigation data update 177
Edit route 192 Voice control 130 Online goals 183
Final destinations 183 Waypoint mode 194, 195
Index 317
Online services Park Passive Safety 19
Deleting the user 14 Rear traffic alert 219 Pedals 207
Electronic Owner's Manual 14 Park assist Floor mats 207
Google Earth™ map 179 Parking 228 Personalisation
Instruction video 14 Park Assist 225 Configuration wizard 129
Localisation services 15 Automatic brake assist 229 Personalization 53
Private mode 15 Departing from a parallel parking space 229 Operating principle 53
Services Management 15 Malfunctions 229 Overview of some personalized functions 54
Switching user 14 Operation 226 Set 54
ŠKODA Connect Portal website 13 Parking 229 Petrol 262
Online Services 13 Parking space search 227 Petrol station 182
Activation in Infotainment 14 Switch to park mode 227
Petrol station logo 139
Care Connect 16 Park assistant
Infotainment Online 17 phone
Activation/deactivation 221
proactive service 16 connect to the infotainment 160
Parking 206 couple 160
Remote access to the vehicle 17 Park Assist 225
Service package 13 Phone
Parking sensors 215
ŠKODA Connect website 13 Adjust text messages 137
Rear View Camera 222
Online services ŠKODA Connect Clear calls 137
Parking aid Diverting calls 137
enable service 142 Automatic emergency braking 218 Import contacts 137
Opening/closing automatic system activation when moving for- Manage Favourites 137
contactless boot lid 63 ward 218 Phone call 166
opening/closing contactless boot lid 63 Display in Infotainment screen 217 Premium 137
Operating the Infotainment menus 126 Operation 216 rSAP 160
Operating weight 300 Settings in Infotainment 216 Settings call 137
Operation Parking assistance set to 137
Telephone 158, 159 Activation / deactivation 218 User profile 137
Original accessories 255 Parking brake 204 Phonebox 90
Overhang angle 304 Warning light 39 Phone call 166
Overview Parking lights 68 Phone Premium
Cockpit 35 Parking sensors 215 SIM card 163
Engine compartment 266 Parking the vehicle Pictures
Fuses 291 see Parking 206 Compatible sources 154
Warning lights 37 Parking ticket holder 89 File formats 154
Own POI categories 185, 186 Park pilot 215 Requirements and restrictions 154
Part replacement 255 Supported file formats 154
P Passive safety Pin code
Pairing process 160 Before setting off 19 set to 137
Driving safety 19
318 Index
Playback radio Refill
Media 147 Broadcasting 144 Windscreen washer fluid 266
Pockets 95 main menu 144 refilling
POI 185, 186 Radio stations Logo 145, 146 AdBlue 263
POIs 182 scan 144 Refilling
serve 144 Coolant 268
Pop-up window
Map 189 Radio Engine oil 267
L-band 137 Reflective vest 276
Power steering 39
List of available stations 145 Refuelling 261
Practical equipment
Set 136, 142 Fuel 261
230-volt socket 98
Traffic program (TP) 146
Practical features Register online services
Voice control 130
12-volt socket in the interior 97 settings 135, 142
Radio equipment
12 volt socket in luggage compartment 98 Registration of online services
Information on Directive 2014/53/EU 9
Ashtray 99 Electronic Owner's Manual 14
Radio remote control Instruction video 14
Cigarette lighter 100
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventila-
Glasses storage box 93 Regulation
tion) 121
Parking ticket holder 89 Headlight beam 68
Pockets 95 Radio station 145
Remote access to the vehicle 17
Reflective vest 276 Preset buttons 145
Remote control
Seat backrest with long cargo channel 96 Radio station logos 145, 146
Changing battery 286
Storage compartment 88 Update 135
Synchronisation process 59
Storage compartment for umbrella 94 radio stations Unlocking/locking 55
Storage compartment under the front pas- Select channels and search 144
Remote transfer of SIM data 160
senger’s seat 94 Raising the vehicle 280
Removable light 110
Waste container 92 Rear fog light 70 Changing batteries 287
Preferred contacts 165 Warning light 40
Removable through-loading bag 96
Preheating unit 41 Rear headrests
Repairs and technical alterations 255
Principles of Infotainment operation 125 Adjusting the height 85
Replace
Private mode 15 Removing/inserting 85
Battery 287
Proactive occupant protection 242 Rear seats 84
Replacing
Proactive passenger protection warning light 41 Rear traffic alert 219
Bulbs 295
Proactive service 16 Rear Traffic Alert Fuses 291
Puncture repair kit 281 Malfunctions 221 Windscreen wiper blades 289
Operation 220
Reproduction
R Rear View Camera 222 Video DVD 155
Radiator shutters 211 Rear view mirror 78 Reset counter for distance driven (trip) 47
Rear window - heating 75 Restaurant 182
Record waypoints 195 Reversible belt tensioners 24
Index 319
Rims 272 I-Size 33 Massage function of the driver's seat 81
Road Signs ISOFIX 32 Memory Function of the electrically adjustable
infotainment display 189 TOP TETHER 33 seat 82
Roller blind SAFE, SAFELOCK Rear 84
see Luggage compartment cover 105 See SafeLock 57 Rear armrest 84
Roof Save radio Rear seat backrests 84
Load 113 Save channel 145 Setting 80
Saving electrical energy 210 Storing in memory of remote control key 82
Roof racks 113
Ventilation 87
route Saving fuel 210
see Instrument cluster
new route 194 Scraper 259
see Instrument cluster 36
Online Route Import 194 Screen
route list 194 Selector lever 208
see Infotainment screen 124
Route 189 Selector lever control 208
Screen display 125
Store route 192 Selector lever lock 43
SD card 150
Route calculation 190 Safe removal 141 service
Trailer towing 191 Images 154
search
Route information 192 media 147
aim 180
radio 144
route list 194 Online goals 180
Service 255
Route options 139 Search
Service interval display 52
Route schedule 192 Types of destination search/destination en-
Warning light 46
rSAP 160 try 180
Service interval 52
Data connection 170 Seat belt
height adjustment 22 Service interval display 52
Running in
Warning light 39, 43 Service intervals 52
Brake pads 204
Engine 210 Seat belts 22 Service schedule 52
Tyres 272 Belt tensioners 24 Setting
fastening and unfastening 23 Headrests 85
S Inertia reels 24 Mirror 78, 79
Seat electrical adjustment 81 Positions of the variable loading floor 111
SafeLock 57
Seats Seat belt height 22
Safe removal of the data source 134, 141 Seats 80
Safety 19 Convenience operation of the front passenger
seat 82 Time 47
Airbag 25 settings
Child safety 29 Electrical adjustment 81
Folding front passenger seat 83 Bass tones 133
Child seats 29 equalizer 133
Correct seating position 19 Front 80
Front armrest 83 infotainment 133, 141
Headrests 85 Reset to factory settings 199
Headrests 85
Heating 86, 87 Software Update 132
Manually adjusting 80 sound 133
320 Index
sound system 133 Telephone 143 SMS
surround 133 Time and date 133, 141 Main menu 167
system information 132 Top speeds 140 New message 167
ŠKODA Connect 142 Units 134, 141 Received message 168
vehicle 199 Update software 135 Snow chains 275
Settings User profile 165 Sockets
Additional keypad languages 134, 141 Video DVD 137 12-volt socket in the interior 97
Advanced settings 140 Voice control 134 12 volt socket in luggage compartment 98
APN 135, 163 Volume 128 230 V 98
Bluetooth 134, 137, 142 WLAN 135 Software Update 132, 135
Codecs 137 Settings Call Software updates 142
Configuration wizard 129 Clear calls SettingsText messages 137
SOS button 15
DAB 136, 143 Set to
sound 133
Data connection 135 Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventila-
External device data transfer 134, 141 Sound 141
tion) 120
FM 136, 142 sound system 133
Side compartments in the luggage compart-
Images 137 ment 107 Spare wheel 273, 274
Information regarding the version of the navi- Removing / stowing 279
SIM card
gation data 140 Change PIN code 163 Speed limitations 191
Infotainment language 134, 141 Data Connection 170 Speed limiter 43, 231
Infotainment screen 133, 141 Insert 163 Speed regulating system
Manage favourites 165 PIN code 163 Warning light 43
Manage memory 139 Remove 163 Speed symbol 274
Map 139 Split screen
Sliding/tilting roof
Media 137, 143 Manoeuvre 191
Activate operation 67
Navigation 139
Activating operation of the sunblind 67 Spoiler 256
Nav. announcements 140
Sunshade 67 Sports information 48
Network 135
SmartLink 172 Sporty driving
Phone 137
Android Auto 173 information 48
Pin code 137
Apple CarPlay 174 Spurhalteassistent 243
Radio 136, 142
Introduction to the subject 172 SSID 135
Reset to factory settings 134
Main menu 173
Restore factory settings 142 Stabilisation system 213
MirrorLink® 175
Route options 139 Stability Control (ESC) 40, 213
SmartLink+ 138, 143 SmartLink+
Set 138, 143 Standby 127
Software updates 142 START-STOP 202
Sound 141 ŠKODA OneApp application 175
Jump-starting 283
System information 135, 142 Manually disable / enable system 203
ŠKODA Connect 135 Operation 202
Tank options 140 Warning light 45
Index 321
START-STOP system 202 Sun visor 76 Dialling the telephone number 164
Start engine 201 Sun visors 75, 76 Emergency call 164
Immobilizer 200 Supported sources Enter telephone number 164
Jump-starting 283 Media 152 Functions 164
starter button surround 133 Import contacts 143
Starting engine / Stopping 201 Information call 164
Swing
Starter button Introductory information 158
Infotainment description 124
Lock / unlock the steering lock 200 Main menu 158, 159
Switch
Problems with the engine start 202 Main telephone 161
Car battery 271
Switching the ignition on/off 201 Manage favourites 143
Switching off the ignition 201 Operation 158, 159
Starting the engine Switching on the ignition 201 Pairing process 160
Jump-starting 283
Switching the lights on and off 68 Preferred contacts 165
Start route guidance 190
Switch off rSAP 161
Status bar 125 Alarm 60 Set 143
Status line 179 switch on / offTraffic SIM card 161
Navigation 140 dynamic route 198 Telephone 158, 159
Telephone 158, 159 Telephone book 164
system information 132
Steering lock (KESSY system) 39 Text messages (SMS) 167
System information 135, 142
Steering wheel User profile 143
Buttons 49 T Voice control 130
Heating 87 Voicemail 164
proper posture 20 Tablet holder 100
Telephone book 164
setting 21 Tailgate 60
Telephone compatibility 160
Stop engine 201 Tank options 140
Telephone connection types 161
Stopping target memory 183
Telephone functions 164
see Parking 206 TCS 40
Telephone number 164
Storage 88 TDI CR 299
Telephone Premium
Storage compartments Technical data 299
rSAP 160
see Practical features 88 telephone
Text messages 167
Stored destinations conditions for pairing 160
Through-loading bag 96
Final destinations 183 Telephone
Tilt / slide sunroof
target memory 183 Additional telephone 161
Sunblind 67
Store destination 190 Bluetooth Profiles 162
Bluetooth® update 160 Tilting / sliding sunroof
Storing Operation 66
seats 82 Breakdown call 164
Call list 166 Time 47, 133, 141
Storing skis 96
Compatibility 160 Time and date display in the Infotainment
Sunblind for the tilt / slide sunroof 67 screen 127
Conference call 166
Sunshade of the sliding/tilting roof 67 Connection types 161 Tiptronic 209
322 Index
Tire Trailer towing 250 new 272
Wear indicator 273 navigation 191 Tyre pressure 272
TMC Trailer towing device Tyre size 274
Detail of the traffic report 198 Handling 250
dynamic route 198 Warning message 250 U
List of traffic reports 197 Transit point 193 Units 134, 141
Tools 277 transmitter Unlock
Top speeds 140 See main menu 144 Individual settings 57
TOP TETHER 33 Transport KESSY 56
Touch screen 124 Luggage compartment 102 Unlocking
Towing 284, 285 Roof racks 113 Central locking button 57
Towing a trailer 254 Towing device and trailer 250 in case of emergency 288
Towing device Transporting children 29 Remote control 55
Accessories 250 Triangle 276 Unlocking and locking 55
Vertical load 250 TSA 215 Unlock steering lock 200
Towing eye 285 TSI 299 Update navigation data 178
Towing protection 60 Turning off Infotainment 127 Update the navigation data 140
Towing the vehicle 284 Turning on Infotainment 127 USB 91, 150
Traction control (ASR) 214 Turn signal 69 Safe removal 141
Traction control (TCS) 40 Turn signal system Useful equipment
traffic Warning light 42 Clothes hook 95
Detail of the traffic report 198 Tutorial videos 11 Cup holders 91
Traffic Type plate 299 Removable through-loading bag 96
List of traffic reports 197 Tyre load capacity 274 Useful links 2
Traffic Information (TMC) 198 Tyre pressure 272 User account
Traffic jam assistant 245 Warning light 41 Configuration wizard 129
Traffic program (TP) 146 Tyre pressure monitor User profile 137, 143
Traffic reports (TMC) 197 refer to the tyre pressure monitoring 248
V
Traffic sign recognition 246 Tyre pressure monitoring 248
Traffic signs Warning light 41 Variable loading floor 111
see Traffic sign recognition 246 Tyre Pressure Monitoring vCard 183, 185
Trailer Storing the tyre pressure values and Infotain- Vehicle - Settings 199
Connect and disconnect 251 ment display 249 Vehicle battery
Load 252 Tyre repair 281 charging 270
loading 252 Tyres 272 Safety instructions 269
Towing a trailer 254 damage 272 Warning light 43
Trailer stabilisation system (TSA) 215 Explanation of the label 274
Index 323
Vehicle care on / off 130 Tyre age 272
Exterior 259 Operation principle 131 Tyre damage 272
Outside 258 Settings 134 Tyre pressure 272
Vehicle cleaning Stop / restore command 131 Tyre storage 272
Exterior 259 Voicemail 164 Uni-directional tires 272
Windscreens 259 Volume 128 Winter tyres 274
Vehicle condition Volume setting 128 Window
Auto-Check-Control 48 operation 63
Vehicle dimensions 302, 303 W Window convenience operation 65
Vehicle height 302, 303 Waiter Window operation 63
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 299 Voice control 131 Windscreen - heating 75
Vehicle length 302, 303 Warning lights 37 Windscreen washer fluid
vehicle systems 199 Warning symbols Refill 266
Vehicle tool kit 277 see Warning lights 37 Warning light 45
Vehicle width 302, 303 Warning triangle 276 Windscreen washing system 76
Ventilation Warning when speeding 50 Windscreen wipers and washers 76
Seats 86 Warranty 6 Activation 77
Replacing the windscreen wiper blade 290
Vest 276 Washing the vehicle 257
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades 289
Video DVD Waste container 92 Service position of the windscreen wiper
Compatible sources 156 Water in the fuel filter 46 arms 289
Main menu 155 Waypoint mode 194 Winter operation 274
Play back 155 Main menu 195 All season tyres 274
Supported file formats 156 Record waypoints 195 Car battery 270
Video DVD menu 155 Set waypoint manually 195 Diesel fuel 263
Menu 155 Waypoint tour memory 196 Snow chains 275
video player 155 Waypoint tour memory 196 Winter tyres 274
VIN Weather conditions 255 Winter tyres 274
Vehicle Identification Number 299 Weights 299, 300, 301 Wiper and Washers
Virtual pedal Wheel bolts Automatic rear window wipers 77
see operating contactless boot lid 63 Anti-theft wheel bolts 280 Wipers and washer
Visibility 75 Caps 279 Warning light for windscreen washer fluid lev-
Visors 75, 76 Loosening and tightening 280 el 45
Voice amplification 128 Wheels 272 Wipers and washers
Voice control 130 Changing 278 Activate 77
Commands 131 Full trim 279 Refill fluid 266
Correction of a voice command input 131 Load Index 274 Wiping interval 77
Help 131 Snow chains 275 Wireless Internet Hotspot
Not recognising a voice command 131 Speed symbol 274 set to 135
324 Index
Wizard for blind spot monitoring 219
Driving situations and warnings 220
Operation 220
WLAN 151, 170
Client 171
Connect 171
Connect to hotspot 171
Set hotspot 171
Switch hotspot on/off 170
WPS 135, 171
WLAN client
set to 135
WLAN Client 171
WPS 135, 171
X
XDS 214
Xenon headlight 70
Other Characters
ŠKODA Connect
register 142
Register 135
see Online Services 13
services Manager 142
Services Manager 135
Set 135
set to 142
ŠKODA Connect Online Services
Enable services 135
Register 135
ŠKODA OneApp application 175
Index 325
326 Index
Index 327
Reprinting, duplicating, translating and any other use, either in whole or in part, Subject to change.
is not permitted without the written consent of ŠKODA AUTO a.s.
Issued by: ŠKODA AUTO a.s.
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. expressly reserves all rights relating to copyright laws.
© ŠKODA AUTO a.s. 2017
www.skoda-auto.com
Návod k obsluze
Superb anglicky 11.2017
3V0012720AG
3V0012720AG